Syh Sinaut-St7-B1 76

Station control system
___________________
Preface
Properties and technical
specifications of the SINAUT
components
1
___________
SIMATIC NET
SINAUT ST7
System Manual
Network structures and

2
___________________
topologies
3
___________________
Installation guide
Installing and putting a TIM
4
___________________
into operation
Installation and
commissioning of the
modems and routers
5
___________
6
___________________
Certifications and approvals
A
___________________
References
Volume 1: System and Hardware
08/2011
C79000-G8976-C178-08
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the relevant information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NRNBERG
GERMANY
Order number: C79000-G8976-C178

08/2011
Copyright Siemens AG
2009...2011.
Technical data subject to change
Preface
About this documentation
What's new in SINAUT ST7?
SINAUT ST7 provides the following new functions:
New version of "SINAUT ST7 configuration and diagnostics software" V5.2
Version "SINAUT ST7 configuration and diagnostics software" V5.1
New SINAUT TD7 library V2.2 SP2 for the CPU

System Manual, 08/2011, C79000-G8976-C178-08
Preface
SINAUT ST7 configuration and diagnostics software V5.2

New functions
Sending SMS messages via a connected modem SINAUT MD720-3 or MD741-1
For this, the two following SINAUT objects are available with the TD7 software
TD7onTIM:
"Sms01_S" for parameter assignment of the SMS
"SmServiceCenter" for parameter assignment of the SMSC access
SINAUT data object "Par12x1D_R" for "TD7onTIM"
The parameter object can receive a maximum of 12 parameters each with one double
word from SINAUT ST7cc/sc.
PIN for MSC stations with MD720-3
Instead of only 4-digit PINs, 4- to 8-digit PINs can now be entered. Leading zeros are
also possible. This function applies only for projects created with the configuration and
diagnostics software as of V5.2.
Compatible STEP 7 version
The configuration software Version V5.2 can be used with STEP 7 as of Version V5.4
Service Pack 4.
Compatible operating systems
The configuration software version V5.2 is supported by the following operating systems:
Windows Server 2003 SP2 Standard Edition
Windows XP Professional SP2 or higher
Windows Server 2008, 32-bit Standard Edition
Windows Server 2008 R2, 64-bit Standard Edition SP1 (workstation computer)
Windows 7, 32-bit / 64-bit:
Windows 7 Ultimate
Windows 7 Professional
Windows 7 Enterprise standard installation (corresponds to Windows 7 Ultimate)
New functions of the SINAUT ST7 configuration and diagnostics software V5.1
With the SINAUT ST7 configuration and diagnostics software V5.1, the following new
functions became available.
Compatible with STEP 7 V5.5
2 new TIM modules: TIM 3V-IE DNP3 and TIM4R-IE DNP3
Preface
CPU 400 and CPU 400H can be operated on DNP3-TIMs with TD7onTIM
"Max. allowed disruption time" parameter in STEP 7 for ST7 Ethernet TIMs
Configuration in the "Parameter assignment of TIM modules" > "Interfaces" tab >
Ethernet interface
With this parameter, you can enter the tolerance time for connection disruption detected
by the TIM. This can be useful in wireless networks that are often disrupted.
If there is still a disruption on the connection when the set time has elapsed, the
disruption is signaled to all connection partners of the disrupted station.
New SINAUT TD7 library V2.2 SP2 for the CPU

New functions of the TD7 library V2.2 SP2:
Block "Dat256D_S for sending a maximum of 256 double words with any content
Block "Dat256D_R for receiving a maximum of 256 double words with any content
Replaced documentation
This manual replaces the manual release 07/2009 (C79000-G89xx-C222-07).
For older releases of the manual, see also section Version history (Page 7).
Purpose of this documentation

The SINAUT ST7 system manual is split into two complementary volumes.
Volume 1: System & Hardware
This documentation will support you on your way to successful application of SINAUT
ST7. This introduces you to the topic in clear and straightforward steps and provides you
with an overview of the hardware components of the SINAUT ST7 station control system.
You will be supported during the planning of network structures and topologies and will
see how to install and commission SINAUT components based on the installation
guidelines.
Volume 2: Software
This documentation provides you with an overview of the software components of the
SINAUT ST7 station control system. You will see how individual components are
configured. Diagnostics and service options are also explained.

Preface
Note
Documentation for the SINAUT ST1 system and older modules
This release of the manual "SINAUT ST7" (volume 1 + 2) no longer has detailed information
on the SINAUT ST1 system and the following older modules:
All previous TIM 3 modules: TIM 3V, TIM 32, TIM 33, TIM 34
TIM 4V, TIM 4VD, TIM 42, TIM 42D, TIM 43, TIM 43D, TIM 44, TIM 44D
If you require information on these modules or on SINAUT ST1, refer to release 05/2007 of
this manual. You will find release 05/2007 on the Internet pages of SIMATIC NET Service &
Support at the following address:
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22548697)
You can find the documents using the search function of SIMATIC NET Service and Support
pages by entering the ID.
ID for volume 1: 24621696
ID for volume 2: 24619519
Validity of the documentation

This manual relates to the following software versions:
SINAUT ST7 configuration and diagnostics software for the PG V5.2
SINAUT TD7 library for the CPU V2.2 SP2
SINAUT TIM firmware V4.4.0 for the TIM 4
SINAUT TIM firmware V2.3 for the TIM 3V-IE variants
SINAUT TIM firmware V2.3 for the TIM 4R-IE
Further information on the Internet

You will find further information on the SINAUT products on the Internet at the following
address:
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22548697)
There select the required information under "Entry type" (for example "Updates", "Manuals",
"FAQs" etc.).
Training, Service & Support

You will find information on Training, Service & Support in the multilanguage document
"Training, Service & Support" on the "SIMATIC NET Manual Collection" DVD that ships with
the products.
Preface
Version history
Release 07/2009 of the manual (C79000-G89xx-C222-07)
New functions:
New version "SINAUT ST7 configuration software for the PG/PC" V5.0
The Ethernet TIMs can be configured for communication via the MSC protocol. This
allows the use of the GPRS/GSM modem SINAUT MD720-3 even in SINAUT in
Internet/GPRS networks. An encrypted connection can be established from an
Ethernet TIM to the Internet via a DSL modem.
The time slot method can now also be configured with the "SINAUT ST7 configuration
software for the PG/PC" as of V5.0 for a master TIM without DCF7 receiver, if a
TIM 4R-IE with an Ethernet connection to an ST7cc/ST7sc PC is used as the master
TIM.
The configuration software Version V5.0 can be used with STEP 7 as of Version V5.4
Service Pack 4.
The configuration software version V5.0 is supported by the following operating systems:
Windows XP Professional SP2
Windows Server 2003 SP2
Windows Vista 32 Bit Ultimate and Business (with or without SP1)
New firmware version V2.0 for all Ethernet TIM modules
The new firmware supports the MSC protocol.
Validity of the manual:
SINAUT ST7 configuration software for the PG/PC V5.0
SINAUT TD7 library for the CPU V2.2
SINAUT TIM firmware V4.3.9 for the TIM 4

New functions:
New product "TIM 4R-IE" for connecting SINAUT via WAN and Ethernet
New product version "SINAUT ST7 configuration software for the PG/PC" V4.1
SINAUT TIM firmware V4.3.7 for the TIM 3 / TIM 4

Preface


New functions:
New product versions
SINAUT TD7 library for the CPU V2.2 with new blocks for communication via P-bus
New hardware for GSM and GPRS
GPRS modem MD740-1 for secure packet-oriented communication via GSM mobile
wireless (GPRS)
GSM modem MD720-3 as replacement for the discontinued GSM modem MC45 for
establishing dial-up connections via the GSM mobile wireless network; possible as of
firmware V1.7.3 of the MD720-3
SINAUT TIM firmware V4.3.7 for the TIM 3 / TIM 4
Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1
Properties and technical specifications of the SINAUT components........................................................ 13

1.1
Area of application .......................................................................................................................13
1.2
Components in a SINAUT ST7 system .......................................................................................14
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.3.7
1.3.8
1.3.9
1.3.10
SINAUT TIM communication modules.........................................................................................15

Overview of All TIM Variants........................................................................................................16
The TIM 3V-IE variants ................................................................................................................17
Design of the TIM 3V-IE variants .................................................................................................19
Technical specifications of the TIM 3V-IE variants ......................................................................20
The TIM 4R-IE..............................................................................................................................25
Design of the TIM 4R-IE ..............................................................................................................27
Technical specifications of the TIM 4R-IE ...................................................................................28
The TIM 4 variants .......................................................................................................................31
Design of the TIM 4 variants ........................................................................................................33
Technical specifications of the TIM 4 variants .............................................................................34
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
The classic SINAUT ST7 modems ..............................................................................................36

The modem variants ....................................................................................................................37
Overview of all modem variants and accessories........................................................................38
Technical specifications of the SINAUT ST7 modems ................................................................39
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
Mobile wireless components........................................................................................................44

Area of application for GSM.........................................................................................................44
GSM modem MD720-3 ................................................................................................................44
EGPRS/GPRS router MD741-1 ...................................................................................................46
ANT794-4MR GSM/GPRS antenna ............................................................................................48
Technical specifications of the SINAUT mobile wireless components ........................................49
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
LTOP overvoltage protection modules ........................................................................................53

Variants and overview of the LTOP overvoltage protection modules..........................................53
Technical specifications of the LTOP overvoltage protection module .........................................54
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
Radio clock components..............................................................................................................55

Accessories for DCF77 ................................................................................................................55
GPS receiver................................................................................................................................57
Overview of the radio clock components .....................................................................................59
Technical specifications of the radio clock components..............................................................60
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
Connecting cables .......................................................................................................................63

Cable for connecting TIM and modem modules ..........................................................................63
WAN connecting cables...............................................................................................................64
TIM 4R / 4RD interface adapter cable .........................................................................................65
1.9
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
The SINAUT ST7 standard software package.............................................................................65

SINAUT TD7 Library, blocks for the CPU....................................................................................65
SINAUT ST7 configuration software for the PG ..........................................................................67
Overview for ordering SINAUT ST7 software ..............................................................................73

Table of contents
1.9.4
1.9.5
Installation of the SINAUT ST7 standard software package....................................................... 73

Uninstalling SINAUT ST7 software packages............................................................................. 74
1.10
1.10.1
1.10.2
1.10.3
1.10.4
1.10.5
SINAUT ST7cc, the add-on for WinCC....................................................................................... 75

Area of application ...................................................................................................................... 75
The special properties of SINAUT ST7cc ................................................................................... 76
System prerequisites................................................................................................................... 77
Ordering data for SINAUT ST7cc ............................................................................................... 79
Technical specifications of SINAUT ST7cc................................................................................. 80
1.11
1.11.1
1.11.2
1.11.3
1.11.4
SINAUT ST7sc SCADA Connect software ................................................................................. 80

The special properties of SINAUT ST7sc ................................................................................... 81
System prerequisites................................................................................................................... 83
Ordering data for SINAUT ST7sc ............................................................................................... 85
Technical specifications of SINAUT ST7sc................................................................................. 86
Network structures and topologies........................................................................................................... 87

2.1
Overview of the possible network types...................................................................................... 87
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
Configurations ............................................................................................................................. 88
Configurations with IP-based WAN............................................................................................. 88
Configurations with classic WAN ................................................................................................ 93
Installation guide...................................................................................................................................... 97
3.1
Horizontal and vertical installation .............................................................................................. 97
3.2
Dimensions for installation of the SINAUT ST7 components ..................................................... 98
3.3
Current consumption and power loss of the SINAUT ST7 components..................................... 98
3.4
Installing the TIM 3V-IE variants in an S7-300.......................................................................... 101
3.5
Installing the TIM 4R-IE in an S7-300 ....................................................................................... 108
3.6
Standalone TIM 4R-IE with an S7-400 or PC ........................................................................... 116
3.7
Installation of the TIM 4 as CP in an S7-300 ............................................................................ 119
3.8
Standalone TIM 4 with an S7-400 or PC .................................................................................. 123
Installing and putting a TIM into operation ............................................................................................. 131

4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
Design of the TIM 3V-IE variants .............................................................................................. 132

Front view of the TIM 3V-IE variants with closed front panel.................................................... 132
Front view of the TIM 3V-IE variants with front panel removed ................................................ 133
LEDs of the TIM 3V-IE variants ................................................................................................ 133
Pinout of the ports ..................................................................................................................... 135
Standard connecting cables for the TIM 3V-IE variants ........................................................... 136
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
Design of the TIM 4R-IE............................................................................................................ 140

Front view of the TIM 4R-IE with closed front panel ................................................................. 140
Front view of the TIM 4R-IE with removed front panel ............................................................. 141
LEDs of the TIM 4R-IE .............................................................................................................. 142
Pinout of the ports ..................................................................................................................... 144
Standard connecting cables for the TIM 4R-IE ......................................................................... 145
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
Design of the TIM 3 and TIM 4 modules................................................................................... 149

Front view of the TIM 4 with closed front panels....................................................................... 149
Front view of the TIM 4 with removed front panels................................................................... 150
10
Table of contents
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
LEDs of the TIM 3 / TIM 4..........................................................................................................151

Pinout of the X1 and X2 connectors ..........................................................................................151
Standard connecting cables that can be connected to connector X1........................................153
View of the TIM 4 from above ....................................................................................................156
View of the TIM 3 / TIM 4 from below ........................................................................................157
4.4
4.4.1
Options for connecting up and settings for the TIM 4R or TIM 4RD..........................................159
Possible attachments and settings for the TIM 4R and TIM 4RD..............................................160
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
Installing a TIM...........................................................................................................................163
Introduction ................................................................................................................................163
Important notes on using the device..........................................................................................164
Installing a TIM module as CP ...................................................................................................166
Installing a TIM 4 / TIM 4R-IE as a standalone device ..............................................................167
Horizontal and vertical installation .............................................................................................168
Connecting the TIM to the power supply ...................................................................................169
4.6
Configuring a TIM and setting parameters ................................................................................172
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
Startup activities of the TIM module ..........................................................................................177

Startup of the TIM 3V-IE variants ..............................................................................................177
Startup activities of the TIM 4R-IE .............................................................................................179
Startup behavior of the TIM 4 ....................................................................................................182
Installation and commissioning of the modems and routers................................................................... 185

5.1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................185
5.2
Important notes on using the device..........................................................................................185
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
GSM/GPRS modem MD720-3...................................................................................................187

Displays and connectors............................................................................................................188
Connecting the MD720-3 to the TIM and antenna.....................................................................191
Prerequisites for operation.........................................................................................................191
Further documentation...............................................................................................................192
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
GPRS/GSM router MD741-1 .....................................................................................................192

Displays and connectors............................................................................................................193
Connecting the MD741-1 to the TIM and antenna.....................................................................196
Prerequisites for operation.........................................................................................................196
Further documentation...............................................................................................................197
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
MD2 dedicated line modem .......................................................................................................198

Displays and connectors accessible from the front ...................................................................198
Configuration switches accessible from above..........................................................................205
Connectors and configuration switches accessible from below ................................................211
Connecting the MD2 with TIM, LTOP and dedicated line..........................................................215
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
LTOP line transformer with overvoltage protection....................................................................227

Structure.....................................................................................................................................227
Connecting up the MD2 modem ................................................................................................230
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
Analog dial-up modem MD3 ......................................................................................................235

Indicators and connectors accessible from the front .................................................................235
Configuration switches accessible from above..........................................................................242
Connectors and configuration switches accessible from below ................................................252
Connecting the MD3 with a TIM and TAE6 outlet......................................................................256
Connecting the MD3 with TIM, LTOP and dedicated line..........................................................257

11
Table of contents
5.7.6
5.7.7
User-configurable profiles ......................................................................................................... 263

LTOP line transformer with overvoltage protection................................................................... 266
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.8.4
ISDN dial-up modem MD4 ........................................................................................................ 268

Indicators and connectors accessible from the front ................................................................ 268
Configuration switches accessible from above ......................................................................... 273
Connectors and configuration switches accessible from below................................................ 277
Connecting the MD4 with a TIM and ISDN outlet ..................................................................... 279
5.9
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.9.4
5.9.5
Installing and putting a SINAUT MD2, MD3, MD4 modem into operation................................ 280
Installation ................................................................................................................................. 280
Installation on an S7-300 rail .................................................................................................... 280
Installation on a 35 mm standard rail ........................................................................................ 282
Horizontal and vertical installation ............................................................................................ 282
Connecting to the power supply................................................................................................ 283
Certifications and approvals................................................................................................................... 285

6.1
Approvals for the TIM 4R/4RD and the SINAUT modems........................................................ 285
6.2
Additional approvals for SINAUT products for the analog telephone network.......................... 288
6.3
Approvals for the TIM 3V-IE variants and the TIM 4R-IE ......................................................... 291
References ............................................................................................................................................ 297

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 299
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 315
12
Properties and technical specifications of the

SINAUT components
1.1
Area of application
Process control over WAN and Ethernet

SINAUT ST7 is a system based on SIMATIC S7 for fully automatic monitoring and control
of process stations that exchange data with another and with one or more control centers
over a WAN (wide area network) or Ethernet (TCP/IP).
The control center

The following can currently be used as control centers:
SIMATIC controllers S7-300 or S7-400. This solution is suitable for less complex control
centers, in which only a current image of the process data in the stations is required. By
entering commands, setpoints or parameters, it is possible to intervene in the process
control of the stations.
SINAUT ST7cc, the PC control center (single or redundant) based on WinCC. This is a
control center system for SINAUT ST7 specially tailored to the event-driven and timestamped data transmission of the SINAUT system.
SINAUT ST7sc, the link to control centers of other vendors over OPC. Using the "Data
Access Interface", the SINAUT telecontrol technology can also interface with the control
center systems of other vendors. ST7sc has extensive buffer mechanisms that prevent
data loss, for example, if the OPC client fails.
The SINAUT WAN networks

The following WANs can be used for data transmission:
Dedicated lines (copper or fiber-optic cables)
Private wireless networks (optionally with time slots)
Analog telephone network
Digital ISDN network
Mobile wireless networks (GSM)
All networks can be combined as necessary. Redundant paths are also possible. Star, bus
(linear) and node structures can be implemented.

13
Properties and technical specifications of the SINAUT components

1.2 Components in a SINAUT ST7 system
SINAUT over Ethernet

SINAUT communication is possible between station and control center and between stations
over Ethernet or IP-based networks. This includes transmission using the GPRS service in
mobile wireless networks (GSM networks). The prerequisite is continually available
connections.
Change-driven data transmission

The SINAUT software in the stations allows change-driven process data exchange with the
control center and between the individual CPUs.
Local data storage

One special characteristic of the TIM communications module used in the SINAUT ST7
system is the local storage of data messages (including time stamp) if there is a problem on
the communication link, if a partner fails or to optimize costs on dial-up networks.
Date and time always precise

The CPUs and even the control center (for example ST7cc) can be supplied throughout the
network with the date and time using a DCF77 radio clock. The systems therefore always
have a precise time of day including standard/daylight-saving time adjustment. Instead of
DCF77, GPS (Global Positioning System) can also be used as the time source.
SINAUT remote programming

All the diagnostic and programming functions provided by SIMATIC and SINAUT for station
automation and SINAUT communication can be used beyond the SINAUT networks while
process data transmission is active.
Alerting over SMS

The CPUs can transmit event-driven SMS messages to GSM mobile phones to alert standby
personnel. This is supported by both variants of the TD7 software (TD7onCPU and
TD7onTIM) although the range of functions is slightly different. This is described in detail in
the SINAUT ST7 system manual, volume 2 "Software".
1.2
Components in a SINAUT ST7 system

The SINAUT ST7 system is based on the S7-300 and S7 400 SIMATIC systems and on
WinCC. It expands these systems by adding the special SINAUT hardware and software
components listed below.
14

1.3 SINAUT TIM communication modules
Hardware components
The range of hardware components includes:
TIM communications modules
MD modem modules
Classic modems for dedicated line, analog and ISDN dial-up networks
Mobile wireless components
e.g. GSM modem MD720-3, GPRS router MD741-1
LTOP overvoltage protection modules
Radio clock components
Connecting cables
Software components
The range of software components includes:
Standard software for SINAUT ST7 consisting of the individual packages
SINAUT TD7 library (TD7onCPU). This contains blocks for the S7-CPU.
SINAUT TD7 library (TD7onTIM). Blocks on the TIM (no memory required on the
CPU)
SINAUT ST7 configuration and diagnostic software for the programming device
SINAUT ST7cc, the expansion package for WinCC consisting of
ST 7 Server, the interface between ST7 and WinCC
ST7cc Config, the configuration tool for ST7cc
SINAUT ST7sc, the SCADA Connect software, consisting of
OPC server, the interface between ST7 and an OPC client
ST7sc Config, the configuration tool for ST7sc
Note
The standard software for SINAUT ST7 is described in detail in Volume 2 of this system
manual.
The SINAUT ST7cc and SINAUT ST7sc software packages are described in separate
manuals.
1.3
SINAUT TIM communication modules

The central component of the SINAUT hardware is the TIM communications module
(Telecontrol Interface Module). This handles the data traffic for the S7-CPU or for the control
center PC with the aid of the SINAUT ST7 protocol via the relevant SINAUT network.

15

The TIM is housed in an S7-300 enclosure and is available in three basic versions:
TIM 3V-IE
The TIM 3V-IE is a SINAUT communications module for the SIMATIC S7-300. It has an RS232 interface to which a suitable modem can be connected. It also has an RJ-45 interface
that allows SINAUT communication over IP-based networks (LAN or WAN).
The TIM 3V-IE is available in standard and advanced versions. With the advanced versions,
the two interfaces can be used at the same time for SINAUT communication. The two
transmission paths can be completely independent of each other or form a redundant
transmission path.
TIM 4R-IE
The TIM 4R-IE is suitable for installation in a SIMATIC S7-300 as a communications module
and can also be connected over Ethernet to one or more SIMATIC S7-400s and to ST7cc or
ST7sc PC control centers as a standalone device.
It has two combined RS-232/RS-485 interfaces to which a classic WAN (dedicated line or
dial-up network) can be connected via a suitable modem. It also has two RJ-45 interfaces
that allow SINAUT communication over Ethernet-based networks (LAN or WAN).
All four interfaces can be used at the same time for SINAUT communication. The four
transmission paths can all be different and operated independently. The two pairs of
interfaces can also form a redundant transmission path.
TIM 4
The TIM 4 is suitable for installation in the SIMATIC S7-300 as a communications module
and can also be connected via their MPI ports to one or more SIMATIC S7-300/-400s and to
ST7cc or ST7sc PC control centers as a standalone device.
It has two WAN connectors in the form of RS-232/RS-485 ports to which a suitable external
modem can be connected.
The two WANs that can be connected to a TIM 4 may be of the same type or different, for
example dedicated line plus telephone network. The two transmission paths can be either
completely independent of each other or form a redundant transmission path.
The TIM 4RD is equipped with a DCF77 radio clock receiver.
1.3.1
Overview of All TIM Variants

All TIMs are supplied with a bus module connector allowing the TIM to be installed in an
S7-300 as a CP. The adapter cable for the second RS-232/RS-485 port ships with the
TIM 4R variant. The DCF77 adapter cable ships with the TIM 4RD with DCF77 radio clock
receiver.
The following table provides an overview of all TIM variants and their order numbers.
16

Table 1- 1
Overview of All TIM Variants

Can be used in
conjunction with
S7-300
MPI
port
Ethernet port
S7-400
RS-232/
RS-485 for
external
modem
Integrated
modem
DCF77 radio Order no.

clock2)
TIM 3V-IE
no
no
1 (RS-232)
no
no
6NH7 8003BA00
TIM 3V-IE
Advanced
1)
no
1 (RS-232)
no
no
6NH7 8003CA00
TIM 4R3)
no
no
no
6NH7 8004AA90
TIM 4RD 3)
no
no
6NH7 8004AD90
TIM 4R-IE
no
no
no
6NH7 8004BA00
1) The TIM can be connected either via the MPI interface of its S7-300-CPU or via its own Ethernet interface to an S7-400 or to the ST7cc or
ST7sc PC.
2) Including DCF77 adapter cable 6NH7700-0AD15
3) Including adapter cable 6NH7700-0AS05 for the second serial RS-232/RS-485 port
1.3.2
The TIM 3V-IE variants

The TIM 3V-IE is available in standard and advanced versions. The two communications
processors share the following properties:
TIM without integrated modem, single width
For installation as a communications processor (CP) in an S7-300
With a TIM 3V-IE, an S7-300 CPU or a C7 control system can then handle SINAUT
communication:
Via a classic SINAUT WAN network with SINAUT partners
Over an IP-based network (WAN or LAN) with SINAUT ST7 subscribers
It has two interfaces:
RS-232 interface for connection of required WAN transmission equipment (classic
SINAUT WAN)
To allow use of GPRS, the switchable serial interface of a station TIM 3V-IE can be
connected to a GSM network via the GSM modem MD720-3. This requires the MSC
protocol to be enabled in the STEP 7 > Properties dialog of the TIM > Interfaces tab.
The WAN interface then behaves like an Ethernet interface.
RJ-45 interface for attachment to Ethernet
The SINAUT TD7 software is integrated on the TIM (TD7onTIM)
Modules can be replaced without the need for a programming device
The following properties are different on the TIMs:

17

TIM 3V-IE
TIM 3V-IE Advanced
SINAUT communication over
RS-232 or RJ-45
RS-232 and RJ-45, also as

redundant transmission path
Use as
Station
Station
Nodes
Master station
Data memory
16,000 data messages
32,000 data messages
Number of S7 connections
20
Can be combined with other

TIMs in the rack
no
yes
Communication over MPI of the

S7-300 CPU
no
yes
The following figure shows a TIM 3V-IE.
Figure 1-1
SINAUT TIM 3V-IE communications module
18

1.3.3
Design of the TIM 3V-IE variants

The TIM 3V-IE variants have all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design:
Compact design; single standard width of the SM modules of the SIMATIC S7-300
9-pin D-sub male connector with an RS-232 interface for connecting a modem
RJ-45 jack for connection to Ethernet; industrial design with additional collar for inserting
the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
2-pin plug-in terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC
Front LEDs for display of Ethernet and WAN communication
Easy to mount; the TIM is mounted on the S7-300 rail and connected to adjacent
modules by means of the bus module connectors. No slot rules apply.
Can be operated in an expansion rack (ER) in conjunction with the IM 360/361. This
allows the TIM to be combined with a C7 control system, with the newer C7 control
systems it can also be combined using the supplied I/O expansion cable.
Can be operated without a fan
A backup battery or memory module are not required
The following figure shows the ports of the TIM 3V-IE or TIM 3V-IE Advanced (schematic
representation with covers removed).
RS232 interface
(9-pin, male):
WAN access point
via external modem
RJ45 interface:
Ethernet access point
G_IK10_XX_30112
24 V
Figure 1-2
Ports of the TIM 3V-IE or TIM 3V-IE Advanced

19

1.3.4
Technical specifications of the TIM 3V-IE variants
Technical specifications of the TIM 3V-IE

TIM 3V-IE
General
Transmission speed
RS-232
300 to 38,400 bps
Ethernet
10/100 Mbps autosensing
Interfaces:
Interfaces
Communication port,
electrical
Connection to power supply
1 x RS-232, 9-pin D-sub male connector
1 x RJ-45 (10/100 Mbps; TP)
2-pin plug-in terminal strip
Cable length
RS-232
max. 6 m
RS-485
max. 30 m
RJ-45
max. 10 m
Power supply
24 V DC; min. 20.4 V; max. 28.8 V
Current consumption
From backplane bus
200 mA
From 24 V DC
typically 160 mA, max. 200 mA
Power loss
5.8 W
Permitted ambient conditions
Operating temperature
0 C to +60 C
Transport/storage temperature
-40 C to +70 C
Relative humidity
Max. 95 % at +25 C
Construction
Module format
Compact module for S7-300, single width
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
40 x 125 x 120
Weight
250 g
Degree of protection
IP 20
Configuration
Software for PG
SINAUT ST7 configuration software

for PG
TD7 software for CPU (optional)
SINAUT TD7 block library for CPU
Storage of TIM configuration data
Storage:
on internal TIM flash memory
on MMC of the S7-300-CPU
20

TIM 3V-IE
TIM can be operated in the role
Station
yes
Node station
no
Master station
no
No. of TIM 3V-IE modules per S7-300
Local communication
Over backplane bus with the S7-300-CPU
Possible over TD7onCPU and

TD7onTIM
Over backplane bus with other TIMs in the

rack
Not possible
Over MPI port of the S7-300-CPU 1) with other

CPUs, TIMs, and/or PCs
Not possible
Work memory required on the S7 CPU
SINAUT TD7 on CPU (TD7onCPU)
SINAUT TD7 on TIM (TD7onTIM)
At least 20 KB; actual requirements depend

on the amounts of data and range of functions
Best case, 0 bytes
Message memory on TIM
Number of messages
16,000 messages
Buffered
no
SINAUT ST7
SINAUT ST1
Modes:
Transmission protocols (RS-232)

Selectable protocols
Mode with dedicated line/wireless network
SINAUT ST7 protocol
SINAUT ST1 protocol
Polling
Polling with time slots
Multi-master polling with time slots
Modes:
Polling
Mode in dial-up network
SINAUT ST7 protocol
Spontaneous
GPRS/MSC tunnel on the basis of the

SINAUT ST7 protocol
Spontaneous
SINAUT ST1 protocol
Spontaneous

21

TIM 3V-IE
Asynchronous character format
SINAUT ST7 protocol,

polling or spontaneous
10 or 11 bits

multi-master polling
10 bits
SINAUT ST1 protocol, polling
11 bits
SINAUT ST1 protocol, spontaneous
10 or 11 bits
Hamming distance d
SINAUT ST7 protocol
SINAUT ST1 protocol
Ethernet
Protocol
TCP/IP transport protocol
Communication services
SINAUT ST7 using S7 communication
SINAUT ST7 via MSC tunnel
PG communication
max. 8
max. 1 (only as MSC station)
Number of connections
S7 communication
MSC connections
Total number of simultaneously operable
productive connections (S7 + MSC)
max. 9
Also:
1)
PG communication
max. 2
The MPI ports of the S7-300-CPU can be used with the following CPU types:
All variants of the CPU 312, CPU 312C, CPU 314 and CPU 314C;
the CPU 315-2 DP and the CPU 315F-2 DP
Technical specifications of the TIM 3V-IE Advanced

TIM 3V-IE Advanced
General
Transmission speed
RS-232
300 to 38,400 bps
Ethernet
Interfaces:
Interfaces
Communication port,
electrical
1 x RS-232, 9-pin D-sub male connector
1 x RJ-45 (10/100 Mbps; TP)
2-pin plug-in terminal strip
22

TIM 3V-IE Advanced

Cable length
RS-232
max. 6 m
RS-485
max. 30 m
RJ-45
max. 10 m
Power supply
24 V DC; min. 20.4 V; max. 28.8 V
Current consumption
From backplane bus
200 mA
From 24 V DC
Power loss
5.8 W
0 C to +60 C
-40 C to +70 C
Relative humidity
Max. 95 % at +25 C
Construction
Module format
Compact module for S7-300, single width
40 x 125 x 120
Weight
250 g
IP 20
Configuration
Software for PG

for PG
Storage:
on MMC of the S7-300-CPU
Station
yes
Node station
yes
Master station
yes
No. of TIM 3V-IE Advanced modules per S7-300
several: Number depends on the communication

resources of the S7-300 CPU
Local communication

TD7onTIM

rack
Possible

Possible over TD7onCPU (for S7-300 and

S7-400) and S7 communication (for
ST7cc/ST7sc and TIMs)
Over Ethernet interface with CPUs, PCs and

other TIMs
Possible over TD7onCPU (for S7-400) and S7

communication (for ST7cc/ST7sc and TIMs)

23

TIM 3V-IE Advanced


Best case, 0 bytes
Number of messages
32,000 messages
Buffered
no
SINAUT ST7
SINAUT ST1
Modes:
Transmission protocols (RS-232)

SINAUT ST7 protocol
SINAUT ST1 protocol
Polling
Modes:
Polling
SINAUT ST7 protocol
Spontaneous

SINAUT ST7 protocol
Spontaneous
SINAUT ST1 protocol
Spontaneous
SINAUT ST7 protocol, polling or

spontaneous
10 or 11 bits

10 bits
11 bits
10 or 11 bits
Hamming distance d
SINAUT ST7 protocol
SINAUT ST1 protocol
Ethernet
Protocol
24

TIM 3V-IE Advanced

PG communication
max. 24
max. 1 (only as MSC station)
Number of connections
S7 communication
MSC connections
productive connections (S7 + MSC)
max. 25
Also:
1)
1.3.5
PG communication
max. 4
The TIM 4R-IE

TIM without integrated modem, double width
Has four interfaces:
2 x combined RS-232/RS-485 interface for connection of required WAN transmission
equipment (classic SINAUT WAN)
To allow use of GPRS, the switchable serial interface WAN 1 of the TIM 4R-IE can be
connected to a GSM network via the GSM modem MD720-3. This requires the MSC
protocol to be enabled in the STEP 7 > Properties dialog of the TIM > Interfaces tab.
The WAN interface then behaves like an Ethernet interface.
2 x RJ-45 interface for attachment to Ethernet
Compact unit that can be used in a wide variety of situations:
as a communications processor (CP) in an S7-300
as a standalone device combined with one or more S7-400s or control center PCs
(SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) over the Ethernet interface
This allows these devices to handle SINAUT communication:
Over any two classic SINAUT WAN networks with SINAUT partners
Over two IP-based networks (WAN or LAN) with SINAUT ST7 subscribers
All four interfaces can be used at the same time for SINAUT communication.
The four transmission paths can all be different and operated independently. The two
pairs of interfaces can also form a redundant transmission path.

25

When installed as a CP in an S7-300, the following communication is also possible:
With the CPU
Over the MPI interface of this CPU with other CPUs and control center PCs (ST7cc,
ST7sc) connected over the MPI bus
With other TIMs in this rack
Message memory for up to 56,000 data messages
Optional backup battery for backup of the stored data messages and the hardware clock
Up to 62 S7 connections
The SINAUT TD7 software is integrated on the TIM (TD7onTIM). It can be used when the
TIM is installed as a CP in an S7-300.
Modules can be replaced without a PG:
In standalone mode using the optional C-PLUG
When installed as a CP in an S7-300 over the MMC of the CPU
Figure 1-3
The SINAUT communications module TIM 4R-IE
26

1.3.6
Design of the TIM 4R-IE

The TIM 4R-IE variants have all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design:
Compact design; double standard width of the SM modules of the SIMATIC S7-300
9-pin D-sub male connector with a combined RS-232/RS-485 interface for connecting a
modem
Two RJ-45 jacks for connection to Ethernet; industrial design with additional collar for
inserting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
2-pin plug-in terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC
Front LEDs for display of Ethernet and WAN communication
Simple mounting; the TIM is installed on an S7-300 rail. If the TIM is installed in an
S7-300 as a CP, it is connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus module
connectors. No slot rules apply.
Can be operated in an expansion rack (ER) in conjunction with the IM 360/361. This
allows the TIM to be combined with a C7 control system, with the newer C7 control
systems it can also be combined using the supplied I/O expansion cable.
Can be operated without a fan
A backup battery and a memory module (C-PLUG) can be installed as options.
The following figure shows the ports of the TIM 4R-IE (schematic representation with front
panel removed).
2x
RS-232/RS-485 port
(9-pin, male):
Access to WAN over
External Modem
2x
RJ-45 port
Access to Ethernet
24 V
Figure 1-4
Ports of the TIM 4R-IE

27

1.3.7
Technical specifications of the TIM 4R-IE
Technical specifications of the TIM 4R-IE

TIM 4R-IE
General
Transmission speed
RS-232/RS-485
300 to 115200 bps
Ethernet
Interfaces:
Interfaces
Communication port,
electrical
Slot for exchangeable media
2 x RS-232: 9-pin D-sub male connector,

can be switched to RS-485
2 x RJ-45 (10/100 Mbps; TP)
1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal strip
For C-PLUG (C-PLUG optional)
Cable length
RS-232
max. 6 m
RS-485
max. 30 m
RJ-45
max. 10 m
Power supply
24 V DC; min. 20.4 V; max. 28.8 V
Current consumption
From backplane bus
maximum 200 mA
From 24 V DC
Power loss
typically 4.6 W
Backup battery (optional) for message memory

and hardware clock
Battery type
Lithium battery 6ES7 971-0BA00

Type Tadiran SL-306, cell type AA
Voltage / capacity
3.6 V nominal / 2.3 Ah
Current consumption during backup
typically 100 A, max. 160 A
Leakage current
typically 15 A
Clock
Hardware clock (real-time clock)
yes
Buffered
yes (with backup battery)
Deviation per day
max. 4 s
0 C to +60 C
-40 C to +70 C
Relative humidity
Max. 95 % at +25 C
28

TIM 4R-IE
Construction
Module format
Compact module for S7-300, double width
80 x 125 x 120
Weight
Approx. 400 g
IP 20
Configuration
Software for PG

for PG
Storage:
on TIM in optional C-PLUG
on MMC of the S7-300-CPU, if TIM fitted

in S7-300 controller
Station
yes
Node station
yes
Master station
yes
No. of TIM 4R-IE modules per S7-300/400
several: Number depends on the communication

resources of the S7-300 CPU
Local communication
Over Ethernet interface with CPUs, PCs and

other TIMs
Possible over TD7onCPU (for S7-400) and S7

communication (for ST7cc/ST7sc
and TIMs)
When used in an S7-300 controller

TD7onTIM

rack
Possible


Local communication
Over backplane bus with local CPU
Possible over TD7onCPU 1) and

TD7onTIM
Over backplane bus with other

local TIMs
Possible
Over MPI port of the local CPU with other

CPUs and/or PCs
Possible using TD7onCPU

29

TIM 4R-IE

Best case, 0 bytes
Number of messages
Approx. 56,000 messages
Buffered
yes (with backup battery)
SINAUT ST7
SINAUT ST1
Modes:
Transmission protocols (RS-232/RS-485)

SINAUT ST7 protocol
SINAUT ST1 protocol
Polling
Modes:
Polling
SINAUT ST7 protocol
Spontaneous

SINAUT ST7 protocol
Spontaneous
SINAUT ST1 protocol
Spontaneous
SINAUT ST7 protocol, polling or

spontaneous
10 or 11 bits

10 bits
11 bits
10 or 11 bits
Hamming distance d
SINAUT ST7 protocol
SINAUT ST1 protocol
Ethernet
Protocol
30

TIM 4R-IE
PG communication
Number of connections:
S7 communication
max. 64
MSC connections
depending on the network node type:
as SMS master station
as MSC station
productive connections (S7 + MSC):
as SMS master station
as MSC station
Also:
1)
1.3.8
PG communication
max. 128
max. 1
max. 128
max. 65
max. 2
The TIM 4 variants

There are two variants of the TIM 4, the TIM 4R and TIM 4RD.
They do not have an integrated modem but have two combined RS-232/RS-485 ports to
connect to a WAN. The TIM 4RD has a DCF77 radio clock receiver.
These communications processors share the following properties:
S7-300 housing, double width
Has an MPI interface
Compact unit that can be used in a wide variety of situations:
as a communications processor (CP) in an S7-300
as a standalone device combined with one or more S7-400s, S7-300s or control
center PCs (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) over their MPI interface
This means that these devices can handle SINAUT communication over up to two
SINAUT WAN networks.
The two transmission paths can be different or identical. They can be operated
independently or form a redundant transmission path.

31

When installed as a CP in an S7-300, the following communication is also possible:
With the CPU
over the MPI interface of this CPU with other CPUs and control center PCs (ST7cc,
ST7sc) connected over the MPI bus.
with other TIMs in this rack
Message memory for up to 10,000 data messages
The following figure shows one of the TIM 4 variants.
Figure 1-5
SINAUT TIM 4 communications module
32

The following figure shows the ports of the two TIM 4R variants (schematic representation
with covers removed).
Combined
RS232/RS485 interface
(9-pin, male):
First WAN access point
via external modem
MPI interface
(9-pin, female)
Adapter plug with combined
RS232/RS485 interface
(9-pin, male):
Second WAN access
point via external
modem
G_IK10_XX_30064
DCF77
antenna or
GPS receiver
24 V
Figure 1-6
1.3.9
Ports of the TIM 4R
Design of the TIM 4 variants

The TIM 4 types have all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design:
Compact design; double standard width of the SM modules of the SIMATIC S7-300
2 WAN interfaces via 9-pin D-sub connector with a combined RS-232/RS-485 port for
connection of an external modem or other data transmission device.
MPI interface (9-pin SUB D socket) for connecting the TIM as a standalone device to one
or more S7 CPUs or control center PCs
4-pin terminal block for connecting the external power supply of 24 V DC
LEDs on the front panel with SF, TXD, RXD, and MPI/K indicators and, on the TIM 4RD
with radio clock receiver, DCF77 indicator (the TIM-BUS LED is unassigned on the TIM 4
types).
The DCF77 adapter cable supplied with the TIM 4RD has a BNC connector for
connecting the antenna cable.
Simple installation; the TIM 4 is mounted on an S7-300 rail. If it is installed in an S7-300
as a CP, it is connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus module connectors. As
a standalone device, it is connected to the S7 CPU(s) or control center PC(s) via its MPI
interface.
The TIM 4 types can operate without fans. No backup battery or memory module is
required.

33

1.3.10
Technical specifications of the TIM 4 variants
Technical specifications of the TIM 4R / 4RD

TIM 4R / TIM 4RD
General
Transmission speed
300 to 38,400 bps
Interfaces
Connection to external data transmission

device
1 x 9-pin D-sub male connector, RS-232 can

be switched over to RS-485
2nd Connection to external data transmission

device
1 x RJ-45, RS-232 can be switched over to

RS-485 (the supplied interface adapter cable
provides a further 9-pin D-sub male
connector)
MPI bus
9-pin D-sub female connector
DCF77 antenna (TIM 4RD)
BNC socket (over supplied DCF77 adapter

cable)
4-pin terminal strip
Power supply
24 V DC; min. 20.4 V; max. 28.8 V
Current consumption
From backplane bus
60 mA (only when the TIM is used as a CP in

an S7-300 rack)
From 24 V DC
500 mA
Power loss
12.3 W
0 C to +60 C
-40 C to +70 C
Relative humidity
Max. 95 % at +25 C
Construction
Module format
80 x 125 x 120
Weight
Approx. 300 g
IP 20
Configuration
Software for PG

for PG
TD7 software for CPU (required in

conjunction with CPU 1) )
34

TIM 4R / TIM 4RD

Station
yes
Node station
yes
Master station
yes
Number of TIM 4R/4RD modules per S7-CPU or

PC
Several, number depends on the communication

resources of the S7-CPU or of the PC
Local communication in the rack of an S7-300
Possible using TD7onCPU1)

rack
Possible
Over MPI interface of the S7-300-CPU 2) with

other CPUs, TIMs, and/or PCs


Local communication in standalone mode
Over MPI interface of the CPU with CPUs,

other TIMs and/or PCs
At least 20 KB; actual requirements depend on

the amounts of data and range of functions
Number of messages
Approx. 10,000 messages
Buffered
no
SINAUT ST7
SINAUT ST1
Modes:
Transmission protocols
SINAUT ST7 protocol
SINAUT ST1 protocol
Polling
Modes:
Polling
SINAUT ST7 protocol
Spontaneous
SINAUT ST1 protocol
Spontaneous

35

1.4 The classic SINAUT ST7 modems
TIM 4R / TIM 4RD


polling or spontaneous
10 or 11 bits

10 bits
11 bits
10 or 11 bits
Hamming distance d
1.4
SINAUT ST7 protocol
SINAUT ST1 protocol
1)
The use of TD7onCPU over backplane bus is possible with the following CPU types:
All variants of the CPU 313C, CPU 314 and CPU 314C;
the CPU 315-2 DP and the CPU 315F-2 DP;
all variants of the C7 devices C7-633, C7-635 and C7-636
2)
The MPI interface of the S7-300-CPU can be used with the following CPU types:
The classic SINAUT ST7 modems

The SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 and MD4 modems are built into an S7-300 housing just like the
TIM modules.
36

Figure 1-7
1.4.1
SINAUT MD modem
The modem variants

The following modem variants are available:
MD2
Dedicated line modem

for multipoint connection, can be tapped,
can also be used as a repeater,
max 19,200 bps
MD3
Modem for the analog telephone network,

max. 33600 bps,
can also be used as dedicated line modem for a point-to-point link,
max. 33600 bps in voice band
MD4
Modem for the digital ISDN network,

max. 64,000 bps
These modems can be attached to the serial modem port of a suitably equipped TIM module
(TIM 3V-IE and all TIM 4 variants).

37

Due to the design, the modems can be installed on an S7-300 standard rail just like the TIM
modules. As an alternative, the modems can also be installed on a 35 mm standard
mounting rail. In this case, an adapter is required that can be ordered separately.
The following figure shows the modem modules with further details (schematic
representation with the covers removed).
Figure 1-8
1.4.2
Connectors of a SINAUT ST7 modem
Overview of all modem variants and accessories

The modems are supplied along with the necessary WAN connecting cable. Cables for
connecting the modems to a TIM must be ordered separately.
Table 1- 2
Overview of all modem variants
Short name
Order no.
Explanation
MD2
6NH7810-0AA20

for multipoint connection, can be tapped, can also be used
as a repeater,
max 19,200 bps
MD3
6NH7810-0AA30

max. 33,600 bps
Can also be used as a dedicated line modem for a point-topoint link,
max. 33,600 bps in the voice band
MD4
6NH7810-0AA40
Modem for the digital ISDN network,

max. 64,000 bps
R-ADAPT
6NH7760-0AA
Adapter for installing the modem MD2 ... MD4 on a 35-mm

standard rail
38

1.4.3
Technical specifications of the SINAUT ST7 modems
Technical specifications of the MD2 dedicated line modem

MD2
Interfaces
Attachment to dedicated line
RJ-12
RS-232 attachment to DTE
9-pin D-sub male connector
Power supply
24 V DC
Current consumption
From 24 V DC
Power loss
100 mA
2.4 W
0 C through +60 C
-40 C through +70 C
Relative humidity
Max. 95 % at +25 C
Construction
Module format
80 x 125 x 120
Weight
Approx. 300 g
IP 20
Transmission path
2-wire, 2 x 2-wire or 4-wire,

twisted pair, without loading coils or with few
loading coils
Type of modulation
Frequency shift keying (FSK)
Transmission speeds
1200 bps
2400 bps
9600 bps (not for telephone company

leased lines)
19,200 bps (not for telephone company

leased lines)
Mode
With 2-wire or 2 x 2-wire
Half duplex
With 4-wire
Duplex or half duplex
0 dB
-6 dB
-9 dB (for telephone company leased lines)
-15 dB
Transmit level can be set to

39

MD2
Receive level
0 to -43 dB
Terminating resistor can be adjusted
For 1200 and 2400 bps
600 ohms
For 9600 and 19,200 bps
150 ohms
For tapping point
> 6 kilohms
Ready to send
At 1200 bps
After 7 ms
At 2400 bps
After 4 ms
At 9600 and 19,200 bps
After 0.5 ms
Lower / upper keying frequency
At 1200 bps
1300 Hz / 2100 Hz
At 2400 bps
2400 Hz / 3300 Hz
At 9600 and 19,200 bps
20,800 Hz / 33,600 Hz
10 or 11 bits
Floating optical relay output
Max. connected voltage
60 V AC/DC
Max. permitted permanent current
400 mA
Max. Ron
3 ohms
Surge withstand capability

U1.2/50 to DIN VDE 0804
between supply circuit and
FSK remote line circuits
2.5 kV
Optical relay output
2.5 kV
Compatible with SINAUT modems
MD100
At 1200 bps
MD124
At 1200, 2400 and 19,200 bps
EU approval CE 0682 X
Technical specifications of the MD3 analog dial-up modem

MD3
Interfaces
Attachment to telephone network or dedicated

line
RJ-12
Power supply
24 V DC
40

MD3
Current consumption
From 24 V DC
Power loss
200 mA
4.8 W
0 C through +60 C
-40 C through +70 C
Relative humidity
Max. 95 % at +25 C
Construction
Module format
80 x 125 x 120
Weight
Approx. 300 g
IP 20
Transmission path
Analog dial-up telephone network

Dedicated line, 2-wire twisted pair, without
loading coils
Available ITU transmission standards in the analog

telephone network
V.22 1200 bps, duplex
V.22bis 2400 bps, duplex
V.32bis 14,400 bps, duplex
Error correction
V.42 and MNP4
Data compression
V.42bis and MNP5
Modem control
AT commands
V.25bis commands
12 kHz
16 kHz
Tone dialing
Pulse dialing
Metering pulse filter can be adjusted to

Dialing mode
Loop power section
Exists, can be switched in or out
Loudspeaker
Exists, can be switched on or off
Line adjustment
600 ohms
Zr (frequency-dependent)
-10 dB
-15 dB
Transmit level can be set to

10 or 11 bits

41

MD3
Standard dedicated line profile
300 bps (direct)
1200 bps (direct)
2400 bps (direct)
9600 bps (direct)
19,200 bps (direct)
19200 bps (buffered)
33,600 bps (buffered)
Europe
USA
Canada
M1020
M1025
Compatible with SINAUT modems (as telephone

modem)
MD125
MDM2425B DX
MD3 (hardware version < 4)
Recommended line quality for telephone company

leased lines
Technical specifications of the MD4 ISDN dial-up modem

MD4
Interfaces
Attachment to ISDN dial-up network or ISDN

dedicated line
RJ-12
Power supply
24 V DC
Current consumption
From 24 V DC
Power loss
100 mA
2.4 W
42

MD4
0 C through +60 C
-40 C through +70 C
Relative humidity
Max. 95 % at +25 C
Construction
Module format
80 x 125 x 120
Weight
Approx. 300 g
IP 20
Transmission path
ISDN dedicated line, for example the ISDN

dedicated line products of the German
Telekom:
Available standard transmission standards
Modem control
LeasedLink SFV Digital 64S
LeasedLink SFV Digital 64S2
LeasedLink SFV Digital TS02
V.110 19,200 bps, duplex
X.75 1200 bps, duplex
X.75 38,400 bps, duplex
AT commands
V.25bis commands
10 or 11 bits
Europe
Compatible with SINAUT modems
LGM64K

43

1.5 Mobile wireless components
1.5
Mobile wireless components
1.5.1
Area of application for GSM
Options for data transmission via GSM mobile wireless with SINAUT
Wherever no other transmission medium such as a dedicated line or telephone network is
available and where the setting up of a separate wireless network would involve high costs,
data transmission using a GSM network is a practical alternative.
This is, of course, possible only when there is an adequately strong GSM signal at the
relevant location. The latest SINAUT quadband mobile wireless modem makes operation in
the GSM networks available worldwide(850, 900, 1800 and 1900 MHz range).
SINAUT ST7 provides two options for data transmission over GSM mobile wireless:
1. With the GSM modem MD720-3
Data transmission on an "as necessary" basis by establishing a dial-up connection via
a mobile wireless network (CSD: Circuit Switched Data)
Dial-up connections are charged on a pay-by-time basis.
Data transmission with GPRS in a mobile wireless network
Authentication and encryption are based on the MSC protocol. Charges are generally
on a pay-by-volume basis.
With both transmission methods, the transmission of SMS messages to standby
personnel is also possible. Charges are based on the number of sent SMS messages.
2. With the GPRS router MD741-1
Permanent online connection between station and control center using the GPRS service
(General Packet Radio Service) of a GSM provider. Data can be transmitted immediately
at any time.
Although permanently online, only the volume of transmitted data is charged.
To communicate with remote devices, the MD741-1 establishes a VPN tunnel and
encrypts according to the IPSec protocol.
1.5.2
GSM modem MD720-3

With the GSM modem MD720-3, a TIM can transmit data by establishing a dial-up
connection over a mobile wireless network. The maximum data transmission speed is 9600
bps.
For data transmission, you can choose between two transmission methods:
44

Transmission using CSD (Circuit Switched Data)
Data can be transmitted between two SINAUT subscribers both from mobile wireless
to mobile wireless(from GSM modem to GSM modem) and from mobile wireless to
fixed network (phone or ISDN attachment; ISDN is recommended). With this type of
data transmission, the GSM provider charges according to the time the dial-up
connections were established.
When using CSD, apart from transmitting data, the MD720-3 can also be used to send
SMS messages directly to personnel on call. Receipt of an SMS can be acknowledged
using the mobile phone. If no acknowledgement is received, it is possible to send the
SMS to a different mobile phone. The GSM provider charges according to the number
of sent SMS messages.
Transmission via GPRS using the MSC protocol
The data transmission between station and master station is via GPRS in the mobile
wireless network. To allow direct communication between stations, the master station
forwards the messages to the target subscribers. The GSM provider generally charges on
a pay-by-volume basis.
Note
The MD720-3 modem is used not only in SINAUT ST7 but also in SINAUT MICRO SC. In
this case, S7-200 stations can transmit data over GPRS using the MD720-3.
Along with the Ethernet TIMs as of firmware version V2.0, the MD720-3 can also transmit
data via GPRS in SINAUT.
In a station, the MD720-3 can be connected to the RS-232 interface of a suitably equipped
TIM module:
When using CSD: All TIM 3V-IE and TIM 4 variants
When using GPRS: Connection to any Ethernet TIM
The cable for connecting the MD720-3 must be ordered separately with a TIM.
The MD720-3 can be installed on a 35 mm standard rail.

45

Figure 1-9
Modem MD720-3
The following figure shows further details of the modem module.

9
s
SET
6 4 &
$QWHQQDLQWHUIDFH
60$IHPDOH
56
56MDFNZLWK
LQYHUWLQJDGDSWHUSLQPDOH
;
6,1$87
0'
$$
Figure 1-10
1.5.3
Connectors of the MD720-3 modem
EGPRS/GPRS router MD741-1

Using the EGPRS/GPRS router MD741-1 (or the predecessor module MD740-1), a TIM can
establish a permanent connection between a station and control center using the GPRS
service of a GSM mobile wireless provider. Since the connection is always online, data can
be sent as soon as it becomes available.
Apart from GPRS, the faster service EGPRS (EDGE) is also supported.
46

The control center must be permanently reachable from the GPRS network. This can be via
a dedicated line between control center and GPRS provider or a permanent connection from
the control center to the Internet, for example DSL.
A direct GPRS connection from GPRS modem to GPRS modem is not possible. Direct data
exchange between two SINAUT ST7 stations that both communicate over GPRS is possible
over a TIM module in the control center.
Since the data transmission from the GPRS provider to the control center is often over the
Internet, the MD741-1 has an integrated VPN router and a firewall. This allows GPRS
connections with optimum security to be established between the station and control center.
The maximum data transmission speed with GPRS is 54 Kbps.
The MD741-1 can be connected to the Ethernet connector of any Ethernet TIM. It can be
installed on a 35 mm standard rail.
Figure 1-11
SINAUT MD741-1
The following figure shows further details of the modem module.

47

'&9
9
/,1.
SET
931
6
4
$QWHQQDLQWHUIDFH
60$IHPDOH
&
)25/$121/<
;
86%
6,1$87
0'
5-SRUW
$FFHVVWR(WKHUQHW
$$
;
Figure 1-12
1.5.4
Connectors of the MD741-1 router
ANT794-4MR GSM/GPRS antenna
The ANT794-4MR GSM/GPRS antenna

The quadband ANT794-4MR antenna is available for use in GSM/GPRS networks. To
improve the field strength, it can be installed inside and outside buildings.
Figure 1-13
ANT794-4MR GSM/GPRS antenna
Short name
Order no.
Explanation
ANT794-4MR
6NH9 860-1AA00
GSM/GPRS quadband antenna; weatherproof for

indoor and outdoor areas; 5 m connecting cable
connected permanently to the antenna; SMA
connector, including installation bracket, screws, wall
plugs
The antenna must be ordered separately.
48

1.5.5
Technical specifications of the SINAUT mobile wireless components
Technical specifications of the MD720-3 GSM modem

MD720-3
Transmission speed
RS-232
300 bps to 57,600 bps
CSD in GSM network
9,600 bps
Interfaces
RS-232

(with gender changer pin)
GSM antenna
SMA female connector,

nominal impedance: 50 ohms
4-pin screw terminal
Frequency ranges
850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz
Transmit output power
850 MHz
Max. 2 W
900 MHz
Max. 2 W
1800 MHz
Max. 1 W
1900 MHz
Max. 1 W
Power supply
12 - 30 V DC (24 V DC nominal)
Current consumption in send mode
at 12 V DC
In: 430 mA
at 24 V DC
In: 140 mA
Current consumption in receive mode
at 12 V DC
90 mA
at 24 V DC
50 mA
Power loss
typically 5 W
max. 6.2 W
-20C through +60C
-25C through +85C
Relative humidity
Max. 95% at +25C
Construction
Design
DIN rail housing
Materials
Plastic
22.5 x 99 x 114
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Installation
Snap onto 35 mm standard rail
IP40

49

MD720-3
10 bits
Modem control
over AT commands
CE
yes
R&TTE (GSM)
yes
EMV / ESD
EN 55024, EN 55022 class A,

EN 61000-6-2
ATEX
II 3G Ex nA II T4 Ta,
(Ta = -20C...+60C)
KEMA 03 ATEX 1229 X
FM
CLI, DIV2, GP. A,B,C,D T4 Ta,

(Ta = -20C...+60C)
CLI, Zone 2 IIC, T4 Ta,
(Ta = -20C...+60C)
UL
E301826
National approvals
You will find the latest information on the Internet

at (http:/www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info)
Technical specifications of the MD741-1 GPRS router

MD741-1
General
Interfaces
Application interface
RJ-45 female (10/100 Mbps, TP,

autocrossover)
Service interface
USB socket type A
Antenna connector
SMA female connector,

nominal impedance: 50 ohms
4-pin screw terminal
Power supply
12 - 30 V DC (24 V DC nominal)
Current consumption
on an existing GPRS connection with data

exchange and GSM900 power level 10
(transmit power: 23 dBm)
Power loss
In: 147 mA at 24 V (Iburst: 550 mA)

4.62 ms burst repetition rate
typically 4.0 W at 24 V
-20C through +60C
-40C through +70C
Relative humidity
Max. 95 % at +25C
50

MD741-1
Construction
Design
DIN rail housing
Materials
Plastic
45 x 99 x 114
Weight
Approx. 280 g
Installation
Snap onto 35 mm standard rail
IP20
GSM/GPRS
Frequency ranges
800, 900, 1800 and 1900 MHz
Transmit output power (for 8-PSK)
850 / 900 MHz
+27 dBm (3 dB)
1800 / 1900 MHz
+26 dBm (+3 / -4 dB)
GPRS multislot class
Class 12...8:
1...4 downlinks
1...4 uplinks
max. 5 slots
EGPRS multislot class
Class 12...8:
1...4 downlinks
1...4 uplinks
max. 5 slots
GPRS coding methods
CS-1, CS-2, CS-3, CS-4
GPRS connection establishment
Automatic when power supply turned on
Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Protocol
IPSec (tunnel and transport mode)
Encryption
IPSec 3DES with 168 bits,

IPSec AES with 128, 192 and 256 bits
Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
with main mode and quick mode
Authentication
Pre-Shared Key (PSK),

X.509v3 certificates
Packet authentication
MD5, SHA-1
Miscellaneous
DynDNS,
NAT-T,
Dead Peer Detection (DPD)
Firewall
Stateful Packet Inspection
yes
Anti-Spoofing
yes
Network Address Translation (NAT) /

IP masquerade)
yes
Port forwarding
yes
Other features

51

MD741-1
DNS cache,
DHCP server,
NTP,
remote logging
yes
yes
yes
yes
Configuration
with standard Web browser
Tests, approvals
CE
yes
R&TTE (GSM)
yes
GSM/GPRS
with GCF approval
EMC / ESD
EN 55024, EN 55022 class A,

EN 61000-6-2
Electrical safety
EN 60950
ATEX
II 3G Ex nA IIC T4
Ta = -20 C...+60 C
KEMA 03 ATEX 1229 X
EN60079-15 (type of protection "n")
FM
CLI, DIV2, GP. A,B,C,D T4 Ta,

Ta = -20C...+60C
CLI, Zone 2 IIC, T4 Ta,
Ta = -20C...+60C
UL / CSA
UL 60950, 1st edition

CSA C22.2 No. 60950
National approvals
You will find the latest information on the Internet

at (http:/www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info)
Technical specifications of the ANT794-4MR GSM/GPRS antenna

ANT794-4MR
Mobile wireless networks
GSM/GPRS
Frequencies
850 MHz,
900 MHz,
1800 MHz,
1900 MHz,
2200 MHz
Characteristics
omnidirectional
Antenna gain
0 dB
SWR
< 2,0
Max. power
20 W
Polarity
linear vertical
Connector
SMA
Length of antenna cable
5m
External material
Hard PVC, UV-resistant
IP20
52

1.6 LTOP overvoltage protection modules
ANT794-4MR
-40 C to +70 C
-40 C to +70 C
Relative humidity
100 %
Construction
Dimensions (D x H) in mm
25 x 193
Weight
380 g (incl. packing)
Installation
with supplied bracket
1.6
LTOP overvoltage protection modules
1.6.1
Variants and overview of the LTOP overvoltage protection modules

Copper dedicated lines are highly susceptible to electromagnetic interference. The coupling
of extraneous voltages can be inductive or capacitive, for example due to the effects of
lightning. Direct conductive coupling is also possible due to bad insulation.
The LTOP overvoltage protection modules limit extraneous voltage and overvoltage to a
non-critical level. The floating transformer also provides electrical isolation preventing
coupling of voltages into other cable sections. An LTOP protects persons and investment
and is therefore an indispensable safety element in private dedicated line networks.
Figure 1-14
LTOP2 overvoltage protection module
The LTOP overvoltage protection module is available in two variants:

LTOP 1
Overvoltage protection module for use at the start or end of a 2-wire dedicated line.
LTOP2
Overvoltage protection module for use at the start or end of a 4-wire dedicated line or in a 2wire tapping point. In a 4-wire tapping point, two LTOP2 modules are required.

53

1.6 LTOP overvoltage protection modules
Table 1- 3
Overview of the LTOP modules
Short name
Order no.
Explanation
LTOP1
6NH9821-0BC11
Single line transformer LTOP1, with one OPM

overvoltage protection module for use at the start or
end of a 2-wire dedicated line
LTOP2
6NH9821-0BC12
Double line Transformer LTOP2, with two OPM

overvoltage protection modules for use at the start or
end of a 4-wire dedicated line or a 2-wire tapping
point
OPM
6NH9821-0BB00
OPM overvoltage protection module for LTOP1 and

LTOP2, plug-in (pack of 4)
The two LTOP variants have both screw terminals and an RJ-12 Western jack. The WAN
cable (RJ-12 - RJ-12) supplied with the MD2 and MD3 modems (used as dedicated line
modems) can be connected directly to this RJ-12 jack.
Note
The LTOP modules are not suitable for protecting dial-up connections (telephone and ISDN
network). Companies such as Phoenix and Dehn offer TAE6, S0, RJ-12, and RJ-45 jacks
with overvoltage protection.
1.6.2
Technical specifications of the LTOP overvoltage protection module
LTOP
Transmission paths
Private transmission lines with or without loading coils
Transmission ratio
1 : 1; 5 % (e.g. 600/600 ohms in the voice band)
Transmission range
300 Hz to 35 kHz
Frequency-dependent attenuation
Attenuation
[dB]
Frequency
[Hz]
0.2
1300 ... 3300
0.8
5200 ... 8400
4800
0.9
10400 ... 16800
9600
1.0
20800 ... 30600
19200
Insulation resistance
> 2000 Mohms
Test voltage
4 kV, 50 Hz, 10 s
Surge withstand capability
6 kV/2 J to EN 60 099-1
Transmission speed [bps]

MD100
MD124
MD2
MD3
1200
1200
2400
1200
2400
All
Normal discharge current isn (8/20 s)
5 kA
Output voltage limitation at isn
Approx. 15 V
Telecontrol connector
Screw terminals
Cross-section 0.2 4 mm2 with rigid cores
Cross-section 0.2 2.5 mm2 with flexible cores
9600
19200
54

1.7 Radio clock components
LTOP
Modem connector
Screw terminals (wire cross-section, see telecontrol line attachment) or RJ12 jack for Western plug
Installation location
As close as possible to where cable enters building
0 C through +60 C
-40 C through +70 C
Relative humidity
Max. 95 % at +25 C
Construction
90 x 75 x 110 mm
Weight
LTOP1: 300 g
LTOP2: 320 g
OPM: 10 g
IP 20
Installation
DIN rail TS35 (35 mm; EN 50 022)
1.7
1.7.1
Accessories for DCF77
DCF77 radio clock

An adapter cable is required to connect the DCF77 radio clock to an indoor or outdoor
antenna. The cable has a BNC male connector to which the normal antenna cable can be
connected.
The adapter cable is supplied with every TIM module with an integrated DCF77 radio clock.
It can also be ordered as a spare part under the number listed in the following table.
Table 1- 4
Adapter cable for a TIM with integrated DCF77 radio clock
Order no.
Description
6NH7700-0AD15
Adapter cable for connecting a DCF77 radio

clock integrated in a TIM, to adapt the internal
connector to the external BNC connector.
Cable length 1.5 m
Illustration
%1&
In addition to the adapter cable, there is also a selection of antennas.

55

DCF77 indoor antenna

An indoor antenna can be used in buildings in which there is no source of interference for the
DCF77 signal. It should not be installed in the vicinity of televisions, monitors, thyristor
controls, network cables or fluorescent lights.
DCF77 outdoor antenna for flat roof, wall or mast installation

Whenever possible, a professional radio clock system should use an outdoor antenna. In
contrast to an indoor antenna whose environment can change constantly due to the
technical activity in the building, the conditions for an outdoor antenna are practically
constant. Indirect lightning protection is strongly recommended for an outdoor antenna.
Figure 1-15
Examples of DCF77 antennas, left an indoor antenna, right an outdoor antenna
The following figure shows the interconnection of the various DCF77 components (the
adapter cable 6NH7700-0AD15 is supplied with each TIM with an integrated DCF77 radio
clock receiver).
If lightning protection 6NH9831-2AA is used, this should be installed whenever possible at
the entrance to the building. To connect the lightning protection to the adapter cable of the
TIM, use a separate antenna cable (BNC female connectors at both ends, similar to the
antenna cable supplied with the indoor or outdoor antenna). You can either assemble this
cable yourself or purchase it from a dealer, for example from Hopf Elektronik GmbH
(www.hopf.com).
56

7,0ZLWKLQWHJUDWHG
'&)UDGLRFORFNUHFHLYHU
Indoor antenna
TIM
incl. 10 m
antenna cable
6NH9 831-0AA
or
Outdorr antenna
Adapter cable (1,5 m)

is included
incl. 20 m
antenna cable:
(spare part order no.

6NH7 700-0AD15)
- for flat roof or

wall mounting
6NH9 831-0BA
BNC
- fr mast mounting
6NH9 831-0DA
,QGLUHFW
OLJKWQLQJ
SURWHFWLRQ
6NH9 831-2AA
Figure 1-16
1.7.2
Connecting DCF77 antennas
GPS receiver
The reception of the DCF77 radio clock signal is limited to western Europe (approximately
800 km radius from Frankfurt am Main, Germany). In regions where this signal cannot be
received, a GPS receiver can be used to acquire the local time from a satellite-based GPS
system (Global Positioning System). For this situation, the SINAUT system includes a GPS
receiver whose output signal simulates the DCF77 signal. This receiver can therefore be
connected directly to the DCF77 receiver in the TIM and can supply the TIM with the current
time.
This GPS receiver ships as a complete package and includes the following:
GPS receiver module that can be fitted to a 35-mm standard rail
GPS outdoor antenna for wall or mast mounting, including 25 m antenna cable
BNC adapter to connect the DCF77 adapter cable of the TIM to the BNC socket of the
GPS receiver
Software for configuring the GPS receiver (for Windows 95/98, NT, 2000, ME and XP)
PC adapter cable, length 1.5 m
Documentation

57

Since the GPS antenna is an outdoor antenna, you should also install the available lightning
protection device.
Figure 1-17
The GPS receiver module (left) and the recommended lightning protection device for
outdoor antennas (right)
The following figure shows the interconnection of the various GPS components (the adapter
cable 6NH7700-0AD15 is supplied with each TIM with an integrated DCF77 radio clock
receiver).
If lightning protection 6NH9831-8LA is used, this should be installed whenever possible at
the entrance to the building. To connect the lightning protection to the adapter cable of the
TIM, use a separate antenna cable (BNC female connectors at both ends, similar to the
antenna cable supplied with the outdoor antenna). You can either assemble this cable
yourself or purchase it from a dealer, for example from Hopf Elektronik GmbH
(www.hopf.com).
58

7,0ZLWKLQWHJUDWHG
'&)UDGLRFORFNUHFHLYHU
*36UHFHLYHUPRGXOH
TIM
'&)RXWSXWIRU
VLPXODWLRQVLJQDO
,QSXWIRU
*36VLJQDO
BNC
adapter
plug
BNC
,QGLUHFW
OLJKWQLQJ
SURWHFWLRQ
Adapter cable
6NH7 700-0AD15
GPS outdoor antenna

GPS kit
for wall or mast mounting

incl. 25 m antenna cable
6NH9 831-8AA
Complete GPS package for simulating the
DCF77 time signal, comprising:
- GPS receiver module
- GPS outdoor antenna incl. 25 m cable
- BNC adapter plug
- Configuration software
- PC adapter cable
- Documentation
Figure 1-18
1.7.3
GPS components for receiving the radio clock signal
Overview of the radio clock components

The following table shows the accessories for the DCF77 radio clock of the TIM.
Table 1- 5
Overview of the accessories for the DCF77 radio clock of the TIM
Short name
Order no.
Explanation
DCF INANT
6NH9831-0AA
DCF77 indoor antenna.

The antenna is supplied with a 10 m cable and BNC
connector.
DCF AUANT-D
6NH9831-0BA
DCF77 outdoor antenna for flat roof or wall mounting.

connector.
DCF AUANT-M
6NH9831-0DA
DCF77 outdoor antenna for mast mounting.

connector.
DCF IND-BS
6NH9831-2AA
Lightning protector for DCF77 outdoor antenna.

59

1.7.4
Short name
Order no.
Explanation
GPS kit
6NH9831-8AA
GPS complete package for simulating the DCF77 time signal,

consisting of GPS receiver, GPS outdoor antenna including
25 m cable, BNC adapter connector, configuration software,
PC adapter cable, and documentation.
GPS IND-BS
6NH9831-8LA
Lightning protector for GPS outdoor antenna.
Technical specifications of the radio clock components
Technical specifications of DCF77 antennas

DCF77 antennas
General
Power supply (over antenna cable)
1.7 to 5 V DC
Impedance
50 ohms
Power gain
20 dB
Max. cable length without amplification
250 m
Plastic housing
Light-resistant
Bandwidth
4 kHz
Indoor antennas
Humidity
95% no condensation
IP50
Temperature range
Operation
0 C through +80 C
Storage
-50 C through +85 C
Outdoor antennas
Wind load
max. 180 km/h
IP65
Temperature range
Operation
-30 C through +80 C
Storage
-50 C through +85 C
Humidity
100%
Lightning protection
Housing material
Die cast aluminum housing
250 x 105 x 95
Weight
Approx. 3.5 kg
Grounding point
M6 threaded connection
Thickness of copper strand
min. 10 mm2
length of copper strand
max. 10 m
Current pulse withstand 8/20 s wave
10 kA
60

DCF77 antennas
Response time
< 1 ns
Protection level at 6 kV 1.5/50 s wave at input
< 12 V
Insertion loss for DCF77 signal
Max. 3 dB
Input / output
BNC female / BNC female
Input / output impedance
50 ohms
IP40
Temperature range
Operation
-20 C through +80 C
Storage
-40 C through +85 C
Humidity
95% no condensation
Technical specifications of the GPS receiver

GPS receiver
Interfaces:
RS-232/RS-422
Pulse outputs
Screw terminals
GPS input
BNC socket
DCF77 simulation output
BNC socket
Connector for power supply
Screw terminals
Power supply
18 to 60 V DC
Power consumption
6 VA
Construction
Housing material
Aluminum
65 x 105 x 130
Weight
Approx. 700 g
Installation
On 35 mm standard rail
Quartz accuracy
0.1 ppm after GPS control/synchronization and

at constant temperature
Emergency clock accuracy
25 ppm at 25 C
Maintenance-free emergency clock backup
3 days
Type of receiver
8-channel phase tracking receiver
Evaluation
L1 frequency 1575.42 MHz, C/A code
Sensitivity
-143 dB
Synchronization time
Cold restart (initial installation without

position information)
30 min to 4 h
Warm start (power down < 3 days)
Approx. 1 min.

61

GPS receiver
Temperature range
for specified data
0 to 50 C
with poorer free-run (accuracy) characteristics
0 to 70 C
Outdoor antennas
Type of antenna
Micro-strip line with preamplifier
Center frequency
1575.42 MHz
Bandwidth
10 MHz
View angle
+10 above horizon
Power supply (over antenna cable)
4.5 to 7 V DC
Impedance
50 ohms
Power gain
20 dB
Max. cable length without amplification
25 m
Plastic housing
Light-resistant
Wind load
max. 180 km/h
IP65
Temperature range
Operation
-30 C through +80 C
Storage
-40 C through +85 C
Humidity
100%
Lightning protection
Housing material
Pressure die cast aluminum housing
250 x 105 x 95
Weight
Approx. 1.8 kg
Grounding point
M6 threaded connection
Thickness of copper strand
min. 10 mm2
length of copper strand
max. 10 m
Current pulse withstand 8/20 s wave
10 kA
Response time
< 1 ns
Protection level at 6 kV 1.5/50 s wave at input
< 12 V
Insertion loss for DCF77 signal
Max. 3 dB
Input / output
BNC female / BNC female
Input / output impedance
50 ohms
IP40
Temperature range
Operation
-20 C through +80 C
Storage
-40 C through +85 C
Humidity
95% no condensation
62

1.8 Connecting cables
1.8
Connecting cables
A series of standard connecting cables is available to connect individual SINAUT
components with each other and to WANs. Some of these connecting cables are supplied
along with the hardware components. Other cables can be ordered as necessary.
1.8.1
Table 1- 6
Cable for connecting TIM and modem modules

Standard cables for connecting TIM and modem modules
Order no.
Description
6NH7701-4AL
Cable for connecting a TIM 3V-IE / TIM 4 (RS-232) with one of the
SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 modems (RS-232). Also suitable for
connecting the modems listed above to a SIMATIC point-to-point CP such
as the CP 340, CP 341 or CP 441 with RS-232 port.
Cable length 1.5 m
6NH7701-4DL
Illustration
7,0
Cable for connecting a TIM 4 (RS-485) with multiple SINAUT ST7

dedicated line modems of the type MD2 or MD3 (RS-485) connected in
parallel.
Cable length 1.5 m
7,0
6NH7701-1CB
6NH7701-5AN
6NH7701-4BN
0'
Cable for connecting two MD2 modems (RS-232) to form a repeater.

Cable length 0.3 m
0'
0'
7,0
*60
PRGHP
Cable for connecting a TIM 3V-IE / TIM 4 (RS-232) with the GSM mobile
wireless modem MD720-3 (RS-232). Also suitable for third-party modems
or wireless devices with RS-232 standard.
Cable length 2.5 m.
Cable with one end without connector for connection of a

TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 to a third-party modem or wireless device (RS-232).
Cable length 2.5 m
7,0
6NH7701-0AR
0'
7KLUG
SDUW\
PRGHP
ZLUHOHVV
GHYLFH
Test cable.
Cable for connecting two TIMs of the types TIM 3V-IE / TIM 4 over their
RS-232 ports without modems (null modem).
Cable length 6 m
7,0
7,0

63

1.8 Connecting cables
Order no.
Description
6NH1701-7AN
Cable for connecting a TIM 11 (RS-232) with one of the SINAUT ST7
MD2, MD3 or MD4 modems (RS-232).
Cable length 2.5 m
6NH1701-7BK
Illustration
7,0
0'
7,0
0'
Cable for connecting a TIM011B (RS-232) with one of the SINAUT ST7
MD2, MD3 or MD4 modems (RS-232).
Cable length 1.0 m.
1.8.2
WAN connecting cables

A 6NH7700-xxx connecting cable ships with every MD modem. This can be used to connect
the modem to the relevant WAN network.
The connecting cables are also available as spares under the number shown.
Table 1- 7
WAN connecting cables
Order no.
Description
Illustration
6NH7700-2AR60
Connecting cable with 2 x RJ-12 plugs for connection to an

MD2 modem (RJ-12) with an LTOP overvoltage protection
module (RJ-12).
Cable length 6 m
5-
6NH7700-3BR60
Connecting cable with 2 x RJ-12 Western plug and snapon TAE6N plug to connect an MD3 modem (RJ-12) to a
telephone jack (TAE6N) or an LTOP overvoltage protection
module (RJ-12) if the MD3 modem is being operated as a
dedicated line modem.
Cable length 6 m
7$(1
5-
6NH7700-4AR60
5-
5-
Connecting cable with RJ-12 and RJ-45 plug to connect an

MD4 modem (RJ-12) with an ISDN-S0 jack (RJ-45).
Cable length 6 m
5-
5-
64

1.9 The SINAUT ST7 standard software package
1.8.3
TIM 4R / 4RD interface adapter cable

The TIM 4R / TIM 4RD has a second serial interface X3 (combined RS-232/RS-485). The
interface (8-pin RJ-45 jack) is accessible from below.
An adapter cable is required to connect the second serial port with an external modem or
other transmission device. At one end of this cable, there is an RJ-45 plug and at the other
end, a 9-pin D-sub miniature male connector to which the normal connecting cable to the
modem or transmission device can be connected.
The adapter cable is supplied with each TIM 4R/4RD module. It can also be ordered as a
spare part under the number listed in the following table.
Table 1- 8
Order no.
Description
6NH7700-0AS05
Adapter cable for connecting the 2nd serial RS-232/RS-485 port

integrated in a TIM 4R / 4RD to convert the internal plug (RJ-45)
to the 9-pin D-sub miniature male connector required externally.
Cable length 0.5 m
Illustration
5-
7,0
1.9
SLQ
'VXE
0'
The SINAUT ST7 standard software package

The SINAUT ST7 standard software package comes on a CD-ROM and is made up of two
parts:
1. The SINAUT TD7 library that contains blocks for the S7 CPU
2. The SINAUT ST7 configuration and diagnostics software for installation on the
programming device
The CD-ROM also contains the SINAUT ST7 manual in electronic form (German/English).
The software package is a working package that can be used for any number of SINAUT
projects without licensing.
1.9.1
SINAUT TD7 Library, blocks for the CPU

The SINAUT TD7 library is a software package with blocks for the CPU. The package was
designed so that it can run both on an S7-400 and on and S7-300 CPU. There are only a few
blocks intended specifically for the S7-300 or S7-400 CPUs.

65

The SINAUT TD7 software in the stations allows change-driven transmission of process data
between the individual CPUs and the control center, for example ST7cc. Failure of
connections, CPUs, or the control center are displayed. Once a problem has been corrected
or the CPUs or control center has started up, data is updated automatically. When
necessary, data messages can be given a time stamp.
Note
Data communication from the CPU to other CPUs or to ST7cc/ ST7sc over a WAN
connection can only be implemented with the SINAUT TD7 software. This is not possible
with the S7 communication SFBs/SFCs for configured and unconfigured connections. These
are suitable only for local communication without a gateway.
The essential components are the package are as follows:
Basic and auxiliary blocks
Most of these blocks are always required on the CPU. A few are purely optional. The
basic blocks handle central tasks such as startup, monitoring of connections and
connection partners, general requests, time management, handling communication etc.
The auxiliary blocks enter messages in the send buffer or fetch them from the receive
buffer, handle send and receive jobs for specific connections or provide information as a
result of searches.
Data point typicals
These blocks are included in the CPU program depending on the type and amount of
data to be transferred. They put messages together when data changes and output
received process data.
To operate correctly, the TD7 package requires some data blocks that are generated by the
SINAUT ST7 configuration tool. These are as follows:
Central records DB
This contains all the centrally required data including the records of all communication
partners and the connections to be managed.
Communication DBs
A separate communication DB is created for each connection. This DB contains a send
and receive buffer and all the data required for controlling and monitoring the connection.
The package is completed by blocks for diagnostics and alarms:
66

TestCopy
This block can be used to log which messages are sent and/or received within the CPU.
SMS_Control
When certain user-defined events occur, this block puts together appropriate text
messages that can be transmitted as SMS messages to a specified mobile phone.
Note
With the Ethernet TIMs, you can choose between two alternatives:
1. As described above, the SINAUT program is created with the TD7 blocks and
therefore runs on the CPU and takes up a corresponding amount of work memory
(TD7onCPU)
2. The SINAUT program runs on the TIM (TD7onTIM). In an ideal situation, no program
memory on the CPU is required for SINAUT.
1.9.2
SINAUT ST7 configuration software for the PG

The configuration tools can be used with Windows Server 2003 SP2, Windows XP SP2 or
Windows Vista 32 Bit Ultimate and Business. STEP 7 software V5.4 SP4 or higher must also
be installed.
The configuration software includes the following components:
A module manager that expands the HW Config STEP 7 tool. It handles the display and
parameter assignment of the TIM modules in HW Config.
A WAN manager that expands the NetPro STEP 7 tool. This is responsible for the display
and parameter assignment of the SINAUT WAN networks SINAUT network nodes in
NetPro.
The SINAUT ST 7 configuration tool is used for project-wide functions such as SINAUT
connection configuration and SINAUT subscriber management.
The SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool. In addition to the diagnostic functions
familiar from STEP 7. Using the service tool, it is, for example, possible to load new
software on a TIM.
The module manager for SINAUT ST7

The SINAUT module manager expands the catalog of the STEP 7 hardware configuration
tool HW Config. The SIMATIC 300 folder was extended by the SINAUT ST7 folder. This lists
all available TIM modules.
You can select the required TIM module from the SINAUT ST7 folder and install it in the S7
rack.
You can then open a properties dialog and assign the required parameters to the module.
This dialog is also available in the NetPro network configuration tool.

67

Figure 1-19
Module manager for SINAUT ST7
The WAN manager for SINAUT ST7

The SINAUT WAN manager expands the catalog for the STEP 7 NetPro network
configuration tool. The SINAUT networks have been added to the Subnets directory. You
can select the SINAUT networks you require from this directory and install them in the STEP
7 network window.
The TIM modules are interconnected with the networks in the STEP 7 network window using
the mouse. Errors in the interconnections are rejected immediately.
A properties dialog can be opened in which you can specify the generally valid parameters
for a network, for example, ST7 protocol, transmission speed etc.
In a further dialog, you can specify individual properties for the network nodes, when
connecting to a telephone network, for example, the telephone number.
68

Figure 1-20
The WAN manager for SINAUT ST7
When necessary, the properties dialog of a TIM module can also be opened in NetPro. You
have the same configuration options as inHW Config.
The SINAUT ST7 configuration tool

Unlike the two managers mentioned up to now, the SINAUT ST7 configuration tool does not
expand one of the standard STEP 7 tools but is a separate configuration tool embedded in
the STEP 7 environment. This allows you to perform the remaining SINAUT-specific
configuration tasks. It consists of the following:
Connection configuration
Subscriber administration
SINAUT ST1 - Configuration Overview

69

The first step is to use the Connection configuration tool to specify the SINAUT subscribers
(ST7-CPU, ST7cc/ST7sc) between which a connection is necessary. The tool provides you
with a selection of all theoretically possible connections in the right-hand pane of the split
window. These are determined automatically by the tool based on the network configured
with NetPro (see WAN manager). The user then selects the required connections and copies
them to the left-hand pane using the context menu.
Figure 1-21
The SINAUT ST7 configuration tool
The Subscriber administration tool then provides the user with a list of all available SINAUT
subscribers. Where necessary, you can make subscriber-specific adaptations, for example,
changing the SINAUT subscriber number of the individual devices or the configuration of
message texts to be sent as an SMS. Subscriber management also involves the
configuration of the data messages to be sent and received if the message generation and
evaluation is to be performed by the TIM (only possible for TIMs with TD7onTIM
functionality). Based on the configuration data, the tool generates the system data blocks
(SDBs) for the CPUs and TIMs. If the SINAUT TD7 software for the CPU is used, the tool
also prepares records and communication data blocks for the CPUs and enters them in the
block directories of the CPUs along with the blocks (FBs, FCs) required by the individual
CPUs for SINAUT communication.
70

The third tool SINAUT ST1 - configuration overview is required only for configuring systems
which include SINAUT ST1 devices. This is a convenient utility with which addresses can be
synchronized for SINAUT ST1 when necessary.
The following figure illustrates how SMS messages can be configured conveniently in
subscriber administration. The configuration results in the automatic generation of data
blocks containing texts and the corresponding function blocks that are saved in the block
directory on the relevant CPUs.
Figure 1-22
Configuring SMS messages

71

The SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool

In addition to the diagnostic functions familiar from STEP 7, you also have access here to
SINAUT-specific diagnostic information. Using the service tool, it is, for example, possible to
load new software on a TIM.
Figure 1-23
Examples of SINAUT ST7 diagnostics
72

1.9.3
Table 1- 9
Overview for ordering SINAUT ST7 software

Overview for ordering SINAUT ST7 software
Short name
Order no.
Explanation
SW ST7
6NH7997-0CA15-0AA0
Standard software for SINAUT ST7, consisting of

SINAUT TD7 library with blocks for the CPU
SINAUT ST7 configuration and diagnostic software for the
programming device
Electronic manual (German/English)
UPGR SW ST7
6NH7997-0CA15-0GA0
ST7 software upgrade package for owners of SINAUT ST7

standard software packages less than V4.0
1.9.4
Installation of the SINAUT ST7 standard software package

The following requirements must be met to install any or all components of the software
package:
Operating system: Windows Server 2003 SP2, Windows XP SP2 or Windows Vista 32 Bit
Ultimate and Business
The installed STEP 7 software must be version 5.4 SP4 or higher.
If the Autorun feature is activated on your PC/PG, the SINAUT ST7 setup program starts
automatically when you insert the CD. Otherwise, use the Explorer to open the root directory
on the CD and click on theSetup.exe application.
The setup program checks which components on the CD can be installed and then displays
a list from which you can make your selection. Setups are currently available for the
following components.
SINAUT ST7 configuration: Basic version V5.0
SINAUT TD7 library V2.2
Figure 1-24
Master setup dialog

73

Select the components you want to install (you can select several packages at once using
shift-click) and start the installation by clicking the Install button.
Note
To configure SINAUT systems, you must install the two packages TD7 Library and Manager.
During installation, the setup program will prompt you for any necessary information.
The installation programs perform the following individual operations:
The programs and data supplied with SINAUT ST7 are copied to the correct locations in
the STEP 7 system.
A new submenu SINAUT ST7 containing the SINAUT tools is integrated in the SIMATIC
menu.
A SINAUT ST7 Configuration icon is created on your desktop.
Note
SINAUT ST7 registers in the Microsoft Windows system files. Do not use Microsoft Windows
tools such as the Explorer to move or rename SINAUT ST 7 files or folders or to modify
STEP 7 data in the Microsoft Windows registry. Following such modifications, your program
may no longer functioning correctly.
1.9.5
Uninstalling SINAUT ST7 software packages

Uninstalling scene of software packages must be in conformity with the operating system
you are using. Open the Windows Control Panel and select Add/Remove Programs.
In the dialog that opens, select Change or Remove Programs and select the required
SINAUT ST7 component from the list and then select the Remove button. Following a
prompt for confirmation, the SINAUT ST7 component is then removed from your system.
Note
When the component is uninstalled, the entries made in the WINSTART.BAT/CONFIG.SYS/
AUTOEXEC.BAT files by the system are not cleared. Files created dynamically by STEP 7
may also remain on your hard disk after uninstalling a component. This is detected by the
uninstall tool and indicated by the message "Some elements could not be removed. You
should manually remove items related to the application." However, these dynamically
created files do not need to be deleted.
74

1.10 SINAUT ST7cc, the add-on for WinCC
1.10
SINAUT ST7cc, the add-on for WinCC
1.10.1
Area of application
SINAUT ST7cc is the ideal control center system based on SIMATIC WinCC for SINAUT
ST7.
It is specially designed for event-driven and time-stamped data transmission in the SINAUT
system. It avoids the possible loss of data that can occur with cyclic polling in WinCC. It also
ensures the use of the correct event time supplied by the SINAUT stations for all WinCC
messages and archive entries. The process image integrated in ST7cc contains all process
data as well as the status of all SINAUT subscribers in the network and makes this data
available directly to WinCC for fast transfer to the process image.
The ST7cc Config configuration tool provides the user with fully integrated engineering
based on the data messages that were configured in the SINAUT stations. Configuration of
WinCC including tag management is therefore generated automatically and updated
consistently whenever changes occur.
For archives, logs and reports that meet the requirements of ATV H260 or Hirthammer, the
additional use of the WinCC add-on ACRON is advisable. ST7cc provides a configurable
data interface to these add-ons.
Along with the WinCC redundancy package, a fault-tolerant ST7cc control center can be
implemented.
Figure 1-25
SINAUT ST7cc control center system (single or redundant) with attached SINAUT
stations

75

Note
The SINAUT ST7cc for WinCC expansion packet is described in detail in a separate manual.
To complete the "Introduction to the SINAUT ST7 system" in this chapter, we will
nevertheless briefly outline the properties of the SINAUT ST7cc package.
1.10.2
The special properties of SINAUT ST7cc
Telecontrol master with user-friendly diagnostics

Direct connection of SINAUT ST7 TIMs to ST7cc over MPI and Ethernet. A separate CPU
as telecontrol master is not required.
Availability of the most important status information of each SINAUT subscriber with
visualization in WinCC using provided station typicals (picture typicals and faceplates)
Option of controlling SINAUT subscribers with these faceplates
Identification of process values from subscriber stations with a disrupted connection to
ST7cc
General request to affected stations following data transfer problems to allow the process
image to be updated in ST7cc
For diagnostic purposes: Selective recording of message traffic for individual or all
SINAUT subscribers. Message visualization and evaluation is the same as with the TIM
message monitor.
Time synchronization by ST7cc for the TIMs connected to the ST7cc PC over Ethernet
Preprocessing of process data
Preprocessing can be configured for binary, analog, and counted values. This takes into
account the event time and adds the time stamp of the event time to related messages and
archive entries.
Binary values
Entry of current binary values in the assigned WinCC tags
Entry of related messages into the WinCC message system taking into account the
time stamp supplied by SINAUT
Analog values (instantaneous and mean values)
Floating-point numbers, integer values
Linear raw value scaling (raw value --> physical value)
Entry of analog values (with or without linear raw value scaling) in the assigned
WinCC tags
Entry of analog values (with or without linear raw value scaling) into the WinCC
archive taking into account the time stamp supplied by SINAUT
76

Counted values
Overflow handling with absolute counters
Counted value scaling using factors
Calculation of correctly timed interval quantities
Entry of currently accumulating interval quantities in the assigned WinCC tags
Entry of completed interval quantities into the WinCC archive taking into account the
time stamp supplied by SINAUT
Setpoints
Floating-point numbers, integer values
Linear raw value scaling (raw value --> physical value) when necessary
Simple, totally integrated project engineering
The configuration of the entire system with ST7ccConfig is very user-friendly. Extra WinCC
configuration for the tag management, and the archive and message system is restricted to a
few preparations, such as creating message classes and types and archives in WinCC.
1.10.3
System prerequisites
Structure
SINAUT ST7cc is installed on a Windows PC (Windows 2000, XP or Server 2003). WinCC
can also run on the same PC. WinCC client/server configurations are also possible in which
ST7cc is located on the WinCC server.
Licenses
It is assumed that a license is available for the WinCC full package. This can also be a
runtime package if no configuration is necessary on the end computer. For redundant ST7cc,
you also require the WinCC redundancy package including license.
The following table shows which software packages are required for the ST7cc single or
redundant system.
ST7cc single system
Number
Software package
Windows 2000, XP, or Server 2003
WinCC full package*
SIMATIC NET with license for CP software
SW ST7cc S (with a license for six stations)

or
SW ST7cc M (with license for 12 stations)
or
SW ST7cc L (with license for > 12 stations)

77

ST7cc redundant system

Number
Software package
Windows 2000, XP, or Server 2003
WinCC full package*
WinCC runtime package
WinCC redundancy package (with two licenses)
SIMATIC NET with license for CP software
ST7cc redundancy package (with two licenses)
SW ST7cc S (with a license for six stations)

or
SW ST7cc M (with license for 12 stations)
or
SW ST7cc L (with license for > 12 stations)
*) This can also be a runtime package if no configuration is necessary on the end computer.
Connecting SINAUT stations

One or more SINAUT ST7 TIM communications processors are connected either over the
MPI S7 standard bus or Ethernet.
ST7cc
WinCC
ST7cc server
DCF77
GPS
Ethernet
MPI
TIM
TIM
Ethernet-based WAN
Classical WAN
TIM
TIM
TIM
TIM
TIM
TIM
CPU
CPU
CPU
CPU
CPU
CPU
Figure 1-26
Connecting ST7 stations over the MPI bus or Ethernet
78

When supplying the current time of day, the following situations must be distinguished:
For TIMs (TIM 4x), connected to the ST7cc PC over MPI, time synchronization is possible
only with a TIM equipped with a DCF77 receiver. This then serves as the central time
synchronization source for the ST7cc PC and all other TIMs connected to MPI. These, in
turn, synchronize their stations connected over the WAN.
For TIMs (TIM 3V-IE) connected directly to the ST7cc PC over IP-based WAN, the time is
synchronized by ST7cc.
A GPS receiver is recommended outside the reception range of the DCF77 time transmitter;
this can determine the local time from the satellite-based GPS system (Global Positioning
System).
1.10.4
Ordering data for SINAUT ST7cc

Table 1- 10
Ordering data for SINAUT ST7cc
Short name
Order no.
SINAUT ST7cc
Explanation
SINAUT ST7cc
Software for connecting SINAUT stations to
WinCC (Windows 2000 / XP / Server 2003); single
license for one installation of the runtime software;
Runtime software, configuration software, and
electronic manual on CD-ROM; license key on
diskette; German/English
SINAUT ST7cc S
6NH7 997-7CA15-0AA1
Small license for a maximum of 6 SINAUT stations
SINAUT ST7cc M
6NH7 997-7CA15-0AA2
Medium license for a maximum of 12 SINAUT

stations
SINAUT ST7cc L
6NH7 997-7CA15-0AA3
Large license for more than 12 SINAUT stations
SINAUT ST7cc R
6NH7 997-8CA15-0AA0
Redundancy license for ST7cc (contains 2

licenses);
2 individual licenses ST7cc S, M or L are also
required.
SINAUT ST7cc SM
6NH7 997-7AA00-0AD2
License upgrade from ST7cc S to ST7cc M (from

6 to 12 stations)
SINAUT ST7cc SL
6NH7 997-7AA00-0AD3
License upgrade from ST7cc S to ST7cc L (from 6

to more than 12 stations)
SINAUT ST7cc ML
6NH7 997-7AA00-0AE3
License upgrade from ST7cc M to ST7cc L (from

12 to more than 12 stations)
MANUAL ST7cc D
6NH7 998-7AA11
SINAUT ST7cc manual on paper, German
MANUAL ST7cc E
6NH7 998-7AA21
SINAUT ST7cc manual on paper, English

79

1.11 SINAUT ST7sc SCADA Connect software
1.10.5
Technical specifications of SINAUT ST7cc

SINAUT ST7cc
Operating systems
Windows XP Prof. SP1, SP2,

Windows 2000 Prof. SP1, 2, 3, 4
Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition + SP1
WinCC versions
WinCC V5.0 SP2 or higher

WinCC V6.0 SP2 HF5 or higher
WinCC V6.0 SP3 HF2 or higher
STEP 7/NCM versions
SIMATIC NCM PC/S7 V5.3 SP2

or
SIMATIC STEP 7 V5.3 SP1
SIMATIC NET PC software versions
SIMATIC NET PC software V6.2;

SIMATIC NET PC software V 6.3
Configuration
ST7cc
ST7cc Config Tool V2.5
SINAUT system
SINAUT ST7 configuration software V3.5;

SINAUT ST7 configuration software V3.6
Configuration limits
1.11
6 SINAUT stations
Small license
12 SINAUT stations
Medium license
For more than 12 SINAUT stations
Large license
SINAUT ST7sc SCADA Connect software

The SINAUT system allows the networking of SIMATIC stations with a control center over a
classic or IP-based WAN (Wide Area Network). This control center can also be a SIMATIC
station or a PC-based control center, for example, WinCC with the SINAUT ST7cc add-on.
SINAUT ST7sc allows the manufacturers of control systems to connect to SINAUT without
needing to integrate a SINAUT interface. Communication is over OPC: As an OPC server,
SINAUT ST7sc forms the interface between the SINAUT system and a control system
connected as an OPC client.
The OPC interface is also suitable for data exchange with other applications, for example,
the Microsoft Office application Excel.
80

Figure 1-27
1.11.1
Control center system and SINAUT ST7sc with attached SINAUT stations
The special properties of SINAUT ST7sc
Acquiring process data

The SINAUT station acquires the process data when it changes and transfers this to
SINAUT ST7sc over the WAN. Here, the received SINAUT messages are decoded and
stored in the ST7sc variable management as specified in the configuration An OPC client
can read this received data from the ST7sc variable management over the "Data Access"
OPC server interface. This reading is either synchronous or asynchronous (recommended);
in other words, the OPC server interface transfers data only when there have been changes
in the ST7sc variable management.
In the other direction, the OPC client can write data to be sent to a station (for example,
commands, setpoints, parameters) over the OPC server interface to the ST7sc variable
management. This is converted into SINAUT data messages and sent over the WAN to the
SINAUT station specified in the configuration.

81

Item buffering technique

One special feature of the SINAUT system is that process data is protected from loss. If, for
example, the connection between the station and the control center breaks down, the station
stores all the data changes acquired during the breakdown locally along with a time stamp.
This means that connections can break down for several hours or even several days without
loss of data. To make sure that the data stored on the stations arrives safely at the OPC
client later, ST7sc includes the "item buffering" technique that helps to avoid data loss on the
way to the OPC client, as follows:
When the OPC "Data Access" interface that represents a process image is updated by
the SINAUT stations more quickly than the client can read it.
When the OPC client is not available for brief or even longer periods or when OPC
communication breaks down.
While ST7sc normally creates only one "memory cell" per item and this always contains the
last state of the value of the item, when the item buffering technique is selected, a buffer is
created per item in which all changes of the relevant item are stored in chronological order
with their time stamps. These changes are stored until the individual changes have been
transferred to the OPC client.
The Item buffering technique is only possible with an HMI application that can process timestamped data even when the time stamp is several days old, for example after a long
connection breakdown.
OPC
communication
SINAUT
ST7sc
1
1a
1b
1c
3
3a
7
7a
7b
7c
7d
7e
45
78
78a
78b
79
79a
79b
79c
Item Buffer
"Data access" OPC server interface
ST7sc variable range
SINAUT
data
message
Figure 1-28
SINAUT
WAN
communication
SINAUT
data
message
G_IK10_XX_30014
SINAUT message
decoding
SINAUT message
coding
System configuration with SINAUT ST7sc
82

Redundant application
SINAUT ST7sc allows attachment to a redundant client system. In this case, two ST7sc
systems are necessary. The data received from the stations is transferred parallel and
independently to both clients and data intended for the stations is received from these
clients.
The redundancy "intelligence" is a feature of the client:
It ensures correct evaluation and synchronization of the simultaneously transferred data.
It transfers data intended for the stations only once to one of the two ST7sc systems so
that duplicate transfer is not necessary.
Configuration
ST7sc is configured with the ST7sc Config tool supplied on the ST7sc software CD.
The documentation on ST7sc and the Config tool is also on this CD.
1.11.2
System prerequisites
Structure
SINAUT ST7sc is installed on a Windows PC (Windows 2000 or XP). The OPC server
function allows connection of one or more client applications. These clients are either
connected to the server over a suitable communication medium, for example Ethernet, or
they are installed on the same PC as SINAUT ST7sc.

83

Connecting SINAUT stations

One or more SINAUT ST7 TIM communications processors are connected either over the
MPI S7 standard bus or Ethernet.
Client
Host (1)
Client
Host (n)
OPC client
ST7sc
DCF77
GPS
OPC server
Ethernet
MPI
TIM
OPC client
TIM
IP-based WAN
Classical WAN
TIM
TIM
TIM
TIM
TIM
TIM
CPU
CPU
CPU
CPU
CPU
CPU
Figure 1-29
Connecting SINAUT stations over the MPI bus and Ethernet
When supplying the current time of day, the following situations must be distinguished:
For TIMs (TIM 4x), connected to the ST7sc PC over MPI, time synchronization is possible
only with a TIM equipped with a DCF77 receiver. This then serves as the central time
synchronization source for the ST7sc PC and all other TIMs connected to MPI. These, in
turn, synchronize their stations connected over the WAN.
For TIMs (TIM 3V-IE) connected directly to the ST7sc PC over IP-based WAN, the time is
synchronized by ST7sc.
A GPS receiver is recommended outside the reception range of the DCF77 time transmitter;
this can determine the local time from the satellite-based GPS system (Global Positioning
System).
84

1.11.3
Ordering data for SINAUT ST7sc

Table 1- 11
Ordering data for SINAUT ST7sc
Short name
Order no.
SINAUT ST7sc
Explanation
Software for connecting SINAUT stations to HMI,
SCADA and Office applications over OPC; single
license for one installation of the runtime software;
Runtime software, configuration software, and
electronic manual on CD-ROM; license key on
diskette; German/English
SINAUT ST7sc S
6NH7997-5CA05-0AA1
Small license for a maximum of 6 SINAUT stations
SINAUT ST7sc M
6NH7997-5CA05-0AA2
Medium license for a maximum of 12 SINAUT

stations
SINAUT ST7sc L
6NH7997-5CA05-0AA3
Large license for more than 12 SINAUT stations
SINAUT ST7sc SM
6NH7997-5AA00-0AD2
License upgrade from ST7sc S to ST7sc M

(from 6 to 12 stations)
SINAUT ST7sc SL
6NH7997-5AA00-0AD3
License upgrade from ST7sc S to ST7sc L

(from 6 to more than 12 stations)
SINAUT ST7sc ML
6NH7997-5AA00-0AE3
License upgrade from ST7sc M to ST7sc L

(from 12 to more than 12 stations)
MANUAL ST7sc D
6NH7998-5AA11
SINAUT ST7sc manual on paper, German
MANUAL ST7sc E
6NH7998-5AA21
SINAUT ST7sc manual on paper, English

85

1.11.4
Technical specifications of SINAUT ST7sc

SINAUT ST7sc
Programming
Open and standardized;

OPC interface "Data Access Interface V2.05";
Synchronous (IOPCSyncIO) and asynchronous
(IOPCAsyncIO2) reading and writing of variables over the
standard interface; The access to variables of the item buffer
uses asynchronous reads
Protocols
DCOM protocol
Operating systems
Windows XP Prof. SP1, SP2;

Windows 2000 Prof. SP1, 2, 3, 4
STEP 7/NCM versions
SIMATIC NCM PC/S7 V5.3 SP2

or
SIMATIC STEP 7 V5.3 SP1
SIMATIC NET PC software versions
SIMATIC NET PC software V6.2;

SIMATIC NET PC software V 6.3
Configuration
ST7sc Config tool
Configuration limits
6 SINAUT stations
Small license
12 SINAUT stations
Medium license
More than 12 SINAUT stations
Large license
86
Network structures and topologies
The following overview shows you the network structures that can be implemented with
SINAUT ST7 in a WAN and on Industrial Ethernet. For each network configuration, you will
also see the protocols and modes with which SINAUT can handle communication over the
network.
2.1
Overview of the possible network types

With SINAUT ST7, complete hierarchical control networks consisting of stations, node
stations and master station can be set up over a WAN (Wide Area Network).
The following WAN types can be used to exchange information between the devices:
IP-based WAN
SINAUT communication is possible between station and control center and between stations
over IP-based WANs:
Over public networks and Internet with DSL or GPRS
Over wireless by using special wireless devices optimized for Ethernet, for example,
SCALANCE W
Over fiber-optic cable
For example by using SCALANCE X switches with optical ports; this allows distances
of up to 120 km to be covered,
or also
in conjunction with transmission systems such as PCM30 or OTN
Classic WAN
The following classic WANs can be used for data transmission:
Dedicated lines, private or leased copper or fiber-optic cable
Private wireless networks (optionally with time slots)
Mobile wireless network GSM

87

2.2 Configurations
2.2
Configurations
The symbols used in the following configurations represent the various modules with their
LAN or WAN interfaces.
Note
Notes on TIM 4 / TIM 4R-IE
The two WAN interfaces of a TIM 4R / TIM 4RD can both have the same function (for
example 2 x master) or different functions (for example node + master).
With redundant WAN connections, a TIM 4 or TIM 4R-IE with two interfaces must always
be used because redundant paths always start and end on a TIM module.
2.2.1
Configurations with IP-based WAN
IP-based network, linking via switches

6,1$8767FFVF
&RQWUROFHQWHUZLWK
&3$
&3
6ZLWFKHV
6&$/$1&(
;
6
ZLWK7,09,(
)LEHURSWLF
6ZLWFKHV
6&$/$1&(
;
6
ZLWK7,09,(
6ZLWFKHV
6&$/$1&(
;
6ZLWFKHV
6&$/$1&(
;
6
ZLWK7,09,(
Figure 2-1
IP-based network, linking via switches
88

2.2 Configurations
Wireless Ethernet communication

6,1$8767FFVF
7,0
5,(
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
&RQWUROFHQWHU
(WKHUQHW
5DGLR
QHWZRUN
6
6WDWLRQ
6
7,0
9,(
Figure 2-2
6WDWLRQ
6
7,0
9,(
6WDWLRQ
7,0
9,(
Wireless Ethernet communication
Wireless Ethernet communication with TIM 3V-IE in master stations and stations
+0,3DQHO
6
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
7,0
9,(
&RQWUROFHQWHU
(WKHUQHW
UDGLRQHWZRUN
6
6WDWLRQ
Figure 2-3
6
7,0
9,(
6WDWLRQ
6
7,0
9,(
6WDWLRQ
7,0
9,(
Wireless Ethernet communication with TIM 3V-IE in master stations and stations

89

2.2 Configurations
IP-based communication via DSL

6,1$8767FFVF
6HFXULW\
0RGXOH '6/URXWHU
6&$/$1&(6 ZLWKILUHZDOO
7,05,(
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
&RQWUROFHQWHU
,QWHUQHW
931WXQQHO
'6/URXWHU
ZLWKILUHZDOO
6&$/$1&(6
VHFXULW\PRGXOH
'6/URXWHU
ZLWKILUHZDOO
6&$/$1&(6
VHFXULW\PRGXOH
6
6
7,0
9,(
6WDWLRQ
Figure 2-4
6
7,0
9,(
6WDWLRQ
7,0
9,(
6WDWLRQ
IP-based communication via DSL
90

2.2 Configurations
IP-based communication via GPRS with simple security (simple Internet communication)
SINAUT
ST7cc/sc
TIM
4R-IE
DSL
router
Dedicated line
to Internet, e.g.
DSL connection
with flat rate and
preferably
fixed IP address
Industrial
Ethernet
Control center
VPN tunnel (MSC)
VPN tunnel (MSC)
Internet
GPRS network
Dynamic
IP address
Dynamic
IP address
MD720-3
DSL router
S7-300 with
TIM 3V-IE Adv.
Station
Figure 2-5
S7-300 with
TIM 3V-IE or
TIM 3V-IE Adv.
Station
IP-based communication (GPRS/DSL) with MSC protocol via MD720-3 modem

91

2.2 Configurations
IP-based communication via GPRS with higher security
SINAUT
ST7cc/sc
TIM
4R-IE
Security
Module
SCALANCE S
DSL router
Industrial
Ethernet
Control center
Dedicated line
to Internet, e.g.
DSL connection
with flat rate and
preferably
fixed IP address
Firewall
VPN tunnel
VPN tunnel
Internet
GPRS network
Firewall
Firewall
Dynamic
IP address
MD741-1
S7-300 with
TIM 3V-IE
Station
Figure 2-6
Dynamic
IP address
MD741-1
S7-300 with
TIM 3V-IE
Station
GPRS with higher security via MD741-1 router
92

2.2 Configurations
2.2.2
Configurations with classic WAN
Dedicated line configurations

Notes
Network type:
Protocol:
Mode:
Point-to-point
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Polling
Network type:
Protocol:
Mode:
Star
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Polling
Network type:
Protocol:
Mode:
Line
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Polling
Combination of
- Point-to-point
- Star
- Line
Protocol:
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Mode:
Polling
Combination of
- Point-to-point
- Nodes
- Star
Protocol:
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Mode:
Polling
Combination of
- Point-to-point
- Nodes
- Star
- Line
Protocol:
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Mode:
Polling
Master (control center)
Station
Network
type:
Protocol:
Mode:
Line with two control centers *)

SINAUT ST7
Multi-master polling with
time-slot procedure
Node station
*) More than two control centers can be used
Figure 2-7

93

2.2 Configurations
Radio network configuration
Radio network configurations
Notes
Network
type:
Protocol:
Mode:
Network
type:
Protocol:
Mode:
Point-to-point
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Polling or
Star
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Polling or
polling with time slot procedure
Combination of
- Point-to-point
- Nodes
- Star
Protocol:
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Mode:
Polling or
polling with time slot procedure
Network
type:
Protocol:
Mode:
Star with two control centers *)

SINAUT ST7
Multi-master polling with
time-slot procedure
*) More than two control centers can be used
Figure 2-8
Station
Node station
Radio network configurations
94

2.2 Configurations
Dial-up network configuration

Dial-up network configurations
Notes
Network type:
Analog telephone or
digital ISDN *)
Protocol: SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Mode:
Spontaneous
*) A combination of analog and ISDN
connections is not possible if SINAUT
modems are used.
Special hybrid modems are required for this
purpose.
Network type: Mobile radio network (GSM)

SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Protocol:
Mode:
Spontaneous
Network
type:
Combination of fixed
network and
mobile radio network *)
Mode:
Spontaneous
*) Fixed network connections, either analog
or ISDN; ISDN is recommended if
combined with mobile radio.
Network
type:
Dial-up network with 2

control centers 1)
The example here shows a
hybrid network consisting of
fixed- and mobile radio network 2)
Protocol:
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Mode:
Spontaneous
1) More than two control centers be used
2) Fixed network connections, either analog or ISDN;
ISDN is recommended if combined with mobile
radio.
Network
type:
Combination of dedicated line

and fixed network via
node station *)
Mode:
Polling (dedicated line)
Spontaneous (dial-up network)
Station
*) Fixed network connections, either analog

or ISDN
Node station
Figure 2-9
Dial-up network configurations

95

2.2 Configurations
Examples of redundant configurations

Redundant network configurations (examples)
Notes
Network
type:
Protocol:
Mode:
Network
type:
Protocol:
Mode:
Network
type:
Protocol:
Mode:
Network
type:
Protocol:
Mode:
Network
type:
Protocol:
Mode:
Redundant point-to-point
connection via two
dedicated lines
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Polling
Redundant star network via

2 dedicated lines each, mixed
with non-redundantly
connected stations
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Polling
Redundant line network via

2 dedicated lines each, mixed
with non-redundantly
connected stations
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Polling
Redundant point-to-point
connection via dedicated line
and dial-up network
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Polling (dedicated line)
Spontaneous (dial-up network)
Redundant Point-to-Point
connection via dedicated line
and radio between control center
and node station;
subordinate stations connected
via a non-redundant star
network
SINAUT ST7 and ST1
Polling or polling with time slot
procedure (wireless)
Station
Node station
Figure 2-10
Redundant configurations
For further options for setting up redundant transmission paths, refer to section Installing the
TIM 4R-IE in an S7-300 (Page 108).
96
Installation guide
Installation guide
NOTICE
Keep to the installation guide of the SIMATIC S7-300
Modules must be installed according to the installation guidelines of SIMATIC S7-300. You
will find information on installation and wiring up in the Operating Instructions "SIMATIC S7300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Installation": You will find the operating instructions on the
Internet, see also the references in the Appendix.
3.1
Horizontal and vertical installation

You can operate the SINAUT ST7 components both in horizontally and in vertically installed
racks.
Permitted ambient temperature

The SINAUT ST7 components can be operated in the same temperature range specified for
the S7-300.
Table 3- 1
Permitted ambient temperatures for the SINAUT TIM modules

Installation position
Permitted ambient temperature (operation)

0 to 60 C
TIM
Horizontally installed rack
TIM
0 to 40 C
Vertically installed rack

97
Installation guide
3.2 Dimensions for installation of the SINAUT ST7 components
3.2
Dimensions for installation of the SINAUT ST7 components
Introduction
This section contains information on the dimensions for installing SINAUT ST7 components.
You will require this information when planning the mechanical layout of a SINAUT ST7
system.
Dimensions for installation of the components
Table 3- 2
3.3
Dimensions for installation of the SINAUT ST7 components
Module
Module
width
Module
height
Max. depth
Installation
on
Communications module
TIM 3V-IE and
TIM 3V-IE Advanced
40 mm
125 mm
120 mm or 150 mm with

open front panel
S7 rail
TIM 4R-IE and TIM 4
80 mm
125 mm

open front panel
S7 rail
Modem module
MD2, MD3 and MD4
80 mm
125 mm

open front panel
S7 rail
GSM modem
MD720-3
22.5 mm
99 mm

open front panel
DIN rail
35 mm
GPRS router
MD741-1
45 mm
99 mm
120 mm or 160 mm with DIN rail

open front panel
35 mm
Current consumption and power loss of the SINAUT ST7

components
Introduction
The SINAUT ST7 components obtain the current required for operation from an external
power supply. If the communications module TIM 4 or a TIM 3V-IE variant is installed in an
S7-300, it also draws current over the S7-300 backplane bus.
You require the information on current consumption of the SINAUT ST7 components from
the external load power supply and from the backplane bus, for example, to configure the
cabinet for a SINAUT ST7 station control device.
98
Installation guide
3.3 Current consumption and power loss of the SINAUT ST7 components
Current consumption and power loss

The following table lists the current consumption and power loss of the SINAUT ST7 TIM
and modem components.
Table 3- 3
Current consumption and power loss of the SINAUT ST7 TIM and modem components
Short module name
Module order no.
Current consumption
from backplane bus
(max.)
Current consumption
from 24 V load power
supply
Power loss (nominal)
TIM 3V-IE
6NH7 800-3BA00
200 mA
160 mA
5.8 W
TIM 3V-IE Advanced
6NH7 800-3CA00
200 mA
160 mA
5.8 W
TIM 4R-IE
6NH7 800-4BA00
200 mA
170 mA
4.6 W
TIM 4R
6NH7 800-4AA90
60 mA *)
500 mA
12.3 W
TIM 4RD
6NH7 800-4AD90
60 mA *)
500 mA
12.3 W
MD2
6NH7 810-0AA20
100 mA
2.4 W
MD3
6NH7 810-0AA30
200 mA
4.8 W
MD4
6NH7 810-0AA40
100 mA
2.4 W
MD741-1
6NH9 741-1AA00
137...182 mA ***)
4W
MD720-3
6NH9 720-3AA00
50 / 140 mA **)
5W
*) only when the TIM module is installed as a CP in an S7-300 rack

**) lower value: Receive mode/ higher value: Send mode
***) depending on the mode, see System manual MD741-1
Example
An S7-300 is configured with the following modules:
1 power supply PS 307; 2 A
1 CPU 314
2 digital input modules SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V
1 relay module SM 322; DO 8 x AC 230 V/5 A
1 analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits
1 analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits
1 communications module TIM 4R
1 modem MD3
Calculation of the current and power loss balance
The following table contains the power consumption and loss balance for the S7- 300
configuration described above. This current consumption and power loss balance does not
include any actuators connected to the outputs.

99
Installation guide
3.3 Current consumption and power loss of the SINAUT ST7 components
Table 3- 4
Current consumption and power loss balance
Module
Current consumption
from S7-300 backplane
bus
Current consumption from 24

V load power supply
Power loss
Power supply PS 307; 2 A
10 W
CPU 314
700 mA
8W
(2 x 25 mA) = 50 mA
(2 x 25 mA) = 50 mA
(2 x 3.5 W) = 7 W
1 relay module
SM 322; DO 8 x AC 230 V/5 A
40 mA
125 mA
4.2 W
1 analog input module

SM 331; AI 8 x 12 bits
60 mA
200 mA
1.3 W
1 analog output module

SM 332; AO 2 x 12 bits
60 mA
135 mA
3W
1 communications module
TIM 4R
60 mA
500 mA
12.3 W
2 digital input modules

SM 321; DI 16 x DC 24 V
1 modem MD3
Total:
200 mA
4.8 W
270 mA
1910 mA
50.6 W
Result
The following results can be derived from the table above:
1. Current consumption from S7-300 backplane bus:
The current consumption of the signal and TIM modules from the backplane bus amounts
to a total of 270 mA. It does not therefore exceed the 1.2 A that the CPU 314 can supply
to the backplane bus.
2. Current consumption from the 24 V power supply:
The current consumption of the signal. TIM and modem modules from the 24 V load
power supply amounts to approx. 1.9 A. All additional loads must also be taken into
account. Depending on this, you can then select the PS 307 power supply. The PS 307
unit with 2 A output current would probably be not quite adequate for this example.
3. Power loss:
The power loss of the S7-300 configuration amounts to a total of 50.6 W.
The power loss of all the components used in a cabinet (including the S7-300
configuration with 50.6 W) must not exceed the maximum suppliable power of the
cabinet.
Note
When planning the dimensions of the cabinet, make sure that the temperature in the
cabinet does not exceed the permitted maximum of 60C even when the temperature
outside the cabinet is high.
100
Installation guide
3.4 Installing the TIM 3V-IE variants in an S7-300
3.4
Installing the TIM 3V-IE variants in an S7-300
Introduction
The TIM 3V-IE variants can be used in an S7-300 as communications processors (CP). In
principle, all S7-300 standard and compact CPUs can be combined with these TIMs. There
are, however, constraints that must be taken into account relating to the way in which data
exchange between the TIM and the CPU in the rack is handled (the SINAUT program). For
the TIM 3V-IE variants, there are two options:
1. TD7onTIM
This SINAUT TD7 program runs on the TIM.
All standard and compact CPUs can be used with restriction.
2. TD7onCPU
This SINAUT TD7 program runs on the CPU and is created for the CPU with blocks from
the SINAUT TD7 library.
In this case, only CPUs with a work memory adequate to accommodate the SINAUT
program can be used. The size of the program depends on the amount of data to be
transmitted. At least 20 Kbytes are required. TD7onCPU can be used for several
standard CPU types if the following software packages are used:
"SINAUT TD7 library for the CPU" as of V2.2
"TIM firmware" as of V1.2
The following CPU lists also include older CPU types that can no longer be ordered as new
devices but that nevertheless may still be in use in the field. These are shown in
parentheses.
Standard CPU modules
CPU 312
as of 6ES7 312-1AD10-0AB0
(CPU 312 IFM)
as of 6ES7 312-5AC00-0AB0
(CPU 313)
CPU 314
as of 6ES7 314-1AE02-0AB0
(CPU 314 IFM)
(CPU 315)
as of 6ES7 315-1AF01-0AB0
CPU 315-2 DP
CPU 315-2 PN/DP
as of 6ES7 315-2EG10-0AB0
CPU 315T-2 DP
as of 6ES7 315-6TG10-0AB0
CPU 315F-2 DP
as of 6ES7 315-6FF00-0AB0
CPU 315F-2 PN/DP
as of 6ES7 315-2FH10-0AB0
(CPU 316)
as of 6ES7 316-1AG00-0AB0
(CPU 316-2 DP)
CPU 317-2 DP
as of 6ES7 317-2AJ10-0AB0
CPU 317-2 PN/DP
as of 6ES7 317-2EJ10-0AB0
CPU 317T-2 DP
as of 6ES7 317-6TJ10-0AB0
CPU 317F-2 DP

101
Installation guide
CPU 317F-2 PN/DP
as of 6ES7 317-2FJ10-0AB0
(CPU 318-2 DP)
CPU 319-3 PN/DP
as of 6ES7 318-3EL00-0AB0
Compact CPU modules

CPU 312C
as of 6ES7 312-5BD00-0AB0
CPU 313C
as of 6ES7 313-5BE00-0AB0
CPU 313C-2PtP
CPU 313C-2DP
as of 6ES7 313-6CE00-0AB0
CPU 314C-2PtP
as of 6ES7 314-6BF00-0AB0
CPU 314C-2DP
as of 6ES7 314-6CF00-0AB0
Instead of an S7-300 standard or compact CPU, one of the following C7 control systems
may also be used.
C7 control systems
C7-613
as of 6ES7 613-1CA00-0AE3
(C7-623/P)
as of 6ES7 623-1DE01-0AE3
(C7-626/P)
as of 6ES7 626-1DG02-0AB3
(C7-626/P DP)
(C7-633/P)
as of 6ES7 633-1DF00-0AB3
(C7-633/DP)
(C7-634/P)
(C7-634/DP)
C7-635 Key
as of 6ES7 635-2EC00-0AB3
C7-635 Touch
as of 6ES7 635-2EB00-0AB3
C7-636 Key
C7-636 Touch
Installation in a rack
With standard and compact CPU modules, the TIM can be inserted into any of the racks 0 to
3 but only in expansion racks 1 to 3 if these racks are connected to the CPU over the IM
360/IM 361 interface modules.
With the C7 control systems, the TIM can be inserted in any of the expansion racks 1 to 3.
These are connected to the C7 device over IM 360/IM 361 interface modules (the IM 360 is
already integrated in the C7 device). With the C7-635 and C7-636 devices, this is also
possible without the IM 361 if no more than four modules including the TIM are connected
externally.
For all S7-300 racks the following applies: All slots designed for SM, FM or CP can also be
used for the TIM.
102
Installation guide
A bus module connector ships with every TIM. The TIM is connected to the module to its left
by the bus module connector.
If a SINAUT modem of the type MD2, MD3 or MD4 is used, this can be installed on a
separate S7-300 rail or on a 35 mm DIN rail (an adapter is available). To save space, it can
also be installed in a free slot of racks 0 to 3. This modem is connected over the RS-232 port
of the TIM using a standard connecting cable, type 6NH7701-xxx.
NOTICE
Since the SINAUT-Modems MD2, MD3 and MD4 do not have an S7-300 backplane bus, an
S7-300 SM, FM or CP module that communicates with the CPU over this backplane bus
must not be inserted to the right of the modem!
Note
In all of the sample configurations of the S7-300, it is assumed that a 24 V power supply is
available for the CPU, the TIMs and the other modules.
Note
Direct connection of a TIM 3V-IE variant to the PROFINET interface of an S7-300-CPU is not
possible!
S7-300 with access to a classic WAN

To implement classic WAN access for an S7-300, you can use either a TIM 3V-IE or a
TIM 3V-IE Advanced. The following figure shows such a configuration.
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
6
7,09,('13
0'[
7,09,(
6)
/,1.
5;7;
581
6723
6,1$8767
1+%$
:$1
Figure 3-1
SIMATIC S7-300 with TIM 3V-IE with 1 connection to classic WAN over an external MDx
modem
Other modems with an RS-232 interface can also be used, for example wireless devices or
the SINAUT GSM modem MD720-3.

103
Installation guide
S7-300 with access to IP-based WAN

To implement IP-based WAN access for an S7-300, you can use either a TIM 3V-IE or a
TIM 3V-IE Advanced.
6
7,09,('13
7,09,(
6)
/,1.
5;7;
581
6723
6,1$8767
1+%$
(WKHUQHW
Figure 3-2
SIMATIC S7-300 with TIM 3V-IE with 1 connection to IP-based WAN
A module is required on the Ethernet interface (RJ-45) of the TIM to link the TIM to an IPbased WAN. The following are, for example, possible:
SCALANCE X switches for twisted-pair or FO cable
SCALANCE W wireless devices for data transmission over IWLAN
Other wireless devices optimized for Ethernet
The SINAUT GPRS router MD741-1 for mobile wireless data transmission with GPRS
The SINAUT GPRS modem MD720-3 for simple Internet communication with an MSC
tunnel (see volume 2 of this manual)
DSL router
Backbone transmission systems such as OTN, PCM30
Two examples are illustrated below.
6
7,09,('13
6&$/$1&(;
7,09,(
6)
/,1.
5;7;
581
6723
6,1$8767
1+%$
(WKHUQHW
Figure 3-3
)2FDEOH
SIMATIC S7-300 with TIM 3V-IE connected to an FO cable over a SCALANCE X-200
104
Installation guide
0'
*356
6
&38
7,09,(
'13
(WKHUQHW
Figure 3-4
SIMATIC S7-300 with TIM 3V-IE, 1 GPRS access via MD741-1 router
S7-300 with two WAN attachments

To achieve two connections to a WAN for an S7-300, in other words, classic WAN access
and IP-based access, a TIM 3V-IE Advanced must be used. A TIM 3V-IE is not suitable in
this case, because only one of its two interfaces can be used. The following figure shows
such a configuration.
&DEOH
0'
7,09,(
$GYDQFHG
0'[
6
&38
(WKHUQHW
:$1
Figure 3-5
SIMATIC S7-300 with TIM 3V-IE Advanced with 2 connections to a WAN
Instead of the MDx SINAUT modem, other modems with an RS-232 interface can also be
used, for example wireless devices or the SINAUT GSM modem MD720-3.
S7-300 with maximum configuration

A maximum of one (standard) TIM 3V-IE can be inserted in an S7-300. Only one of the two
interfaces (RS-232, RJ-45) can then be used for SINAUT data transmission.
If a TIM 3V-IE Advanced is used, the maximum number that can be inserted in an S7-300
depends on the resources provided by the CPU. Two connection resources per TIM are
required on the CPU.
Apart from the connection resources, the available work memory on the CPU must also be
taken into consideration. The more TIMs installed and the more stations connected and the
more objects processed per station, the greater the memory requirements of the telecontrolspecific user program on the CPU. This program is put together with blocks from the
SINAUT TD7 software package. The SINAUT program can run entirely on the CPU
(TD7onCPU), with the TIM 3V-IE variants also on the TIM (TD7onTIM).

105
Installation guide
ST7cc / ST7sc with the TIM 3V-IE Advanced

A TIM 3V-IE Advanced can be used as a master TIM for the PC of the ST7cc or ST7sc
control center. In this case, the TIM 3V-IE Advanced requires an S7-300 CPU because it
cannot work without a CPU.
In the two cases illustrated below, the maximum number of TIMs in the rack is not limited by
the connection resources of the CPU because they are not required. You should not insert
more than 8 TIMs. Less TIMs per CPU are preferable to achieve better availability. The
greatest availability is achieved when there is only one (1) TIM in the rack connected to the
CPU over the backplane bus.
There are two ways of connecting the CPU/TIM module combination to the PC as illustrated
by the following two configurations.
Connection to ST7cc / ST7sc over MPI

The following figure shows a configuration in which the TIM is connected to the PC over the
MPI interface of its CPU. This is possible only when one of the CPU modules listed in the
section "Installation of the TIM 4 as CP in an S7-300 (Page 119)" is used in the S7-300 rack.
Only then can the TIM be addressed as a node under its own MPI address on the MPI bus.
This allows the PC and TIM to exchange data directly. No SINAUT software is necessary on
the CPU.
With this configuration, the TIM 3V-IE Advanced provides the control center with two
connections to a WAN:
over the RS-232 port to a classic WAN
Over the RJ-45 interface to an IP-based WAN
6,1$8767FF67VF
&DEOH
6
7,0b9,(
$GYDQFHG
7,09,(
0'[
6)
/,1.
5;7;
581
6723
6,1$8767
1+%$
03,EXV
Figure 3-6
(WKHUQHW
:$1
SINAUT ST7cc / ST7sc control center with a TIM 3V-IE Advanced connected over MPI,
1 classic connection to WAN and 1 IP-based connection to WAN
106
Installation guide
With this configuration. further TIM 3V-IE Advanced modules could be inserted in the S7-300
rack and all connected to the PC over the MPI port of the CPU. Each TIM provides the PC
with two further connections to the WAN. In this case, the maximum number of TIM modules
is not restricted by the connection resources of the CPU because they are not required. The
maximum number of TIM modules is restricted by the number of connection resources of the
CP in the control center PC.
Connection to ST7cc / ST7sc over Ethernet

The following figure shows a configuration in which the TIM is connected to the PC over its
Ethernet interface. As of ST7cc V2.5 or ST7sc V1.1, the TIM can exchange data directly with
ST7cc/ST7sc over its Ethernet interface.
There are no special requirements of the CPU for this configuration. No SINAUT software is
necessary on the CPU for communication between the TIM and PC.
Since the Ethernet interface is occupied by the local communication with the PC, the
TIM 3V IE only provides the control center with one connection to a WAN in this
configuration.
over the RS-232 port to a classic WAN
6,1$87'13FF'13VF
6
7,09,('13
7,09,(
6)
/,1.
5;7;
581
6723
6,1$8767
1+%$
(WKHUQHW
Figure 3-7
SINAUT ST7cc / ST7sc control center system with a TIM 3V-IE providing a
connection over Ethernet,
1 classic connection to WAN.
Even with this configuration, further TIM 3V-IE Advanced modules can be inserted in the
S7-300 rack. Each TIM can be connected to the PC over its Ethernet interface and provides
the PC with one connection to a WAN.
The other TIMs can also transfer their data to the first TIM over the backplane bus and use
the Ethernet interface of this TIM as a common access to the PC. In this case, each further
TIM provides the PC with two connections to the WAN. In this case, the maximum number of
TIM modules is not restricted by the connection resources of the CPU because they are not
required. The maximum number of TIM modules is restricted by the number of connection
resources of the CP in the control center PC.

107
Installation guide
3.5 Installing the TIM 4R-IE in an S7-300
3.5
Installing the TIM 4R-IE in an S7-300
Introduction
The TIM 4R-IE can be used in an S7-300 as a communications processor (CP). All S7-300
standard and compact CPUs can be combined with the TIM 4R-IE. There are, however,
constraints that must be taken into account relating to the way in which data exchange
between the TIM and the CPU in the rack is handled (the SINAUT program). For the
TIM 4R-IE, there are two options:
1. TD7onTIM
This SINAUT TD7 program runs on the TIM.
All standard and compact CPUs can be used with restriction.
2. TD7onCPU
This SINAUT TD7 program runs on the CPU and is created for the CPU with the blocks
from the SINAUT TD7 library.
In this case, only CPUs with a work memory adequate to accommodate the SINAUT
program can be used. The size of the program depends on the amount of data to be
transmitted. At least 20 Kbytes are required.
TD7onCPU can be used for several CPU types if the following software packages are
used:
"SINAUT TD7 library for the CPU" as of V2.2
"TIM firmware" as of V1.0
parentheses.
CPU 312
(CPU 312 IFM)
as of 6ES7 312-5AC00-0AB0
(CPU 313)
CPU 314
(CPU 314 IFM)
(CPU 315)
CPU 315-2 DP
CPU 315-2 PN/DP
as of 6ES7 315-2EG10-0AB0
CPU 315T-2 DP
as of 6ES7 315-6TG10-0AB0
CPU 315F-2 DP
CPU 315F-2 PN/DP
as of 6ES7 315-2FH10-0AB0
(CPU 316)
(CPU 316-2 DP)
CPU 317-2 DP
CPU 317-2 PN/DP
as of 6ES7 317-2EJ10-0AB0
CPU 317T-2 DP
as of 6ES7 317-6TJ10-0AB0
108
Installation guide
CPU 317F-2 DP
CPU 317F-2 PN/DP
as of 6ES7 317-2FJ10-0AB0
(CPU 318-2 DP)
CPU 319-3 PN/DP
as of 6ES7 318-3EL00-0AB0
Compact CPU modules

CPU 312C
as of 6ES7 312-5BD00-0AB0
CPU 313C
CPU 313C-2PtP
CPU 313C-2DP
CPU 314C-2PtP
CPU 314C-2DP
may also be used.
C7 control systems
C7-613
as of 6ES7 613-1CA00-0AE3
(C7-623/P)
(C7-626/P)
(C7-626/P DP)
(C7-633/P)
(C7-633/DP)
(C7-634/P)
(C7-634/DP)
C7-635 Key
C7-635 Touch
C7-636 Key
C7-636 Touch
externally.
used for the TIM.

109
Installation guide
NOTICE
Since the SINAUT-Modems MD2, MD3 and MD4 do not have an S7-300 backplane bus, an
S7-300 SM, FM or CP module that communicates with the CPU over this backplane bus
must not be inserted to the right of the modem!
Note
The maximum number of TIM modules that can be inserted in an S7-300 station depends on
the connection resources made available by the CPU.
S7-300 with one TIM 4R-IE

With an S7-300 and one TIM 4R-IE, it is possible to set up an extremely efficient node
station. The following figure shows an example in which the master station is connected over
one of the two Ethernet interfaces of the TIM. The connections to the subsidiary stations are
established over the other three interfaces: here, over two classic WANs using suitable MDx
SINAUT modems and over an IP-based WAN, in this case an FO cable connected via a
SCALANCE X switch.
In these configurations, the master station and stations can exchange data among
themselves over the TIM 4R-IE as well as with the CPU of the node station. The TIM 4R-IE
also supports direct communication between stations in the three underlying networks, in
other words both within a network and from one network to another.
WRPDVWHUVWDWLRQ
(WKHUQHW
(WKHUQHW
0'[
6
&38
0'[
)2
FDEOH
7,0
5,('13
6&$/$1&(;
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
:$1
:$1
WRWKHVWDWLRQV
Figure 3-8
WRWKHVWDWLRQV
SIMATIC S7-300 with TIM 4R-IE, 2 connections to WAN, 2 connections to Ethernet,

one Ethernet interface connected over SCALANCE X-200 by FO cable
110
Installation guide
Instead of the MDx SINAUT modem, other modems with an RS-232 or RS-485 interface can
also be used, for example wireless devices or the SINAUT GSM modem MD720-3.
The following figure shows a different node station variant in which the TIM 4R-IE has a
redundant connection both to the master station and to the subsidiary stations. A variant of
this configuration would be to have a redundant connection only to the master station and to
have single transmission paths to the stations. Which two interfaces are redundant can be
freely selected by the user.
WRPDVWHUVWDWLRQ
(WKHUQHW
:$1
0'[
6
&38
0'[
7,0
5,('13
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
(WKHUQHW
:$1
WRWKHVWDWLRQV
Figure 3-9
SIMATIC S7-300 with TIM 4R-IE,

1 connection to WAN and 1 connection to Ethernet as redundant routes to the stations
and to the master station

111
Installation guide
Standalone TIM 4R-IE as master station or node station

The following figure shows the use of the TIM 4R-IE in a standalone configuration; in other
words, without an S7-300 CPU. This configuration is found typically in a master station. It
could, however, also be used in a node station if its sole purpose is to interconnect the
various networks over the TIM and no local control or data acquisition is required.
In this configuration, you can see in detail how a station can be connected redundantly. The
example assumes that the main path is implemented as a dedicated line. The alternative
path is via the GPRS mobile wireless service and the Internet.
The redundantly connected station has an Ethernet TIM (in this case a
TIM 3V-IE Advanced). To connect to the alternative path, the Ethernet interface is connected
to the MD741-1 GPRS router. The data is transferred via GPRS and the Internet to the TIM
in the master/node station using the substitute value. There, a fixed connection to the
Internet is required, for example over a DSL router. To provide security on the path over
GPRS/Internet, a SCALANCE S security module (for example S612) is inserted between the
TIM and DSL router with which the MD741-1 can establish a VPN tunnel.
(WKHUQHW
0'[
Master station
or
Node station
0'[
7,0
5,('13
:$1
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
(WKHUQHW
'6/URXWHU
6&$/$1&(6
Internet
:$1HJ
'HGLFDWHGOLQH
931WXQQHO
GPRS
0'
7,09,(
$GYDQFHG
0'[
Station
6
&38
(WKHUQHW
Figure 3-10
TIM 4R-IE in a master station or node station, redundant connection to subsidiary

station; one path as dedicated line, the second over GPRS and Internet
112
Installation guide
Direct communication over TIM 4R-IE and other TIM modules

As described above, with a TIM 4R-IE, direct communication is possible between all stations
on all networks connected to the TIM. If there are other TIM modules on Ethernet or on the
MPI bus in addition to the TIM 4R-IE, direct communication can also be extended to the
networks of the other TIMs.
The first example shows the path of direct communication between stations connected to a
standalone TIM 4R-IE and a TIM 3V-IE. The two TIMs are interconnected over Ethernet.
(WKHUQHW
7,09,(
$GYDQFHG
6
&38
7,05,(
(WKHUQHW
&DEOH
&DEOH
0'[
0'[
:$1
:$1
0'[
:$1
&URVVFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
Figure 3-11
Direct communication over a standalone TIM 4R-IE and a TIM 3V-IE Advanced
(direct communication paths are shown as dashed lines)
The second example shows the path of direct communication between stations connected to
a standalone TIM 4 and a TIM 4R-IE. The two TIMs are interconnected over MPI. The
TIM 4R-IE is installed in an S7-300 so that it can communicate with the standalone TIM 4
over the MPI interface of the CPU. Within the S7-300, the direct communication path is via
the backplane bus.

113
Installation guide
(WKHUQHW
03,
7,0
6
&38
7,05,(
:$1
(WKHUQHW
&DEOH
0'[
:$1
0'[
:$1
&URVVFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
Figure 3-12
Direct communication over a TIM 4 (standalone), MPI and a TIM 4R-IE, installed in an
S7-300; communication within the S7-300 over the backplane bus
A further example shows the path of direct communication between stations connected to a
TIM 4R-IE and a TIM 4 or TIM 3. The two TIMs are installed in an S7-300 and
interconnected over the backplane bus. Within the S7-300, the direct communication path is
via the backplane bus. In this example, this also applies to the data exchanged with the
master station over the TIM 3/4 (see figure below).
114
Installation guide
(WKHUQHWWRFRQWUROFHQWHU
7,0
6
&38
1RGHVWDWLRQ
7,05,(
,(
0'[
:$1
&RPPXQLFDWLRQZLWKFRQWURO
FHQWHURYHUEDFNSODQHEXV
0'[
:$1
:$1
FRQWLQXHVWRVWDWLRQ
'LUHFWFRPPXQLFDWLRQRYHU
EDFNSODQHEXV
Figure 3-13
Direct communication over a TIM 4R-IE and a TIM 3 or TIM 4 in an S7-300 rack;
communication within the S7-300 over the backplane bus
In this example, the CPU of station 3 (not shown in figure) on WAN 3 communicates with the
master station and one or more stations on WAN 1 over a TIM 3 or TIM 4 and the TIM 4R-IE.
NOTICE
When selecting the CPU in the above node station configuration, the following applies:
If the stations connected to the TIM 3/4 (for example station 3) also need to exchange data
with the CPU in the node station, you will need to use one of the following CPUs. The
following types are possible:
All variants of the CPUs 312, 312C, 313C, 314 and 314C
The CPUs 315-2 DP and 315F-2 DP
For information on selecting CPU types for a TIM 4 in an S7-300 station, refer also to
section Installation of the TIM 4 as CP in an S7-300 (Page 119).
If the TIM 3/4 does not need to communicate with the CPU in the node station, you can
select any CPU.

115
Installation guide
3.6 Standalone TIM 4R-IE with an S7-400 or PC
3.6
Standalone TIM 4R-IE with an S7-400 or PC
Introduction
In standalone mode, in other words, without an S7-300-CPU, the TIM 4R-IE is ideally suited
as a SINAUT communications processor for an S7-400 or for the PC of the ST7cc or ST7sc
control center. They are then linked over one of the Ethernet ports of the TIM.
With an S7-400, an Ethernet CP should be used as the interface. The following S7-400CPUs can be linked over an Ethernet CP:
CPU 412-1
as of 6ES7 412-1XF00-0AB0
(Version 02)
CPU 412-2
as of 6ES7 412-2XG00-0AB0
(Version 01)
(CPU 413-1)
(Version 02)
(CPU 413-2)
(Version 03)
(CPU 414-1)
(Version 02)
CPU 414-2
as of 6ES7 414-2XJ00-0AB0
(version 03)
(version 01)
CPU 414-31)
(Version 01)
(CPU 416-1)
(Version 02)
CPU 416-2
as of 6ES7 416-2XK00-0AB0
(as of 6ES7 416-2XL00-0AB0)
(version 01)
(version 01)
CPU 416-3
as of 6ES7 416-3XL00-0AB0
(Version 01)
CPU 416F-2
as of 6ES7 416-2FK02-0AB0
(Version 01)
CPU 417-41)
1)
Fault-tolerant SINAUT solutions with a CPU 414-4H or CPU 417-4H are not possible!
With the SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc control center system, the TIM 4R-IE is connected to the
Ethernet card of the control center computer over its Ethernet port.
Installation
When installed separately, the TIM is normally installed on a separate S7-300 standard rail,
when necessary along with a power supply module to supply the TIM with 24 V. If the
SINAUT MD2, MD3 or MD4 modems are used, they can also be installed on the same rail.
The bus module connector supplied with every TIM is not required here since the TIM and
modem are always interconnected over the 6NH7701-xxx connecting cable.
116
Installation guide
TIM 4R-IE with SIMATIC S7-400

The TIM 4R-IE is connected to a SIMATIC S7-400 over one of the Ethernet ports of the TIM.
With the S7-400, an Ethernet CP is used as the interface.
6
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
0'[
0'[
7,05,(
:$1
Figure 3-14
:$1
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
SIMATIC S7-400 with TIM 4R-IE connected over Ethernet,

1 connection to IP-based WAN or LAN,
2 classic connections to WAN, for example over SINAUT MDx modems
Note
Fault-tolerant SINAUT solutions with a CPU 414-4H or CPU 417-4H are not possible.
The maximum number of TIMs that can be connected to S7-400 depends on the connection
resources provided by the CPU. With an S7-400, one (1) connection resource is required per
TIM. However, the available work memory of the CPU must also be taken into account; the
more TIMs installed and stations connected, and the more objects processed per station, the
greater the memory demands of the telecontrol-specific user program on the central CPU.
This program is put together with blocks from the SINAUT TD7 software package
(TD7onCPU).
Example of configurations with the SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc control center systems
With the SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc control center system, the TIM 4R-IE is connected to the
Ethernet card of the control center computer over one of its Ethernet ports.
The following figure shows a configuration for a SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc control center
system with a TIM 4R-IE module connected over Industrial Ethernet.

117
Installation guide
The control center can communicate with SINAUT subscribers over the TIM 4R-IE. Up top
three different networks can be connected: One network could be an IP-based WAN or LAN,
the two other networks might be classic SINAUT networks such as dedicated line or
telephone network.
6,1$8767FF67VF
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
0'[
0'[
7,05,(
FRQQHFWLQJ
FDEOH
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
Figure 3-15
:$1
:$1
SINAUT ST7cc / ST7sc control center system with TIM 4R-IE connected over Ethernet,
Other modems with an RS-232 or RS-485 interface can be used instead of the SINAUT MDx
modems, for example wireless devices or the SINAUT GSM modem MD720-3. The RS-485
ports of the TIM 4R-IE also allow a star-shaped dedicated line network to be connected
using several modems. You will find more information on this topic in the section "Installation
and commissioning of a SINAUT modem".
Apart from the SINAUT ST7cc / ST7sc control center system, a local controller, for example
an S7-400 can also be connected to Ethernet and exchange data with the stations in the
telecontrol network. This controller could, for example, be used to display data received from
the stations on a panel or console or for emergency input by an operator if ST7cc / ST7sc
failed.
The controller could also handle central control tasks such as starting up the system.
SINAUT ST7cc / ST7sc and the central controller are then both supplied with parallel data.
Both can receive the same data or data specifically intended for one or the other. The
transfer of commands, setpoints, parameters etc. to the stations in the telecontrol network is
possible from both ST7cc / ST7sc and from the S7-400.
The next figure shows a similar configuration. Here, a redundant SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc
control center system is connected over one of the Ethernet ports.
118
Installation guide
3.7 Installation of the TIM 4 as CP in an S7-300
6,1$8767FF67VF
6,1$8767FF67VF
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
0'[
0'[
7,05,(
FRQQHFWLQJ
FDEOH
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
Figure 3-16
3.7
:$1
:$1
Redundant SINAUT ST7cc / ST7sc control center system with TIM 4R-IE connected
over Ethernet,
Installation of the TIM 4 as CP in an S7-300
Introduction
This section explains the installation of the various TIM 4 modules in an S7-300.
A SINAUT program is required on the CPU for data exchange between the TIM and the CPU
installed in the rack. This is created for the CPU with blocks from the SINAUT TD7 library
(TD7onCPU). When selecting one the CPUs listed below that can all be used in principle
with a TIM 4, make sure that the work memory of the CPU is large enough to accommodate
the TD7onCPU program. The size of the program depends on the amount of data to be
transmitted. At least 20 Kbytes are required.
The TIM 4 can be used in an S7-300 as the communications processor (CP) along with one
of the S7-300 CPUs listed below.
parentheses.

119
Installation guide

CPU 312
CPU 314
(CPU 314 IFM)
(CPU 315)
CPU 315-2 DP
CPU 315F-2 DP
(CPU 316)
(CPU 316-2 DP)
NOTICE
With all CPUs of the type 317, 318 and 319 and with the CPU 315-2 PN/DP, a TIM 4
cannot be operated as a CP in the S7-300 rack. For these CPUs, you require either an
Ethernet TIM (TIM 3V-IE variant, TIM 4R-IE) or a TIM 4 connected to the CPU as a
standalone TIM over its MPI interface.
Compact CPU modules

CPU 312C
CPU 313C
CPU 313C-2PtP
CPU 313C-2DP
CPU 314C-2PtP
CPU 314C-2DP
may also be used.
C7 control systems
(C7-623/P)
(C7-626/P)
(C7-626/P DP)
(C7-633/P)
(C7-633/DP)
(C7-634/P)
(C7-634/DP)
C7-635 Key
C7-635 Touch
C7-636 Key
C7-636 Touch
120
Installation guide
externally.
used for the TIM.
NOTICE
Since the modem does not have an S7-300 backplane bus, an S7-300 SM, FM or CP
module that communicates with the CPU over this backplane bus must not be installed to
the right of the modem!
Note
S7-300 with one WAN attachment

For information on configuring a SIMATIC S7-300 with 1 connection to a classic WAN, see
Installing the TIM 3V-IE variants in an S7-300 (Page 101).

If an S7-300 require two connections to classic WAN networks, a TIM 4 can be installed.
Two WANs can be connected over the two RS-232/RS-485 interfaces of the TIM 4, for
example over SINAUT MD2 / MD3 modems for dedicated line and telephone network. The
following figure shows such a configuration.
The following figure shows a configuration in which the modem is installed at the extreme
right in rack 0.

121
Installation guide
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
7,0
6
,QWHUIDFHDGDSWHUFDEOH
1+$6
Figure 3-17
0'[
:$1
0'[
:$1
SIMATIC S7-300 with TIM 4,

Two connections to WAN via external MDx modems
The achieve greater clarity, the TIM 4 and MDx (1) modem are installed directly beside each
other in rack 0.
The TIM is connected to the module on the left using a bus module connector.
There is no bus module connector between the TIM and MDx (1) modem. The MDx (1)
modem is connected to the RS-232/RS-485 interface X1 of the TIM 4R via a suitable
6NH7 701-xxx connecting cable.
In this example, the MDx (2) modem is installed on a DIN rail and is connected to the RS232/RS-485 interface X3 of the TIM via the interface adapter cable 6NH7 700-0AS05 and a
suitable 6NH7 701-xxx connecting cable. The interface adapter cable 6NH7 700-0AS05
ships with the TIM 4R / TIM 4RD.

The maximum number of TIMs that can installed in an S7-300 depends on the connection
resources provided by the CPU. Two connection resources per TIM are required on the
CPU.
Apart from the connection resources, the available work memory on the CPU must also be
taken into consideration. The more TIMs installed and the more stations connected and the
more objects processed per station, the greater the memory requirements of the telecontrolspecific user program on the CPU. This program is put together with blocks from the
SINAUT TD7 software package (TD7onCPU).
122
Installation guide
3.8 Standalone TIM 4 with an S7-400 or PC
3.8
Standalone TIM 4 with an S7-400 or PC
Introduction
In standalone mode, in other words, without an S7-300-CPU, the TIM 4R / TIM 4RD is
ideally suited as a SINAUT communications processor for a SIMATIC S7-400 or for the PC
of the ST7cc or ST7sc control center. They are then linked over the MPI port of the TIM 4.
Installation
When used as a standalone, the TIM 4 is normally installed on a separate S7-300 standard
rail, when necessary along with a power supply module to supply the TIM with 24 V. If the
SINAUT MD2, MD3 or MD4 modems are used, they can also be installed on the same rail.
The bus module connector supplied with every TIM is not required here since the TIM and
modem are always interconnected over the 6NH7701-xxx connecting cable.
TIM 4 with SIMATIC S7-400

All the S7-400 CPUs listed below are suitable for connecting the TIM 4 over MPI. The list
also includes older CPU types that can no longer be ordered as new devices but that
nevertheless may still be in use in the field. These are shown in parentheses.
CPU 412-1
as of 6ES7 412-1XF00-0AB0
(Version 02)
CPU 412-2
(Version 01)
(CPU 413-1)
(Version 02)
(CPU 413-2)
(Version 03)
(CPU 414-1)
(Version 02)
CPU 414-2
(version 03)
(version 01)
CPU 414-31)
(Version 01)
(CPU 416-1)
(Version 02)
CPU 416-2
as of 6ES7 416-2XK00-0AB0
(as of 6ES7 416-2XL00-0AB0)
(version 01)
(version 01)
CPU 416-3
(Version 01)
CPU 416F-2
as of 6ES7 416-2FK02-0AB0
(Version 01)
417-41)
CPU
1)
Fault-tolerant SINAUT solutions with a CPU 414-4H or CPU 417-4H are not possible!
Note
A TIM 4 can be connected not only to a S7-400-CPU over its MPI port, but in principle with
every S7-300 CPU, in other words, also with the CPU types 317, 318 and 319 and with the
CPU 315-2 PN/DP with which a TIM 4 cannot be installed as a CP in the S7-300 rack.

123
Installation guide
S7-400 with one WAN attachment

The following figure shows the simplest configuration for an S7-400 with one connection to a
WAN over a TIM 4.
6
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
0'[
7,0
03,EXV
:$1
Figure 3-18
SIMATIC S7-400 with TIM 4 on MPI bus, 1 connection a WAN
A suitable modem or other transmission device can be connected to the combined RS232/RS-485 interface of the TIM 4.
124
Installation guide

The TIM 4 and two MD2, MD3 or MD4 SINAUT modems are mounted on a separate S7-300
rail. The TIM 4 is connected to the CPU over its MPI interface. The following figure shows
the configuration described.
6
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
0'[
0'[
7,0
03,EXV
:$1
Figure 3-19
:$1
1+$6
SIMATIC S7-400 with TIM 4 on the MPI bus,

Two connections to WAN via external MDx (1) and MDx (2) modems
Suitable modems or other transmission devices can be connected to the combined RS232/RS-485 interfaces of the TIM 4. Instead of the MDx SINAUT modem, other modems with
an RS-232 or RS-485 interface can also be used, for example wireless devices or the
SINAUT GSM modem MD720-3.

125
Installation guide
S7-300 and S7-400 with common WAN attachment

Since a TIM 4 can communicate not only with one CPU but with several over MPI, a SINAUT
station can also be configured as shown in the following figure. Here, it does not matter
whether these CPUs are of the type S7-400 or S7-300.
6
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
0'[
7,0
6
03,EXV
:$1
Figure 3-20
SIMATIC S7-400 and S7-300 with TIM 4 on MPI bus,

1 connection to WAN via MDx modem
In this configuration, the TIM 4 provides access to the WAN for both the S7-400 and the S7300. This could, for example, be a large station in which the automation tasks are distributed
to several PLCs.

The maximum number of TIMs that can be connected to an S7-400 over MPI depends on
the connection resources provided by the CPU. With an S7-400, one (1) connection
resource is required per TIM. However, the available work memory of the CPU must also be
taken into account; the more TIMs installed and stations connected, and the more objects
processed per station, the greater the memory demands of the telecontrol-specific user
program on the central CPU. This program is put together with blocks from the SINAUT TD7
software package (TD7onCPU).
126
Installation guide
Example of configurations with the SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc control center systems
The SINAUT ST7cc control center system based on WinCC or the SCADA Connect
Software SINAUT ST7sc is connected to the SINAUT telecontrol network just as with an S7400 over one or more TIM 4 modules. These TIMs are connected to the MPI adapter of the
SINAUT ST7cc / ST7sc system over their MPI interface. The inclusion of a telecontrol
master, for example an S7-400 is not necessary. Data exchange with the stations is handled
by the master TIM 4 modules.
The following figure shows the simplest configuration for a SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc control
center system with one (1) connection to a WAN.
6,1$8767FF67VF
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
0'[
7,0
03,EXV
:$1
Figure 3-21
SINAUT ST7cc / ST7sc control center systems with TIM 4 on MPI bus,
1 connection to WAN via MDx modem
In much the same way as with an S7-400, ST7cc / ST7sc can also have two connections to
a WAN. The following figure shows the configuration.

127
Installation guide
6,1$8767FF67VF
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
0'[
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
0'[
7,0
03,EXV
:$1
Figure 3-22
:$1
1+$6
SINAUT ST7cc / ST7sc control center systems with TIM 4 on MPI bus,
2 connections to WAN via MDx (1) and MDx (2) modems
Other modems with an RS-232 or RS-485 interface can be used instead of the SINAUT MDx
modems, for example wireless devices or the SINAUT GSM modem MD720-3. The RS-485
port of the TIM 4 also allows a star-shaped dedicated line network to be connected using
several MD2 or MD3 SINAUT modems. You will find more information on this topic in the
section "Installation and commissioning of a SINAUT modem".
Apart from the SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc control center system, a local controller, for example
an S7-400 can also be connected to MPI and exchange data with the stations in the
telecontrol network. This controller could, for example, be used to display data received from
the stations on a panel or console or for emergency input by an operator if ST7cc / ST7sc
failed. The controller could also handle central control tasks such as starting up the system.
SINAUT ST7cc / ST7sc and the central controller are then both supplied with parallel data.
Both can receive the same data or data specifically intended for one or the other. The
transfer of commands, setpoints, parameters etc. to the stations in the telecontrol network is
possible from both ST7cc / ST7sc and from the S7-400.
The following figure shows such a configuration with two WAN attachments.
128
Installation guide
6
6,1$8767FF67VF
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
0'[
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
0'[
7,0
03,EXV
:$1
Figure 3-23
:$1
1+$6
SINAUT ST7cc / ST7sc control center systems and SIMATIC S7-400 with TIM 4 on MPI bus,
2 connections to WAN via MDx (1) and MDx (2) modems
Note
The S7-400 is not required as a primary telecontrol master for ST7cc / ST7sc! Both devices
are supplied directly with data by the TIM 4 independent of each other.
The maximum number of TIM 4 modules that can be connected to a SINAUT ST7cc / ST7sc
control center system depends on the MPI interface card used in ST7cc / ST7sc.

129
Installation guide
130
Installing and putting a TIM into operation
NOTICE
Keep to the installation guide of the SIMATIC S7-300
Modules must be installed according to the installation guidelines of SIMATIC S7-300. You
will find information on installation and wiring up in the Operating Instructions "SIMATIC S7300, CPU 31xC and CPU 31x: Installation": You will find the operating instructions on the
Internet, see also the references in the Appendix.

131

4.1 Design of the TIM 3V-IE variants
4.1
Design of the TIM 3V-IE variants

This section explains the design of the TIM 3V-IE variants.
4.1.1
Front view of the TIM 3V-IE variants with closed front panel
7,09,(
)URQWSDQHOZLWKODEHO
7,09,(
RU
7,09,($GYDQFHG

6)
/,1.
5;7;
581
'LVSOD\HOHPHQWV/('V
6723
6,1$8767
2UGHUQXPEHURIWKH7,0
7,09,(1+%$
7,09,($GYDQFHG1+&$
'LVSOD\RIWKHFXUUHQWKDUGZDUH
YHUVLRQ
1+%$
Figure 4-1
Front view of a TIM 3V-IE variant with closed front panel
132

4.1.2
Front view of the TIM 3V-IE variants with front panel removed
SLQFRQQHFWRU
56SRUWIRUFRQQHFWLQJDQH[WHUQDO
PRGHPRURWKHUWUDQVPLVVLRQHTXLSPHQW
6)
/,1.
5;7;
581
6723
.%XV
7['
)XUWKHUGLVSOD\HOHPHQWV/('V
5['
5(6(7EXWWRQ
UHIHUWRQRWHXQGHUILJXUH
5HVHW
9
5-MDFN
(WKHUQHW&RQQHFWLRQ
&RQQHFWRUIRU9'&SRZHUVXSSO\
Figure 4-2
Front view of a TIM 3V-IE variant with front panel removed
For information on the RESET button, refer to "Default startup" in the section "Startup
activities of the TIM 3V-IE variants".
4.1.3
LEDs of the TIM 3V-IE variants

The following table summarizes the meaning of the nine LEDs during normal operation. The
display during startup is explained in the section "Startup activities of the TIM 3V-IE variants
(Page 177)".

133

Table 4- 1
Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the TIM 3V-IE variants
LED no.
Labeling
Relevant TIM port
Description
SF
All
Group error
Indicates missing or bad parameter settings and RAM errors.
None
LINK
Ethernet
Connection to Ethernet
LED is lit when there is a physical connection to Ethernet.
LED is off when there is no physical connection to Ethernet.
RX/TX
Ethernet
Data flow over Ethernet

The display changes with each packet received or sent over
Ethernet.
RUN
Module in RUN
LED is lit when the module completes startup without error or is
switched to RUN mode by the PG.
LED is off when the module is switched to STOP mode by the PG
STOP
Module in STOP
LED is lit when the module is switched to STOP mode by the PG.
LED is off when the module is switched to RUN mode by the PG
Table 4- 2
Meaning of the LEDs behind the front panel of the TIM 3V-IE variants
LED no.
Labeling
Relevant TIM port
Type of WAN
driver
Description
KBus
MPI / K bus
Data flow over MPI / backplane bus

The display state changes with each message
received or sent over MPI / backplane bus.
TxD
RxD
RS-232 interface
RS-232 interface
Dedicated line
Transmit data
LED is lit constantly and is off while a message is
being sent (TXD).
Dial-up network
Transmit data
No connection established:
LED is off.
Connection is established:
being sent (TXD).
Dedicated line
Receive data
As long as receive level (DCD) is detected, the
LED is lit and goes off while a message is being
received (RXD).
Dial-up network
Receive data
Lights up with an incoming call (RI), remains lit as
long as receive level (DCD) is detected and goes
off while a message is being received (RXD).
134

4.1.4
Pinout of the ports
RS-232 interface
The connector for the RS-232 port is designed as a 9-pin D-sub miniature connector (male).
The pinout is shown in the following table. As an RS-232 port, the pinout corresponds to that
of a standardized PC connector.
Table 4- 3
Pinout of the RS-232 port connector for connecting an external modem
Illustration
Signal name
DCD
Input
RXD
Input
TXD
Output
DTR
Output
GND
Pin no.
Signal direction

RTS
Output
CTS
Input
Remark
Ethernet port
The connector of the Ethernet port is designed as an 8-pin RJ-45 Western jack. The pinout is
shown in the following table.
Table 4- 4
Pinout of the RJ-45 Western jack for the Ethernet port

Illustration
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Pin no.
Signal name
Signal direction
TXD+
Output
TXD-
Output
RXD+
Input
RXD-
Remark
Input

135

4.1.5
Standard connecting cables for the TIM 3V-IE variants

An external modem or other transmission device can be connected to the 9-pin connector of
the RS-232 port.
To connect to this connector, the following standard connecting cables are available.
Table 4- 5
Standard connecting cables for the RS-232 port of the TIM 3V-IE variants
Order no.
Description
6NH7701-4AL
Cable for connecting the TIM 3V-IE (RS-232) to one of the

SINAUT ST7 modems MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS-232).
Also suitable for linking these modems to a SIMATIC pointto-point CP such as the CP 340, CP 341 or CP 441 with
RS-232 interface.
Cable length 1.5 m
6NH7701-5AN
Illustration
7,0
Cable for connecting the TIM (RS-232) to the GSM modem

MD720-3 (RS-232). Also suitable for third-party modems or
wireless devices with RS-232 standard.
Cable length 2.5 m.
7,0
6NH7701-4BN
*60
PRGHP
Cable with one end without connector for connecting the

TIM (RS-232) to a third-party modem or wireless device
(RS-232)
Cable length 2.5 m
7,0
6NH7701-0AR
0'
7KLUG
SDUW\
PRGHP
ZLUHOHVV
GHYLFH
Test cable.
Cable for connecting two TIM 3V-IE / TIM 4 / TIM 4R-IE
modules over their RS-232 ports without modems (null
modem).
Cable length 6 m
7,0
7,0
136

The following figures show the assembly of the connecting cables.
7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH

'75
*1'
'65
576
&76
5,7

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Assembly of the standard connecting cable 6NH7701-4AL
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH

,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
3LQQR
*60PRGHP
0& 0'
56
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
'&'
5;'
7;'
'75
*1'
'65
576
&76
5,7

7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056
Figure 4-4
7;'

Figure 4-3

5;'
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

'&'
3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'0'
56

,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Assembly of the standard connecting cable 6NH7701-5AN

137

7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
5;'

7;'

'75

*1'

'65

576

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 4-5
&76

5,7

:KLWH

%URZQ

JUHHQ

<HOORZ

JUD\

3LQN

%OXH

URXJH

%ODFN
Assembly of the standard connecting cable 6NH7701-4BN
7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH

5;'
7;'
7;'
'75
'75
*1'
*1'
'65
'65
576
576
&76
&76

5;'

3LQQR 7,09,(5,(
7,056
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
Figure 4-6
RSHQ
FDEOHHQG
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
'&'

3LQQR

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Assembly of the standard connecting cable 6NH7701-0AR
138

Connecting cables for connecting to Ethernet

There is no standard connecting cable available in the SINAUT range to connect the
TIM 4R-IE to Ethernet. Use the suitable Ethernet connecting cables (for example
IE TP Cord) from the SIMATIC NET product range (catalog IK PI).
If a TIM 4R IE is connected to a hub, switch or router, it is advisable to use fully shielded
straight-through patch cables with RJ-45 connectors and 1:1 pin assignment. The cable must
be suitable for the 10Base-TX or 100Base-TX specification.
Two Ethernet TIMs (TIM 4R-IE, TIM 3V-IE variant) can also be connected over Ethernet as a
point-to-point link using a crossover patch cable with RJ-45 connectors at both ends and the
following pinout:
3LQQR
6LJQDO
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
3LQQR
6LJQDO
7;'
7;'
7;'
7;'
5;'
5;'
5;'
Figure 4-7
5;'
Pinout of a crossover Ethernet RJ-45 cable
The cable must be suitable for the 10Base-TX or 100Base-TX specification.

139

4.2 Design of the TIM 4R-IE
4.2
Design of the TIM 4R-IE
4.2.1
Front view of the TIM 4R-IE with closed front panel
%$7)
.%86
6)
7;'
5;'
;
;
7;'
5;'
581
6723
s
7,05,(
'LVSOD\HOHPHQWV/('V
%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW
RSHQFRYHUDWORZHUVOLW
5(6(7EXWWRQ
UHIHUWRQRWHXQGHUILJXUH
5(6(7
6 ,;;
1$8767
9
;;;;;;
)URQWSDQHO
L+
M
6NH7800-4BA00
DC 24V
)25/$121/<
;

;
; SODFHKROGHUIRU
KDUGZDUHYHUVLRQ
&3/8*UHDURIGHYLFH
Figure 4-8
Front view of the TIM 4R-IE with closed front panel
For information on the RESET button, refer to "Default startup" in the section Startup
activities of the TIM 4R-IE (Page 179).
140

4.2.2
Front view of the TIM 4R-IE with removed front panel

%$7)
.%86
6)
7;'
5;'
;
;
7;'
5;'
581
6723
s
7,05,(
1DPHRIWKH5656SRUWV
5(6(7
7ZR5656SRUWVPDOH
IRUFRQQHFWLQJDPRGHPRU
RWKHUWUDQVPLVVLRQHTXLSPHQW
;;
9
)LUPZDUHYHUVLRQ
;;;;;;
0$&$GGUHVV
7ZR5-MDFNVIRUFRQQHFWLQJ
WR(WKHUQHW
L+
M
DC 24V
)25/$121/<
;

;
1DPHVRIWKH(WKHUQHWSRUWV
;DQG;
7HUPLQDOVIRUWKH9'&SRZHUVXSSO\
&3/8*UHDURIGHYLFH
Figure 4-9
Front view of the TIM 4R-IE with removed front panel
On the rear of the housing, there is an opening for the optional C-PLUG. The configuration
data of the TIM 4R-IE can be stored on the C-PLUG. If service is required, a standalone TIM
can be replaced without needing a PG.

141

4.2.3
LEDs of the TIM 4R-IE

The following table summarizes the meaning of the LEDs during normal operation. The
display during startup is explained in the section "Startup activities of the TIM 4R-IE
(Page 179)".
Table 4- 6
Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the TIM 4R-IE
LED no.
Labeling
Relevant TIM port
Type of WAN
driver
Description
BATF
All
If there is a functioning battery installed, the LED is

off.
The LED lights up red if the battery is not inserted in
the battery compartment or if the battery voltage is
too low.
KBus
K bus
Data flow over the backplane bus

received or sent over the backplane bus.
TXD1
RS-232 interface 1
Dedicated line
Transmit data
being sent (TXD).
Dial-up network
Transmit data
LED is off.
being sent (TXD).
RXD1
RS-232 interface 1
Dedicated line
Receive data
As long as receive level (DCD) is detected, the LED
is lit and goes off while a message is being received
(RXD).
Dial-up network
Receive data
long as receive level (DCD) is detected and goes off
while a message is being received (RXD).
TXD2
RS-232 interface 2
Dedicated line
Transmit data
being sent (TXD).
Dial-up network
Transmit data
LED is off.
being sent (TXD).
142

LED no.
Labeling
Relevant TIM port
Type of WAN
driver
Description
RXD2
RS-232 interface 2
Dedicated line
Receive data
As long as receive level (DCD) is detected, the LED
is lit and goes off while a message is being received
(RXD).
Dial-up network
Receive data
long as receive level (DCD) is detected and goes off
while a message is being received (RXD).
Table 4- 7
Meaning of the LEDs on the right of the front panel of the TIM 4R-IE
LED no.
Labeling
Relevant TIM port
Description
SF
All
Group error
P1
Ethernet
Connection to Ethernet (interface 1)
Indicates missing or bad parameter settings and RAM errors.
LED lights up yellow if there is a physical connection to Ethernet.

Green flashing LED indicates data flow.
10
P2
Ethernet
Connection to Ethernet (interface 2)

LED lights up yellow if there is a physical connection to Ethernet.
Green flashing LED indicates data flow.
11
RUN
Module in RUN
LED is lit when the module completes startup without error or is
switched to RUN mode by the PG.
LED is off when the module is switched to STOP mode by the PG.
12
STOP
Module in STOP
LED is lit when the module is switched to STOP mode by the PG.
LED is off when the module is switched to RUN mode by the PG.

143

4.2.4
Pinout of the ports
RS-232/RS-485 interfaces
The plugs for the two serial ports are designed as a 9-pin D-sub miniature connectors
(male). The pinout of the two connectors is identical and is shown in the following table. As
an RS-232 port, the pinout corresponds to that of a standardized PC connector.
This is a combined RS-232/RS-485 port. As default, the ports are set to RS-232. The
switchover to RS-485 is set in the SINAUT configuration in NetPro and is therefore part of
the configuration data of the TIM 4R-IE.
Table 4- 8
Pinout of the connector of the combined RS-232/RS-485 port
Illustration
Signal name
Signal direction
DCD
Input
RXD
Input
Switching over to RS-485

in the configuration
TXD
Output
Switching over to RS-485

in the configuration
DTR
Output
GND
Pin no.

RTS
Output
CTS
Input
Remark
Ethernet ports
The two Ethernet ports are designed as 8-pin RJ-45 Western jacks. The pinout is shown in
the following table.
Table 4- 9

Illustration
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Pin no.
Signal name
Signal direction
TXD+
Output
TXD-
Output
RXD+
Input
RXD-
Remark
Input
144

4.2.5
Standard connecting cables for the TIM 4R-IE

A modem or other transmission device can be connected to the 9-pin connector of the RS232/RS-485 port. The following standard connecting cables are available for connection to
these connectors.
Table 4- 10
Standard connecting cables for the serial port of the TIM 4R-IE
Order no.
Description
6NH7701-4AL

RS-232 interface.
Cable length 1.5 m
6NH7701-4DL
Illustration
7,0
Cable for connecting a TIM 4R-IE / TIM 4 (RS-485) with

multiple SINAUT ST7 dedicated line modems connected in
parallel of the type MD2 or MD3 (RS-485).
Cable length 1.5 m
7,0
6NH7701-5AN
*60
PRGHP

(RS-232)
Cable length 2.5 m
7,0
6NH7701-0AR
0'

Cable length 2.5 m.
7,0
6NH7701-4BN
0'
7KLUG
SDUW\
PRGHP
ZLUHOHVV
GHYLFH
Test cable.
modem).
Cable length 6 m
7,0
7,0

145

The following figures show the assembly of the connecting cables.

7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
'&'

5;'
'75

*1'

'65

576

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 4-10
&76

5,7

7;'

+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'0'
56

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
7,07,05,( 3LQQR
56
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'56
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

'DWD%
'DWD$
$
%

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 4-11

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH

Assembly of the standard connecting cable 6NH7701-4DL
146


6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 4-12

*60PRGHP
0& 0'
56
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
'&'
5;'
7;'
'75
*1'
'65
576
&76
5,7

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 4-13
3LQQR

+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ

7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056

,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
'&'
5;'
7;'
'75
*1'
'65
576
&76
5,7
3LQQR
RSHQ
FDEOHHQG
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

:KLWH

%URZQ

JUHHQ

<HOORZ

JUD\

3LQN

%OXH

URXJH

%ODFN

147

7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
3LQQR 7,09,(5,(
7,056
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 4-14

5;'
7;'
7;'
'75
'75
*1'
*1'
'65
'65
576
576
&76
&76

5;'

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Connecting cables for connecting to Ethernet

TIM 4R-IE to Ethernet. Use the suitable Ethernet connecting cables (for example
IE TP Cord) from the SIMATIC NET product range (catalog IK PI).
If a TIM 4R IE is connected to a hub, switch or router, it is advisable to use fully shielded
straight-through patch cables with RJ-45 connectors and 1:1 pin assignment. The cable must
be suitable for the 10Base-TX or 100Base-TX specification.
Two Ethernet TIMs (TIM 4R-IE, TIM 3V-IE variant) can also be connected over Ethernet as a
point-to-point link using a crossover patch cable with RJ-45 connectors at both ends and the
following pinout:
3LQQR
6LJQDO
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
3LQQR
6LJQDO
7;'
7;'
7;'
7;'
5;'
5;'
5;'
Figure 4-15
5;'
Pinout of a crossover Ethernet RJ-45 cable
The cable must be suitable for the 10Base-TX or 100Base-TX specification.
148

4.3 Design of the TIM 3 and TIM 4 modules
4.3
Design of the TIM 3 and TIM 4 modules
Introduction
This section explains the structure of the TIM 4R / TIM 4RD.
The options for connecting up and settings are also included in the following sections.
4.3.1
Front view of the TIM 4 with closed front panels
6)
7;'
5;'
03,.
7,0%86
'&)

7,0
)URQWSDQHOODEHOHG
7,0

%HKLQGWKLVDUHWKHFRQQHFWRUVIRUDQH[WHUQDO
PRGHPDQG03,

'LVSOD\HOHPHQWV
)URQWSDQHOODEHOHG
6,1$8767
%HKLQG
WKLVLVWKHFRQQHFWRU
IRU9'&
6,1$87
67
2UGHUQXPEHURIWKH7,0WKLVFDQDOVREH
VHHQRQWKHW\SHODEHORQWKHVLGH
;

6N H 7800-4AD 90
Figure 4-16
,QGLFDWHVWKHFXUUHQWKDUGZDUHYHUVLRQ;
SODFHKROGHUIRUWKHKDUGZDUHYHUVLRQ
Front view of the TIM with closed front panels

149

4.3.2
Front view of the TIM 4 with removed front panels

;
6)
7;'
5;'
03,.
7,0%86
'&)
SLQPDOHFRQQHFWRU;

&RPELQHG5656LQWHUIDFHIRU
FRQQHFWLQJDQH[WHUQDOPRGHPRURWKHU

W\LVPDGHZLWKDQSLQ',/VZLWFK7KLVLV
DFFHVVLEOHIURPWKHWRSWKURXJKWKHKRXVLQJ
WUDQVPLVVLRQGHYLFH
7KHVHWWLQJIRU56RU56IXQFWLRQDOL
JULOOH
SLQIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU;03,SRUW
;
M
L+DC
M 24V
$FFHVVIURPEHORZWRWKHVHFRQG56

56LQWHUIDFH
;
9'&SRZHUVXSSO\
Figure 4-17
Front view of the TIM with removed front panels
For information on the RESET button, refer to "Default startup" in the section "Startup
activities of the TIM 4".
150

4.3.3
LEDs of the TIM 3 / TIM 4

The following table summarizes the meaning of the six LEDs during normal operation. The
display during startup is explained in the section "Startup activities of the TIM 3 and TIM 4
(Page 182)".
Table 4- 11
Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the TIM 4
LED no.
Labeling
Relevant TIM port
Type of WAN
driver
Description
SF
All
Group error
Indicates missing or bad parameter settings and
RAM errors.
TXD
Internal modem
interface
Not relevant
See note below
RXD
Internal modem
interface
Not relevant
See note below
MPI / K
MPI / K bus
Data flow over MPI / backplane bus

received or sent over MPI / backplane bus.
TIM-BUS
TIM-Bus
DCF77
DCF77 radio clock
(not currently used)

Status of the DCF77 clock (if installed)
As long as the time of day is clear, the LED is lit
constantly and is sampled briefly at second
intervals.
Note
If the TIM sends or receives data over its external modem interface, this is not indicated by
the TXD and RXD LEDs of the TIM. In this case, the LEDs of the external modem provide
information about the current send and receive activities of the external interface.
4.3.4
Pinout of the X1 and X2 connectors

The X1 connector is designed as a 9-pin D-sub miniature male connector. The pinout is
shown in the following table. As an RS-232 port, the pinout corresponds to that of a
standardized PC connector.
The connector can be configured either as an RS-232 or as an RS-485 port using the 8-pin
DIL switch available from above through the grill in the housing.

151

Table 4- 12
PIN assignment of the X1 connector for connecting and external modem

Pin no.
Signal name
Signal direction
DCD
Input
RXD
Input
Pin with 8-pin DIL switch

can be set to RS-485
TXD
Output
Pin with 8-pin DIL switch

can be set to RS-485
DTR
Output
GND
DSR
Input
RTS
Output
Illustration
CTS
Input
RI / T
Input
Remark
The X2 MPI connector is designed as a 9-pin D-sub miniature female connector. The pinout
is shown in the following table.
Table 4- 13
Pinout of the X2 MPI connector
Illustration
Pin no.
Signal name
Signal direction
Remark
Data B
Bidirectional
RTS-OUT
Output
M5
0 V for bus termination in

connector
P5

connector
Data A
Bidirectional
1
2
PG control signal
9
4
8
3
7
2
6
1
7
8
9
Note
The MPI connector does not supply 24 V for external devices. TS adapters and MPI adapter
cables for laptops cannot therefore be connected.
152

4.3.5
Standard connecting cables that can be connected to connector X1

An external modem or other transmission device can be connected to the 9-pin X1 connector
of the combined RS-232/RS-485 interface.
To connect to connector X1, the following standard connecting cables are available.
Table 4- 14
Connectable standard cables for all TIM 4 modules
Order no.
Description
6NH7701-4AL

RS-232 interface.
Cable length 1.5 m
6NH7701-4DL
Illustration
7,0
Cable for connecting a TIM 4R-IE / TIM 4 (RS-485) with

multiple SINAUT ST7 dedicated line modems connected in
parallel of the type MD2 or MD3 (RS-485).
Cable length 1.5 m
7,0
6NH7701-5AN
*60
PRGHP

(RS-232)
Cable length 2.5 m
7,0
6NH7701-0AR
0'

Cable length 2.5 m.
7,0
6NH7701-4BN
0'
7KLUG
SDUW\
PRGHP
ZLUHOHVV
GHYLFH
Test cable.
modem).
Cable length 6 m
7,0
7,0

153

If an MD2 or MD3 dedicated line modem is connected to the X1 connector, it is possible to

operate several of these dedicated line modems connected in parallel over this connector
(the port must then be switched to RS-485 functionality). This allows a dedicated line star
network to be connected to the X1 connector. For more detailed information, refer to the
sections with the network examples.
The following figures show how the connecting cables listed above are assembled.
7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
'&'

5;'
'75

*1'

'65

576

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 4-18
&76

5,7

7;'

+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'0'
56

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
7,07,05,( 3LQQR
56
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'56
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

'DWD%
'DWD$
$
%

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 4-19

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH

154


6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 4-20

*60PRGHP
0& 0'
56
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
'&'
5;'
7;'
'75
*1'
'65
576
&76
5,7

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 4-21
3LQQR

+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ

7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056

,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
'&'
5;'
7;'
'75
*1'
'65
576
&76
5,7
3LQQR
RSHQ
FDEOHHQG
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

:KLWH

%URZQ

JUHHQ

<HOORZ

JUD\

3LQN

%OXH

URXJH

%ODFN

155

7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
3LQQR 7,09,(5,(
7,056
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 4-22
4.3.6

5;'
7;'
7;'
'75
'75
*1'
*1'
'65
'65
576
576
&76
&76

5;'

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
View of the TIM 4 from above

SLQ',/VZLWFKIRUVHWWLQJWKHIXQFWLRQRI
WKHFRPELQHG5656LQWHUIDFH;

6HWWLQJRSWLRQV
2))
21
2))
21
6HWWLQJIRU56

6HWWLQJIRU56
ZLWKWHUPLQDWLQJ
UHVLVWRUDFWLYDWHG
SLQ',/VZLWFKIRUVHWWLQJWKHIXQFWLRQRIWKH
FRPELQHG5656LQWHUIDFH;
DFFHVVWRWKHLQWHUIDFHIURPEHORZ
6HWWLQJRSWLRQV6HH;
)URQWSDQHOODEHOHG
7,0
Figure 4-23
View of the TIM from above
156

4.3.7
View of the TIM 3 / TIM 4 from below

)URQWSDQHOODEHOHG
6,1$8767

)URQWSDQHOODEHOHG
7,0

5-MDFN;
&RPELQHG5656LQWHUIDFHIRU
FRQQHFWLQJDQH[WHUQDOPRGHPXVLQJ
DGDSWHUFDEOH1+$6WKLVVKLSV
ZLWKWKH7,057,05'
5HVHWEXWWRQ
7KLVFDQEHXVHGWRIRUFHWKH7,0WRDGHIDXOW
VWDUWXSLILWFDQQRORQJHUEHFRQWDFWHGIRU
VRPHUHDVRQ
,ID'&)UDGLRFORFNLVLQVWDOOHGLQWKH7,0
7,0['WKHUHLVDJROGFRORUHGFRQQHFWRU
KHUHIRUFRQQHFWLQJWKH'&)DGDSWHUFDEOH
1+$'WKLVVKLSVZLWKWKH7,0
Figure 4-24
View of the TIM from below
DCF77 adapter cable

An adapter cable is required to connect the integrated DCF77 radio clock to an indoor or
outdoor antenna. The cable has a BNC male connector to which the normal antenna cable
can be connected.
The adapter cable is supplied with every TIM module with an integrated DCF77 radio clock.
It can also be ordered as a spare part under the number listed in the following table.

157

Table 4- 15
Adapter cable for a TIM 4 with integrated DCF77 radio clock
Order no.
Description
6NH7700-0AD15
Adapter cable for connecting a DCF77 radio clock

integrated in a TIM, to adapt the internal connector
to the external BNC connector.
Cable length 1.5 m
Illustration
%1&
Interface adapter cable

The TIM 4R / TIM 4RD has a second serial interface X3 (combined RS-232/RS-485). The
interface (8-pin RJ-45 jack) is accessible from below.
Table 4- 16
Order no.
Description
6NH7700-0AS05
Adapter cable for connecting the 2nd serial RS232/RS-485 port integrated in a TIM 4R / 4RD to
convert the internal plug (RJ-45) to the 9-pin D-sub
miniature male connector required externally.
Cable length 0.5 m
Illustration
5-
7,05
7,05'
SLQ
6VXE
0'
158

4.4 Options for connecting up and settings for the TIM 4R or TIM 4RD
4.4
Options for connecting up and settings for the TIM 4R or TIM 4RD
Introduction
The following paragraphs explain the connection options for the TIM 4R / TIM 4RD and the
location of the DIL switches with which you can make the hardware settings for the TIM.
In all the figures, the TIM is shown without front panels.
Note
Before you install a TIM module on the S7-300 rail, it is advisable to make all the required
settings for operation on all the DIL switches of the TIM. These switches are more accessible
when the module is not installed. If there is a DCF77 radio clock on the TIM, you should also
plug in the DCF77 adapter cable before installing the TIM.

159

4.4.1
Possible attachments and settings for the TIM 4R and TIM 4RD
7ZRSLQ',/VZLWFKHVIRUVHWWLQJWKHIXQFWLRQRI
WKHWZRFRPELQHG5656SRUWV
9LHZIURP
DERYH
2))
21
6HWWLQJIRU56

6HWWLQJIRU56
ZLWKDFWLYDWHG
WHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRU
1 2 34 5 6 78
1 2 34 5 6 78
2))
21
9LHZIURP
WKHIURQW
X1
SF
TXD
RXD
MPI/K
TIM-BUS
DCF77
;SLQPDOHFRQQHFWRU
VWFRPELQHG5656SRUWIRU
FRQQHFWLQJDQH[WHUQDOPRGHP56RU
56IXQFWLRQDOLW\LVVHWRQDQSLQ',/
VZLWFK6HH9LHZIURPDERYH
3RZHUVXSSO\FRQQHFWRUIRU9'&
;SLQIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU
03,FRQQHFWRU
X3
M
L+ DC
M 24V
X2
9LHZIURP
EHORZ
;5-MDFN
QGFRPELQHG5656SRUWIRU
FRQQHFWLQJDQH[WHUQDOPRGHP
&RQQHFWRUIRUDGDSWHUFRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
VXSSOLHGZLWKWKH7,0
1+$6
2QO\ZLWK7,05'
&RQQHFWRUIRUWKH'&)DGDSWHUFDEOH
1+$'VXSSOLHGZLWKWKH7,0
5'
Figure 4-25
Possible attachment and settings for the TIM 4R or TIM 4RD
160

Pinout of the X3 RJ-45 Western jack for the RS-232/RS-485 port

The X3 connector of the combined RS-232/RS-485 port is designed as an 8-pin RJ-45
Western jack. The pinout is shown in the following table.
Table 4- 17
Pinout of the X3 RJ-45 Western jack for the RS-232/RS-485 port
Illustration
Pin no.
Signal name
DCD
Input
RXD
Input
Pin with 8-pin DIL switch can be

set to RS-485.
TXD
Output
Pin with 8-pin DIL switch can be

set to RS-485.
DTR
Output
GND
DSR
Input
RTS
Output
CTS
Input
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Signal direction
Remark
Interface adapter cable

The TIM 4R / TIM 4RD has a second serial interface X3 (combined RS-232/RS-485).
Table 4- 18
Order no.
Description
6NH7700-0AS05
Adapter cable for connecting the 2nd serial RS-232/RS485 port integrated in a TIM 4R / 4RD to convert the
internal plug (RJ-45) to the 9-pin D-sub miniature male
connector required externally.
Cable length 0.5 m
Illustration
5-
7,05
7,05'
SLQ
6VXE
0'

161

The following table shows the pinout of the two connectors for the standard connecting cable
mentioned above.
Pinout of the RJ-45 module connector and the 9-pin D-sub connector
Pin no.
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
Illustration

Pin no.
Illustration
Signal name
RJ-45 Western plug
Table 4- 19
162

4.5 Installing a TIM
Connecting the TIM 4R to two external modems

The following figure summarizes how the TIM 4R or the TIM 4RD is connected to two
external modems using the specified standard connecting cable.
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH1+$/
0'
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH1+$/
0'
7,05
56
56
56
1+$6
Figure 4-26
Connecting the TIM 4R to two external modems
4.5
Installing a TIM
4.5.1
Introduction
Introduction
All TIM types can be installed as a CP in an S7-300 device. With the exception of the
TIM 3V-IE, every TIM variant can be operated with several other TIMs in an S7-300 rack.

163

The TIM 4 or TIM 4R-IE can also be mounted as a standalone device on an S7-300 rail and
then communicates with S7-400 or S7-300 CPU modules and/or a PC control center over its
MPI interface (TIM 4) or over Ethernet (TIM 4R-IE).
Note
Before you install a TIM module on the S7-300 rail, it is advisable to make all the required
settings for operation on all the DIL switches of the TIM. These switches are more accessible
when the module is not installed. If there is a DCF77 radio clock on the TIM, you should also
plug in the DCF77 adapter cable before installing the TIM.
The TIM can be operated both in a horizontal and in a vertical installation.
The following sections describe how to mount the devices as a CP or standalone device.
4.5.2
Important notes on using the device
Safety notices on the use of the device

The following safety notices must be adhered to when setting up and operating the device
and during all work relating to it such as installation, connecting up, replacing devices or
opening the device.
General notices
WARNING
Safety extra low voltage
The equipment is designed for operation with Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) by a
Limited Power Source (LPS).
This means that only SELV / LPS complying with IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1 / VDE 0805-1
must be connected to the power supply terminals. The power supply unit for the equipment
power supply must comply with NEC Class 2, as described by the National Electrical Code
(r) (ANSI / NFPA 70).
There is an additional requirement if devices are operated with a redundant power supply:
If the equipment is connected to a redundant power supply (two separate power supplies),
both must meet these requirements.
WARNING
Opening the device
DO NOT OPEN WHEN ENERGIZED.
164

The following notices relate to the following modules:
TIM 3V-IE
TIM 3V-IE Advanced
TIM 4R-IE
Please note the following notices when using these modules in a hazardous location.
General notices on use in hazardous areas

WARNING
Risk of explosion when connecting or disconnecting the device
EXPLOSION HAZARD
DO NOT CONNECT OR DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABLE OR
COMBUSTIBLE ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT.
WARNING
Replacing components
EXPLOSION HAZARD
SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION
2 OR ZONE 2.
General notices on use in hazardous areas according to ATEX

WARNING
Requirements for the cabinet/enclosure
When used in hazardous environments corresponding to Class I, Division 2 or Class I,
Zone 2, the device must be installed in a cabinet or a suitable enclosure.
To comply with EU Directive 94/9 (ATEX95), this enclosure must meet the requirements of
at least IP54 in compliance with EN 60529.
WARNING
Suitable cables for temperatures in excess of 70 C
If the cable or conduit entry point exceeds 70 C or the branching point of conductors
exceeds 80 C, special precautions must be taken. If the equipment is operated in an air
ambient between 50 C and 70C, only use cables with admitted maximum operating
temperature of at least 80 C.

165

WARNING
Protection against transient voltage surges
Provisions shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient
voltage surges of more than 40%. This criterion is fulfilled, if supplies are derived from
SELV (Safety Extra-Low Voltage) only.
4.5.3
Installing a TIM module as CP

Note
If you intend to install a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 modem to the right of the TIM,
remember that the modem does not have an S7-300 backplane bus. There must therefore
be no S7-300 module that communicates with the CPU over the backplane bus (SM, FM or
CP) installed to the right of the modem.
To connect the TIM and MD2, MD3 or MD4 modem, no bus module connector is required
(nor does this ship with the modem). The connection between TIM and modem is only over
the connecting cable of the type 6NH7701 on the front.
Order of installation
Install a TIM as a CP in an S7-300 rack by following the steps in the order shown below:
1. Turn off the power supply to the CPU.
2. A bus module connector ships with the TIM. Insert this in the backplane connector of the
module to the left of the TIM.
3. If you want to install further modules to the right of the TIM, insert the bus module
connector of the next module into the right backplane connector of the TIM.
4. Place the TIM on the standard rail and push it in towards the bottom.
5. Screw the TIM securely into position.
6. Connect the TIM to the same power supply as the CPU.
7. If you are connecting the TIM to an external modem, the insert the 9-pin D-sub connector
of the modem connecting cable into the X1 (or X2) connector of the TIM and screw it
tight.
Note
The standard connecting cable 6NH7701-4AL for connecting the modem to a TIM module
(RS-232) is connected to the MD2, MD3 or MD4 modem "head first" so that the cable
comes away towards the top.
With a TIM 4, the standard connecting cable is also connected from above. With the
TIM 3V-IE variants and the TIM 4R-IE, the cable is connected from below.
166

8. If you are using a TIM 4R / 4RD and require the supplied interface adapter cable
6NH7 700-0AS00, insert this in the second X3 interface located on the underside of the
device and connect it via a modem connecting cable to the required modem.
9. If a DCF77 radio clock is installed in a TIM 4, the BNC plug of the antenna cable must be
screwed to the BNC socket of the DCF77 adapter cable.
10.To install further TIMs in a rack, follow the same steps as described above.
Note
With a TIM 3V-IE, only one TIM module may be installed per S7-300. This means that
TIM modules of other types cannot be added either.
11.Once all the TIMs are installed, the power supply can be turned on. The TIM starts up.
The LEDs indicate the current start-up activities (see separate section Start-up activities).
12.Once it has started up, the TIM can be supplied with its parameters (SDBs) using the
SINAUT Diagnostics and Service tool. With the TIM 3V-IE variants and the TIM 4R-IE,
the SDBs can also be loaded on the memory card of the S7-300 CPU, with the
TIM 4R-IE, you can also use the optional C-PLUG of this module for storage. The TIM
receives then its configuration data from the CPU during startup or takes it from the
inserted C-PLUG.
4.5.4
Installing a TIM 4 / TIM 4R-IE as a standalone device
To install the TIM 4 or TIM 4R-IE as a standalone device on an S7-300 rail, follow the steps
below in the order shown:
1. Place the TIM on the standard rail and push it in towards the bottom.
2. Screw the TIM securely into position.
3. Connect the TIM to the power supply. Since this is a separate TIM rack, this does not
need to be the power supply of the CPU with which the TIM is connected over MPI or
Ethernet.
4. Insert the adapter cable supplied with the TIM 4R / TIM 4RD in the RJ-45 jack (underside)
to connect the second RS-232/RS-485 X3 interface.
5. If you are connecting the TIM to an external modem, the insert the 9-pin D-sub connector
of the modem connecting cable into the X1 connector of the TIM 4 or into the X1 or X2
connector of the TIM 4R-IE and screw it tight.
6. If a DCF77 radio clock is installed in the TIM, the BNC plug of the antenna cable must be
screwed to the BNC socket of the DCF77 adapter cable.

167

7. To install further TIMs in a rack, follow the same steps as described above. Observe the
following note.
Note
The bus module connector supplied with every TIM is not required. The TIMs are
interconnected over the MPI bus (TIM 4) or over Ethernet (TIM 4R-IE).
8. When all the TIMs have been installed, interconnect the TIMs and connect them to the
S7-CPU(s) or the PC of the control center. Connect a TIM 4R-IE over Ethernet and a
TIM 4 over a normal MPI connection. Remember that the terminating resistor in the MPI
connector of the MPI nodes at the beginning and end of the MPI bus must be activated.
9. Once the wiring is completed, the power supply can be turned on. The TIMs start up. The
LEDs on each TIM indicate the current start-up activities (see separate section Start-up
activities).
10.Once it has started up, the TIM can be supplied with its parameters (SDBs) using the
SINAUT Diagnostics and Service tool.
With the TIM 3V-IE variants and the TIM 4R-IE, the SDBs can also be loaded on the memory
card of the S7-300 CPU, with the TIM 4R-IE, you can also use the optional C-PLUG of this
module for storage. The TIM receives then its configuration data from the CPU during startup
or takes it from the inserted C-PLUG.
4.5.5

You can operate the SINAUT ST7 components both in horizontally and in vertically installed
racks.
168


The SINAUT ST7 components can be operated in the same temperature range specified for
the S7-300.
Table 4- 20
Permitted ambient temperatures for the SINAUT TIM modules

Permitted ambient temperature (operation)

0 to 60 C
TIM
Horizontally installed rack
TIM
0 to 40 C
Vertically installed rack
Dimensions for installing the SINAUT TIM modules

Table 4- 21
4.5.6
Dimensions for installing the SINAUT TIM modules
Module
Module width
Module height
Max. depth
TIM 3V-IE and
TIM 3V-IE Advanced
40 mm
125 mm

open front panel
TIM 4 and TIM 4R-IE
80 mm
125 mm

open front panel
Connecting the TIM to the power supply

WARNING
Connecting the TIM module to a live power supply can damage the module. Connect the
module to the power supply only when the power supply is off.

169

WARNING
The power for the device (24 V DC) must be generated as a safe extra low voltage. This
means it must be a SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV (Protective Extra Low
Voltage) according to DIN VDE 0100 Part 410 (IEC 60364-4-41).
Cables
To wire the power supply, use flexible cables with a cable cross-section of 0.25 ...0.75 mm2.
If you wire only one cable per connection, no wire-end ferrule is necessary.
Wiring
To wire up the power supply module with a TIM, follow the steps below:
1. Open the front panels of the power supply unit and the TIM.
2. Connect the power supply cables from the power supply unit to the TIM: M and L+
3. Close the front panels.
Note
To avoid ground loops, do not connect the shielding of the TIM.
Wiring diagram
The figure below shows the wiring diagram for one or more TIMs of the type TIM 4. Instead
of a TIM, a SINAUT ST7 modem of the type MD2, MD3 or MD4 can also be installed. The
same wiring diagram applies to these modules.
3RZHUVXSSO\XQLW
VW7,0
QG7,0
M
L+ DC
M 24V
L+
M
M
L+ DC
M 24V
QWK7,0
M
L+ DC
M 24V
9'&
9
Figure 4-27
Power supply connection for TIM 4
The next figure shows how to connect up the TIM 3V-IE variants and the TIM 4R-IE.
170

3RZHUVXSSO\XQLW
7,0
7,0
L+ DC
M 24V
L+
M
QWK7,0
L+ DC
M 24V
L+ DC
M 24V
9'&
9
Figure 4-28
Connecting TIM 3V-IE variants and the TIM 4R-IE to the power supply
Note
If one or more TIMs are installed as a CP in an S7-300 device, the CPU and TIMs must be
connected to the same power supply. This ensures that the CPU and TIMs start up at the
same time when the power supply is turned on.

171

4.6 Configuring a TIM and setting parameters
4.6
Configuring a TIM and setting parameters
Introduction
The chapter Configuration software for SINAUT ST7 contains a detailed description of
configuring and setting the parameters for a TIM. The next sections provide you with a brief
summary of this topic and explain which data generated during commissioning needs to be
transferred to the TIM to make it operational.
Configuration
Just as with all other S7 modules, the TIM is configured and its parameters assigned in the
HW Config STEP 7 program. The various TIM modules are available in the hardware catalog
of HW Config in the SIMATIC 300 / SINAUT ST7 folder.
6,1$8767
KDUGZDUHFDWDORJLQ
IROGHU6,0$7,&
Figure 4-29
The catalog window Hardware Catalog with the SINAUT ST7 folder open
You can select the TIM you want to install in a rack from this catalog. The following figure
shows an S7-300 station with a TIM and various other modules installed.
172

Assigning parameters to the TIM
If you double-click on the TIM module, you open the parameter assignment dialog for the
TIM. You can then specify the required properties in a series of tabs.
Figure 4-30
S7-300 station with installed TIM and TIM parameter assignment dialog

173

Setting parameters for networks and network nodes
The next step is to connect the various stations in a WAN. This part of the configuration is
done with the NetPro STEP 7 program.
If you are using an IP-based WAN such as DSL or GPRS, take a normal Industrial Ethernet
from the NetPro catalog. The classic SINAUT WANs "dedicated line" and "dial-up network"
can also be taken from the NetPro catalog. These SINAUT networks have been added to the
"Subnets" folder.
Figure 4-31
Networked system with parameter assignment dialogs for network and network nodes opened
The properties of the two classic WANs are specified in a parameter assignment dialog for
dedicated lines and for dial-up networks. The relevant dialog can be opened simply by
double-clicking on the corresponding network. To set the parameters for the various network
nodes, you also double-click on the connecting line between the network and the node to
open the relevant parameter assignment dialog.
174

Setting parameters for SINAUT connections
Once the system is networked and the properties for the networks or network nodes have
been specified, you can start the SINAUT ST7 configuration tool to complete parameter
assignment. This tool is used, on the one hand, to automatically identify which connections
are possible from the PC of the control center to the CPU and from CPU to CPU and to
make them available for selection. On the other hand, all CPUs, PC(s) of the control center
and all TIMs are also assigned a SINAUT subscriber number that is unique throughout the
system.
Figure 4-32
SINAUT ST7 configuration tool for connection configuration and subscriber administration
Select the required connections from the right-hand pane of the connection configuration by
transferring them to the left-hand pane.
After saving the selected connections, you then open Subscriber administration. In the
simplest case, no changes need to be made here. The open Subscriber administration can
then be saved immediately. The configuration tool then generates the system data blocks
(SDBs) resulting from the configuration for all TIMs, the SDBs for the CPUs and some
additional data blocks required by the SINAUT TD7 (TD7onCPU) software package.
If the project also includes ST1 devices, it may be necessary to synchronize the addresses
for SINAUT ST1. This can be carried out in a further tool SINAUT ST1 - Configuration
Overview.

175

Transferring the SDBs to a TIM
The SDBs and DBs are saved automatically in the program directory of the CPU or the TIM
by the configuration tool. From there, transfer them to the CPU and TIM. The following figure
shows the SDB folder that was saved in the program directory of the TIM. This must be
transferred to the TIM 42 in TIM rack 2 of the control center. This completes the parameter
assignment for the TIM that you can now put into operation.
6\VWHPGDWDEORFNVWKDW
KDYHWREHWUDQVIHUUHG
RQWRWKH7,0DWV\VWHP
VWDUWXS
Figure 4-33
System data blocks (SDBs) in the program directory of the TIM
The SDBs are transferred to a TIM as follows:

Over the MPI interface of the TIM 4 if this is installed as a stand-alone device.
With a TIM 3 without MPI interface and with a TIM 4 installed as a CP in an S7-300, use
the MPI interface of the CPU via which the TIM is accessible on the S7-300 backplane
bus and can be reached to load the SDBs.
With the TIM 3V-IE, TIM 3V-IE Advanced and TIM 4R-IE via the MPI interface of the CPU
or via the Ethernet interface.
The SDBs may only be transferred after the TIM has completed its startup. The TIM's LEDs
indicate when startup is completed. For more detailed information, refer to the section
Startup activities of the TIM.
Note
With the TIM 3V-IE variants and the TIM 4R-IE, the SDBs can be stored on the TIM or the
S7-300 CPU. This is specified in the parameter assignment of the module. If you decide to
store the SDBs on the TIM, the SDBs must be transferred to the module as described above.
If the SDBs are stored on the CPU, it is not necessary to transfer the SDBs separately. The
TIM receives the SDBs from the CPU during the common startup of the modules in the S7300 rack.
176

4.7 Startup activities of the TIM module
4.7
Startup activities of the TIM module
4.7.1
Startup of the TIM 3V-IE variants
Introduction
During startup, the LEDs on the front panel of the TIM 3V-IE variants have a different
significance than during normal operation. They are optical indicators of the various startup
phases and provide detailed information about any errors detected during startup. The only
exceptions are the LINK and RX/TX LEDs that have no significance during the startup of the
TIM 3V-IE variants.
LED displays during startup

The following table summarizes the startup phases.
Table 4- 22
LED activity on the TIM 3V-IE variants during the various startup phases
Phase
Activity
SF
RUN
STOP
KBus
TxD
RxD
Power ON
followed by hardware initialization
On
On
On
On
On
On
Loading the operating system from flash

memory
Off
On
On
On
On
On
Starting VxWorks operating system
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Loading and starting TIM firmware
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Initializing flash file system and starting

the start manager
Off
Flashes
On
Off
Off
Off
Loading and starting P bus driver
Off
Flashes
On
On
Off
Off
Loading and starting subscriber

management (SubA)
Off
Flashes
On
Off
On
Off
Loading and starting LAN-COM
Off
Flashes
On
On
On
Off

management (MesA)
Off
Flashes
On
Off
Off
On
10
Loading and starting time-of-day driver
Off
Flashes
On
On
Off
On
11
Loading and starting the TD7 software of

the TIM (TD7onTIM) on the TIM
Off
Flashes
On
Off
On
On
12
Loading and starting WAN driver
Off
Flashes
On
On
On
On
13a
Startup completed without error
Off
On
Off
X 1)
X 1)
X 1)
13b
Startup completed with error
On
Off
On
X 2)
X 2)
X 2)
13c
Startup aborted - user parameter

assignment missing Module expects user
parameter assignment
Off
Off
On
Flashes
Flashes
On
13d
Startup aborted No firmware loaded.
Off
Off
On
On
Flashes
Flashes

177

Phase
Activity
SF
RUN
STOP
KBus
TxD
RxD
13e
Startup aborted - No SDBs and no

firmware loaded.
Off
Off
On
Flashes
Flashes
Flashes
13f
Default startup completed
Off
Flashes
Flashes
On
On
On
1) The LEDs KBus, TxD and RxD now operate in normal mode
2) The LEDs KBus, TxD and RxD remain in the phase in which the error occurred
Group error LED

If a problem occurs during startup, the red group error LED (SF) lights up and a diagnostic
interrupt is sent to the CPU. A message to this effect is also entered in the diagnostic buffer
of the TIM. In the chapter on the SINAUT Diagnostics and Service tool, you will find a table
with a summary of all the errors that can cause the group error LED to light up, as well as a
detailed description of each error message.
Note
After transferring the SDBs to the TIM, the group error LED flashes for approximately 10
seconds. This indicates that the TIM has registered the transfer and will automatically start a
reset after a further 10 seconds and the parameter assignment from the newly transferred
SDBs will be adopted. The TIM then behaves the same as following power "ON".
Default startup
If the situation arises that the TIM 3V-IE / TIM 3V-IE Advanced can no longer be addressed
over the MPI interface of the CPU or its own Ethernet interface following startup due to a bad
parameter assignment, the TIM can be returned to a defined state using the default startup.
Following the default startup, the TIM can have new parameters set both over the MPI
interface of the CPU and over its own Ethernet interface.
To force a default startup, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Turn off the power for the TIM.
2. Press the reset button accessible from the front, turn on the power while holding down
the reset button.
3. During hardware initialization (LED phase 1), the SF LED is turned off briefly and then
turned on again. Release the reset button at the moment when the RUN LED stops
flashing and the SF LED is turned on again.
4. Wait until the startup of the TIM is completed and the default startup is signaled by the
LEDs.
178

5. The TIM can then be supplied with its parameters over the MPI interface of the CPU or its
own Ethernet interface.
Note
With the CPU types CPU 312, CPU 312-C, CPU 313-C, CPU 314, CPU 314-C,
CPU 315-2 DP and CPU 315F-2 DP, the TIM is assigned MPI address 3 following a
default startup. If another subscriber on the MPI bus already has MPI address 3, a
conflict will arise. You will then have to disconnect one of the two modules temporarily
from the MPI bus to be able to transfer the parameters (including the correct MPI
address) to the TIM.
6. Restart the TIM on completion of the parameter assignment.
4.7.2
Startup activities of the TIM 4R-IE
Introduction
During startup, the LEDs on the front panel of the TIM 4R-IE have a different significance
than during normal operation. They are optical indicators of the various startup phases and
provide detailed information about any errors detected during startup. During startup on the
TIM 4R-IE, the "BATF", "P1" and "P2" LEDs have no significance.

Table 4- 23
LED activity on the TIM 4R-IE during the various startup phases
Phase
Activity
SF
RUN
STOP
KBUS
TXD1
RXD1
TXD2
RXD2
Power ON, followed by hardware

initialization
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Loading the operating system from

flash memory
Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Starting VxWorks operating

system
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
Loading and starting TIM firmware
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
On
Initializing flash file system and

starting the start manager
Off
Flashe
s
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Loading and starting P bus driver
Off
Flashe
s
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off

management (SubA)
Off
Flashe
s
On
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Loading and starting LAN-COM
Off
Flashe
s
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off

management (MesA)
Off
Flashe
s
On
Off
Off
On
Off
Off

179

Phase
Activity
SF
RUN
STOP
KBUS
TXD1
RXD1
TXD2
RXD2
10
Loading and starting time-of-day

driver
Off
Flashe
s
On
On
Off
On
Off
Off
11
Loading and starting the TD7

software of the TIM (TD7onTIM)
on the TIM
Off
Flashe
s
On
Off
On
On
Off
Off
12
Loading and starting WAN driver
Off
Flashe
s
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
You will find the LED lighting scheme following a completed or aborted startup in the
following table.
Table 4- 24
LED activity on the TIM 4R-IE after a completed or aborted startup
Phase
Status
SF
RUN
STOP
KBUS
TXD1
RXD1
TXD2
RXD2
13
Startup completed or aborted
13a
Startup completed without error
Off
On
Off
X 1)
X 1)
X 1)
X 1)
X 1)
13b
Startup completed with error
On
Off
On
X 2)
X 2)
X 2)
X 2)
X 2)
13c
Startup aborted - user parameter

assignment missing Module
expects parameter SDBs
Off
Off
On
On
Flashes
On
Flashes
On
13d
Startup aborted - No firmware

loaded.
Off
Off
On
Flashes
On
Flashes
On
Flashes
13e
Startup aborted - No SDBs and no

firmware loaded
Off
Off
On
Flashes Flashes Flashes Flashes Flashes
13f
Default startup completed (see

below)
Off
Flashe Flashes
s
On
On
On
On
On
13g
Automatic default startup

completed (see below)
On
Flashe Flashes
s
On
On
On
On
On
13h
Startup aborted due to incorrect

firmware (firmware does not match
module type)
On
Flashe Flashes Flashes Flashes Flashes Flashes Flashes

s
1)
2)
The LEDs operate in normal mode

The LEDs remain in the phase in which the error occurred.
180

Group error LED

If an error occurs during startup, the red group error LED (SF) lights up and, if the TIM is
installed as a CP in an S7-300, a diagnostic interrupt is sent to the CPU. A message to this
effect is also entered in the diagnostic buffer of the TIM. In the chapter on the SINAUT
Diagnostics and Service tool, you will find a table with a summary of all the errors that can
cause the group error LED to light up, as well as a detailed description of each error
message.
Note
Default startup
If the situation arises that the TIM 4R-IE can no longer be addressed over the MPI (over the
CPU) or Ethernet bus following startup due to a bad parameter assignment, the TIM can be
returned to a defined state using the default startup. Following the default startup, the TIM
can be assigned new parameter settings over the MPI interface.
1. Turn off the power for the TIM.
2. Press the reset button accessible from the front, turn on the power while holding down
the reset button.
3. During hardware initialization (LED phase 1), the SF LED is turned off briefly and then
turned on again. Release the reset button at the moment when the RUN LED stops
flashing and the SF LED is turned on again.
LEDs.
5. The TIM can then be supplied with its parameters over the MPI interface of the CPU or its
own Ethernet interface.
Note
If the TIM 4R-IE is installed as a CP in an S7-300 and the CPU is of the type CPU 312,
CPU 312-C, CPU 313-C, CPU 314, CPU 314-C, CPU 315-2 DP or CPU 315F-2 DP, the
TIM is assigned the MPI address 3 following a default startup. If another subscriber on
the MPI bus already has MPI address 3, a conflict will arise. You will then have to
disconnect one of the two modules temporarily from the MPI bus to be able to transfer the
parameters (including the correct MPI address) to the TIM.

181

Automatic default startup

A TIM 4R-IE configured for operation along with a CPU in the rack but that starts up in
standalone mode, runs a so-called "automatic default startup". Following the aborted startup,
the LEDs of the TIM are lit as shown in row 13g of the table (see above). Although the TIM
4R-IE can then be addressed for loading parameters, it does not perform any further
functions.
4.7.3
Startup behavior of the TIM 4
Introduction
During startup, the meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the TIM 4R / TIM 4RD is
different from the meaning during normal operation. They are optical indicators of the various
startup phases and provide detailed information about any errors detected during startup.

Table 4- 25
LED activity on the TIM 4R / TIM 4RD during the various startup phases
Phase
Activity
Explanation
Power ON
All LEDs light up at the same time.
RAM test
Starting with LED 6 (DCF77), the LEDs go off one after the other at intervals of
approximately 10 seconds. If an error is detected during the RAM test, LED 1 (SF
group error)
remains lit at the end. If everything is OK, the TIM changes to phase 3.
Service mode
After all the LEDs have gone off, all LEDs light up again for 5 seconds. During this time,
the user can force a default startup (see below) using the reset button. Otherwise, the
TIM changes to phase 4.
Software startup
All the LEDs go off again and then light up again one after the other starting with LED 2
(TXD). At this stage of startup, the individual steps of the software startup are signaled
by the LEDs. The LEDs are either lit continuously or flash. The following table lists the
exact meaning of the individual LEDs when lit continuously or flashing during this
startup phase 4.
Startup completed
The LEDs go off if phase 4 is completed free of errors and then have the significance
according to their definition in normal operation.
182

Table 4- 26
LED activity during software startup (startup phase 4)
Phase
Activity
LED 2
LED 3
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
4.1
Starting the RMOS operating system
4.2
Starting the TIM firmware
(On)
On
4.3
Start normal startup
(On)
(On)
Start default startup
(On)
(On)
Flashes
4.4
Startup of the TIM as CP in the S7-300 rack
(On)
(On)
(On/flashes)
On
Startup of the TIM on MPI (TIM 4 only)
(On)
(On)
(On/flashes)
Flashes
Normal startup with parameters
(On)
(On)
On
(On/flashes)
On
Normal startup without parameters
(On)
(On)
On
(On/flashes)
Flashes
Default startup
(On)
(On)
Flashes
(On/flashes)
Flashes
4.5
On
On
The LEDs whose activity is not shown in brackets ( ), provide the actual information on the
current startup phase.
Group error LED

If an error occurs during startup, the red group error LED (SF) lights up and, if the TIM 4 is
installed as a CP in an S7-300 rack, a diagnostic interrupt is sent to the CPU. A message to
this effect is also entered in the diagnostic buffer of the TIM 4. In the chapter on the SINAUT
Diagnostics and Service tool, you will find a table with a summary of all the errors that can
cause the group error LED to light up, as well as a detailed description of each error
message.
Note

183

Default startup
If the situation arises that the TIM 4 can no longer be addressed over the MPI bus following
startup due to a bad parameter assignment, the TIM can be returned to a defined state using
the default startup. Following the default startup, the TIM can be assigned new parameter
settings over the MPI bus.
1. Press the reset button accessible from below until all the LEDs on the TIM light up.
2. Follow the various startup phases of the TIM based on the LED display.
3. During startup phase 3 (service mode, see table), press the reset button again until all the
LEDs on the TIM light up.
LEDs.
5. The TIM can now have new parameters set over the MPI bus using default MPI
address 3.
Note
If another subscriber on the MPI bus already has MPI address 3, a conflict will arise. You
will then have to disconnect one of the two modules temporarily from the MPI bus to be
able to transfer the parameters (including the correct MPI address) to the TIM.
184
Installation and commissioning of the modems and

routers
5.1
Overview
Introduction
The following modem variants are available in the SINAUT ST7 range.
5.2
MD720-3
GSM wireless modem

for data transmission over the GSM mobile wireless network by establishing a
dial-up connection (CSD, Circuit Switched Data) or
for IP.based data transmission with the MSC protocol (GPRS)
max. 9600 bps
MD741-1
GPRS router
for data transmission using the (E)GPRS service (General Packet Radio
Service) of a mobile wireless provider,
secure connection with integrated VPN router and firewall,
max. 54 Kbps
MD2

for multipoint connection, can be tapped.
Can also be used as a repeater,
max 19,200 bps
MD3

max. 33,600 bps.
Can also be used a dedicated line modem for a point to-point connection,
max. 33,600 bps in voice band
MD4
Modem for the digital ISDN network

max. 64,000 bps
Important notes on using the device
Safety notices on the use of the device

The following safety notices must be adhered to when setting up and operating the device
and during all work relating to it such as installation, connecting up, replacing devices or
opening the device.

185
Installation and commissioning of the modems and routers

5.2 Important notes on using the device
General notices
WARNING
Safety extra low voltage
The equipment is designed for operation with Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) by a
Limited Power Source (LPS).
This means that only SELV / LPS complying with IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1 / VDE 0805-1
must be connected to the power supply terminals. The power supply unit for the equipment
power supply must comply with NEC Class 2, as described by the National Electrical Code
(r) (ANSI / NFPA 70).
There is an additional requirement if devices are operated with a redundant power supply:
If the equipment is connected to a redundant power supply (two separate power supplies),
both must meet these requirements.
WARNING
Opening the device
DO NOT OPEN WHEN ENERGIZED.
The following notices relate to the following modules:
MD720-3
MD741-1
Please note the following notices when using these modules in a hazardous location.
General notices on use in hazardous areas

WARNING
Risk of explosion when connecting or disconnecting the device
EXPLOSION HAZARD
DO NOT CONNECT OR DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABLE OR
COMBUSTIBLE ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT.
WARNING
Replacing components
EXPLOSION HAZARD
SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION
2 OR ZONE 2.
186

5.3 GSM/GPRS modem MD720-3
General notices on use in hazardous areas according to ATEX

WARNING
Requirements for the cabinet/enclosure
When used in hazardous environments corresponding to Class I, Division 2 or Class I,
Zone 2, the device must be installed in a cabinet or a suitable enclosure.
To comply with EU Directive 94/9 (ATEX95), this enclosure must meet the requirements of
at least IP54 in compliance with EN 60529.
WARNING
Suitable cables for temperatures in excess of 70 C
If the cable or conduit entry point exceeds 70 C or the branching point of conductors
exceeds 80 C, special precautions must be taken. If the equipment is operated in an air
ambient between 50 C and 70C, only use cables with admitted maximum operating
temperature of at least 80 C.
WARNING
Protection against transient voltage surges
Provisions shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient
voltage surges of more than 40%. This criterion is fulfilled, if supplies are derived from
SELV (Safety Extra-Low Voltage) only.
5.3
GSM/GPRS modem MD720-3
Introduction
This section describes the design of the MD720-3 modem, its connectors and display
elements.

187

5.3.1
Displays and connectors

The following figure shows the front view of the MD720-3 modem.
1
Connector for 24 V DC power supply
SET button for service functions
Antenna connector
Display elements
9-pin connector X1 (RS-232 female)
Order number of the modem

Front view of the MD720-3 modem
LED displays of the MD720-3

The following table summarizes the meaning and activity of the three LEDs on the front of
the modem.
Table 5- 1
Meaning of the LEDs on the front of the MD720-3
LED
Status
Description
S, Q, C together
Flash on and off in sequence (fast)
Booting
Flash slowly (in sync)
Service mode
Flash on and off in sequence (slow)
Update
Flash fast (in sync)
Error
Flashes slowly
Waiting for PIN input
Flashes fast
PIN error/ SIM error
Flashes slowly
Logging into GSM network
Flashes once at intervals
Field strength inadequate
Flashes twice at intervals
Field strength adequate
Flashes three times at intervals
Field strength good
Always ON
Field strength very good
S (Status)
Q (Quality)
C (Connect)
OFF
Waiting for PIN
Flashing
Terminal mode activated
Flashes slowly: once per second; flashes fast: 4 times per second
188

Pinout of the X1 port

The X1 port is designed as a 9-pin D-sub miniature female connector. The female connector
can be changed to male with the supplied "pin" gender changer. As an RS-232 port, the
pinout corresponds to that of a standardized PC connector.
Table 5- 2
Pinout of the X1 RS-232 connector
Illustration
Signal name
DCD
Output
RXD
Output
TXD
Input
DTR
Input
GND
DSR
RTS
Input
CTS
Output
RI / T
Output

Pin no.
Signal direction
Remark
Output

Standard connecting cable for the X1 port

The TIM module is connected to the 9-pin RS-232 X1 connector (female with pin gender
changer). The following standard connecting cable is available.
Table 5- 3
Standard connecting cable for the RJ-232 port
Order no.
Description
6NH7701-5AN
Cable for connecting
the GSM modem MD720-3 (X1 port) with a TIM 3V-IE

/ TIM 4 (RS-232) for data transmission
or
the GSM modem MD720-3 (X1 port) with a PC (serial

port / COM port) for configuration and service
Cable length 2.5 m
Illustration
7,0
*60
PRGHP

189

Antenna connector
The jack for connecting an antenna cable with an SMA connector is located at the top of the
front panel.
Impedance: Approx. 50 ohms
CAUTION
Only use antennas from the range of accessories SINAUT Telecontrol intended for the
MD720-3 modem. Other antennas may have detrimental effects on the device
characteristics and may even cause damage.
Connecting to the power supply

9
9
Figure 5-1
The screw terminals at the top are for connecting the power supply source:
24 V DC (nominal), Ityp 260 mA
The two screw terminals on the left (24 V) are connected internally (see Figure). The two
screw terminals on the right (0 V) are connected internally.
Installation on a 35 mm standard rail

The MD720-3 is intended for installation on DIN rails complying with DIN EN 50022. There is
a suitable fastener on the rear of the device.
Table 5- 4
Dimensions of the MD720-3 modem
MD720-3
Dimensions
W x H x D (mm)
22.5 x 99 x 114
Depth with connected cable (mm)
approx. 170
190

5.3.2
Connecting the MD720-3 to the TIM and antenna

The following figure shows how the GSM modem MD720-3 is connected to a TIM over RS232 and to an antenna.
$1705DQWHQQD
1+$1FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
56
SET
60$
6 4 &
56
56
7,0
;
6,1$87
0'
$$
0'
Figure 5-2
5.3.3
Connecting the MD720-3 to a TIM over RS-232 and to an antenna
Prerequisites for operation
Requirements depending on the transmission method

Transmission using CSD (Circuit Switched Data)
The following requirements must be met to use the SINAUT MD720-3 in terminal mode:
SIM card of a GSM network provider with activated CSD data service 9 600 bps and
call number for data calls
Availability of a GSM network
Transmission via GPRS using the MSC protocol
The following is required to use the SINAUT MD720-3 for data transmission by GPRS:
A subscriber contract with GSM network operator that supports GPRS
SIM card for enabling GPRS for the user by the network operator

191

5.4 GPRS/GSM router MD741-1
IP address of the partner
To allow the MD720-3 to establish a VPN connection actively, the partner must have a
fixed IP address. Many Internet Service Providers (ISPs), however, assign the IP
addresses dynamically; in other words, the IP addresses of the computers or networks
with access to the Internet change. A fixed IP address can be obtained in the following
ways:
Fixed IP address with dedicated line to the GPRS provider
The partner is connected directly to the GPRS provider over a leased dedicated line.
The network operator then normally assigns a fixed IP address.
Fixed IP address from Internet Service Provider
The partner is available over the Internet and a fixed IP address has been assigned to
it by the Internet service provider. (Can be obtained from several Internet service
providers.)
5.3.4
Further documentation
You will find further information on the MD720-3 GSM modem on the SIMATIC NET Manual
Collection (DVD ships with every product). The separate manual on the MD720-3 on this
CD, includes among other things information on the following topics:
Inserting the SIM card
Connecting up the device and starting up
Service functions
You will also find more detailed information on the GSM antenna SINAUT 794-4MR on the
SIMATIC NET Manual Collection.
5.4
GPRS/GSM router MD741-1
Introduction
This section describes the design of the MD741-1 router, its connectors and display
elements.
192

5.4.1
Displays and connectors

The following figure shows the front view of the MD741-1 router.
SET button for service functions
Antenna connector
Display elements
Ethernet connector X2 (female RJ-45)
Order number of the modem

Front view of the MD741-1 router
LED displays of the MD741-1

The following tables summarize the meaning and activity of the LEDs on the front of the
router.
Table 5- 5
Meaning of the LEDs (DC5V, STAT, LINK, VPN) on the front panel of the MD741-1
LED
Color
Status
Meaning
DC5V
Green
ON
Device turned on, power supply present
OFF
Device turned off, no power supply
LINK
Yellow
ON
Ethernet connection to local computer or LAN established
OFF
Ethernet connection to local computer or LAN not established
ON
VPN tunnel established1)
OFF
VPN tunnel not established
VPN
Yellow
1) Shortly after turning on the MD741-1, the VPN LED is lit briefly although the VPN tunnel is not active. Cause: Self-test of the components
while the device boots.

193

Table 5- 6
Meaning of the LEDs (S, Q, C) on the front panel of the MD741-1
LED
S, Q, C together
S (Status)
Q (Quality)
C (Connect)
Status
Meaning
Flash on and off in sequence (fast)
Booting
Flash on and off in sequence (slow)
Update 1)
Flash fast (in sync)
Error
Flashes slowly
Waiting for PIN input
Flashes fast
PIN error/ SIM error
OFF
No GPRS connection
ON
GPRS connection exists
Flashes slowly
Logging into GSM network
Flashes once at intervals
Field strength not adequate or unknown 2)
Flashes twice at intervals
Field strength adequate
Flashes three times at intervals
Field strength good
Always ON
Field strength very good
OFF
Waiting for PIN
OFF
No connection
ON
Connection to partner (with GPRS: Authentication and IP

assignment were successful)
Flashes slowly: once per second; flashes fast: 4 times per second
1) During an update of the communication software, the LEDs first flash slowly in sequence. Later, only the S LED remains ON.
2) Shortly after logging in, the field strength is always signaled as minimal or unknown by the Quality LED flashing once. Cause: At this point in
time, the device has only detected that there is a field strength present. The actual calculation of the field strength takes place at the next
check after 15 seconds.
Service interface X1
This service interface is required when a firmware update is necessary for the modem
section of the MD741-1.
Pinout of the X2 port

The connector of the Ethernet port is designed as an 8-pin RJ-45 jack. The pinout is shown
in the following table.
Table 5- 7

Illustration
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Pin no.
Signal name
Signal direction
TXD+
Output
TXD-
Output
RXD+
Input
RXD-
Remark
Input
194

MD741-1 to Ethernet. Use the suitable Ethernet connecting cables (for example IE TP Cord)
from the SIMATIC NET product range (catalog IK PI).
Antenna connector
The jack for connecting an antenna cable with an SMA connector is located at the top of the
front panel.
Impedance: Approx. 50 ohms
CAUTION
Only use antennas from the range of accessories SINAUT Telecontrol intended for the
MD741-1 router. Other antennas may have detrimental effects on the device
characteristics and may even cause damage.

9
9
Figure 5-3
The screw terminals at the top are for connecting the power supply source:
24 V DC (nominal), Ityp 360 mA
The two screw terminals on the left (24 V) are connected internally (see Figure). The two
screw terminals on the right (0 V) are connected internally.

The SINAUT MD741-1 is intended for installation on DIN rails complying with DIN EN 50022.
There is a suitable fastener on the rear of the device.
Table 5- 8
Dimensions of the MD741-1 router
MD741-1
Dimensions
W x H x D (mm)
45 x 99 x 114
Depth with connected antenna / Ethernet cable (mm)
approx. 170

195

5.4.2
Connecting the MD741-1 to the TIM and antenna

The following figure shows how the GPRS router MD741-1 is connected to a TIM over its
Ethernet connector (IE) and how the SMA connector is connected to an antenna.
,(SDWFKFDEOH
$QWHQQD$1705
60$
'&9
67$7
/,1.
SET
931
;
;
)25/$121/<
56
6 4 &
,(
6,1$87
0'
,(
$$
0'
7,09,('13
Figure 5-4
5.4.3
Connecting the MD741-1 to a TIM and an antenna
Prerequisites for operation

To use the MD741-1, the following requirements must be met:
A subscriber contract with GSM network operator that supports GPRS
SIM card for enabling GPRS for the user by the network operator
196

IP address of the partner

To allow the MD741-1 to establish a VPN connection actively, the partner must have a fixed
IP address. Many Internet Service Providers (ISPs), however, assign the IP addresses
dynamically; in other words, the IP addresses of the computers or networks with access to
the Internet change. A fixed IP address can be obtained in the following ways:
Fixed IP address with dedicated line to the GPRS provider
The partner is connected directly to the GPRS provider over a leased dedicated line. The
network operator then normally assigns a fixed IP address.
Fixed IP address from Internet Service Provider
The partner is available over the Internet and a fixed IP address has been assigned to it
by the Internet service provider. (Can be applied for from several Internet service
providers.)
Fixed DNS name from DynDNS service
To solve the problem of dynamic IP address assignment, DynDNS services can be used.
With such a service, the partner can be reached using a fixed domain name regardless of
its current dynamic IP address. Each time the IP address changes, the partner signals
the new IP address to the DynDNS server so that the domain name on the DNS server is
always assigned to the current IP address. Use of a DynDNS service is subject to
entering a contract with a suitable provider, for example DynDNS.org or DNS4BIZ.com.
5.4.4
Further documentation
You will find further information on the GPRS/GSM MD741-1 router on the SIMATIC NET
Manual Collection (DVD ships with every product). The separate manual on the MD741-1 on
this CD, includes among other things information on the following topics:
Commissioning
Configuration
Service functions
You will also find more detailed information on the GSM antenna SINAUT 794-4MR on the
SIMATIC NET Manual Collection.

197

5.5 MD2 dedicated line modem
5.5
MD2 dedicated line modem

This section describes the design of the MD2 modem, its connectors, display elements and
switches.
5.5.1
Displays and connectors accessible from the front

The following figure shows the view of the MD2 modem with the front panel closed.
)URQWSDQHOODEHOHG
0RGHP
7;'
5;'
'75
57621/
&765,
'&'
Modem
%HKLQGWKLVWKHUHDUH56DQG56
FRQQHFWRUVWROLQNWKHPRGHPWRWKHHQG
GHYLFH7,0RUWRRWKHU0'PRGHPV
'LVSOD\HOHPHQWV
)URQWSDQHOODEHOHG6,1$8767
%HKLQGWKLVWKHUHLVWKHFRQQHFWRUIRU9'&
DQGWKHPRGHP:$1FRQQHFWRU5-
:HVWHUQMDFN
6,1$87
67
,QGLFDWHVFXUUHQWKDUGZDUHYHUVLRQ
;

1+$$
Figure 5-5
2UGHUQXPEHURIWKHPRGHP
View of the MD2 modem with the front panel closed
198

LED displays of the MD2

The following table summarizes the meaning and activity of the six green LEDs on the front
of the modem.
Table 5- 9
Meaning and activity of the LEDs on the front of the MD2
LED no.
Labeling
TXD
Description
Transmit data
The LED flashes in rhythm with the data flow sent to the modem and to
the WAN interface by the terminal device (for example TIM) over the RS232 or RS-485 interface.
RXD
Receive data
The LED flashes in rhythm with the data flow received by the modem
over the WAN interface and transferred to the terminal device (for
example TIM) over the RS-232 or RS-485 interface.
DTR
Data terminal ready

Indicates the status of the DTR signal of the connected terminal (for
example TIM). As soon as a terminal device has started up, it sets its
DTR signal to 1 after which the "DTR" LED on the MD2 is lit continuously.
RTS
Request to send (RTS)

Indicates the status of the RTS signal of the connected terminal (for
example TIM). When a terminal device turns on the transmitter of the
modem, it sets its RTS signal to 1. As long as RTS is set to 1, the "RTS"
LED is lit on the MD2. The LED goes off as soon as the terminal device
deactivates the RTS signal.
CTS
Clear to send (CTS)

When the transmitter of the modem has been turned on by RTS, the
modem signals back to the terminal device (for example TIM) that it is
clear to send by setting its CTS signal to 1. As long as CTS is set to 1,
the "CTS" LED on the MD2 modem is lit. The LED goes off as soon as
the terminal device deactivates the RTS signal and turns off the
transmitter of the modem.
DCD/5V
Data carrier detect

The "DCD" LED lights up as soon as the internal operating voltage of the
MD2 modem is applied.
Whenever the MD2 detects an adequate receive level on its receive
channel, the "DCD" LED goes off.

199

View of the MD2 modem with the front panel closed

The following figure shows the front view of the MD2 modem with the front panel open to
show the connectors located behind it.
;
7;'
5;'
'75
57621/
&765,
'&'
;SLQPDOHFRQQHFWRU
56SRUWIRUFRQQHFWLQJWKHHQGGHYLFH
7,0RUWRFRQQHFWWRDIXUWKHU0'PRGHP
WRIRUPDUHSHDWHU
7KH56LQWHUIDFHLVDFWLYDWHGXVLQJD
SLQ',/VZLWFK7KLVLVDFFHVVLEOHIURP
EHORZWKURXJKWKHKRXVLQJJULOO
;SLQIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU
7,0RUIRUSDUDOOHOFRQQHFWLRQRIDIXUWKHU
0'PRGHP
;
M
L+DC
M 24V
$FFHVVIURPEHORZWR;:$1MDFNRIWKH

PRGHP5-:HVWHUQMDFN
;
Figure 5-6
View of the MD2 modem with the front panel open
Pinout of the RS-232 and RS-485 ports

The RS-232 interface can be activated using a 4-pin DIL switch accessible from below
through the housing grill.
200

Table 5- 10

Pin no.
Signal name
DCD
Output
RXD
Output
TXD
Input
DTR
Input
GND
DSR
RTS
Input
CTS
Output
RI / T
Output
Illustration
Signal direction
Remark
Output
The X2 RS-485 connector is designed as a 9-pin D-sub miniature female connector. The
pinout is shown in the following table.
The RS-485 interface can be activated and the terminating resistor activated using a 4-pin
DIL switch accessible from below through the housing grill.
Table 5- 11
Illustration
Pin no.
Signal name
Signal direction
Remark
Data B
Bidirectional
M5

connector*)
P5

connector*)
Data A
Bidirectional
1
2
3
4
5
9
4
8
3
7
2
6
1
7
8
9
*) It is advisable to activate the terminating resistor for the RS-485 bus in the connector and not in the modem itself.

201

Standard connecting cable for the RS-232 and RS-485 port

The TIM module, one or more MD2 modems, or another terminal with a suitable interface
can be connected to the 9-pin X1 RS-232 connector or X2 RS-485 connector.
The following standard connecting cables are available for the X1 and X2 connectors.
Table 5- 12
Standard connecting cables for the RS-232 and RS-485 port
Order no.
Description
6NH7701-4AL
Connecting cable to connect the MD2 modem (RS-232) to a

TIM 3V-IE, TIM 4 or TIM 4R-IE (RS-232) or other DTE with
a 9-pin RS-232 interface with an identical pin assignment.
Cable length 1.5 m
6NH7701-4DL
6NH7701-1CB
Illustration
7,0
0'
7,0
0'
7,0
0'

TIM 4 or TIM 4R-IE (RS-485) or other DTE with a 9-pin RS485 interface with an identical pin assignment.
Cable length 1.5 m
Cable for connecting two MD2 modems (RS-232) to form a

repeater.
Cable length 0.3 m
Note
(RS-232) is connected to the modem "head first" so that the cable comes away towards the
top.
202

7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
'&'

5;'

'75

*1'

'65

576

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 5-7
&76

5,7

7;'
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'0'
56

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
7,07,05,( 3LQQR
56
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'56
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

'DWD%
'DWD$
$
%

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 5-8

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH

203

0RGHP0'
56
3LQQR
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ

'VXEIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU
Figure 5-9
7;'
7;'
*1'
*1'
576
576
'&'
'&'
SLQ
5;'

5;'

3LQQR 0RGHP0'
56

'VXEIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU
SLQ
Assembly of the standard connecting cable 6NH7701-1CB
You will find examples of connecting the MD2 to a TIM, parallel connection of more than one
MD2 to connect a star ring network to a TIM, or the interconnection of two MD2s to form a
repeater below in the section Connecting the MD2 with TIM, LTOP and dedicated line
(Page 215).
204

5.5.2
Configuration switches accessible from above

The following figure shows the MD2 modem from above. It indicates the location of the 5-pin
and 10-pin DIL switches that are accessible from above.

SLQSLQ',/VZLWFKIRUVHWWLQJWKH
UHTXLUHGIXQFWLRQRIWKH0'GHGLFDWHG
OLQHPRGHP
)URQWSDQHOODEHOHG0RGHP
Figure 5-10
View of the MD2 modem from above

205

Settings with the DIL switches accessible from above

The following figure shows the settings possible on the 5-pin and 10-pin DIL switches. These
switches can be accessed from above through the grill in the modem housing.
&KDQQHOZLUH
ZLUHPRGH
7UDQVPLWOHYHOG%
2))
21

5HVHW7HVWUHFHLYH
6TXHOFK21
5HVHUYHG
7UDQVPLWOHYHOG%
ZLUHPRGH
&KDQQHOZLUH
%DXGUDWH

0RGH

2))
2))
21
21

2))
21
2))
21
2)) 2)) 2)) 2))

1RUPDO
2)) 2)) 21 2))
5HSHDWHU
:LWK56
2)) 2)) 21 21
SRUW
7HVWI+FRQVWDQW 21 2)) 2)) 21
7HVWVHQG56 21 2)) 21 2))
21 2)) 21 21
7HVWVHQG
7HVWUHFHLYH
21 21 2)) 2))
21 21 2)) 21
7HVWIEDXG
7HVWI/
21
21
21
2))
7HVWI+
21
21
21
21
Figure 5-11
&RQWUROVLJQDO 576
6TXHOFK2))
QRWXVHG
2))
21
&KDUDFWHUIRUPDW
$V\QFKURQRXVELWV 2)) 2)) 2))

$V\QFKURQRXVELWV 2)) 2)) 21
Possible settings with the DIL switches accessible from above
When the MD2 modem ships, all DIL switches are in the OFF position. This corresponds to
the following basic setting:
Transmit level 6 dB
4-wire mode
Channel 1 ON (fixed setting for 4-wire mode)
Baud rate 1200 bps
Normal operating mode
Message consists of 11-bit asynchronous characters
Control output switched with RTS (only relevant for wireless connection)
The following table contains more information on configuring these default settings
individually.
206

Table 5- 13
Settings on the 5-pin DIL switch
Setting on
DIL switch
Meaning
Transmit level 6 dB / -15 dB
2))
21

For more detailed information, refer to the description of the 10pin DIL switch at switch 10.
Transmit level 0 dB / -9 dB
2))
21

For more detailed information, refer to the description of the 10pin DIL switch at switch 10.
This allows the distance to be increased without regeneration.
4-wire mode
2))
21

This setting is necessary if a separate wire pair is used for the

transmit and for the receive direction. In this mode, the setting
of switch 3 is irrelevant.
2-wire mode
2))
21

This setting is necessary if a common wire pair is used for the

transmit and receive direction. In this mode, the setting of
switch 3 is relevant. This is then used to set whether only one 2wire line is actually connected (channel 1) or whether two 2-wire
lines are connected (channel 1+2), for example, in a master
station when communication to the stations is over two separate
2-wire connections (small star network).
Channel 1 (2-wire)
2))
21

In 2-wire mode, only channel 1 is used; in other words, only one

2-wire line is connected to the modem (see also switch 2).
Channel 1+2 (2-wire)

2))
21

In 2-wire mode, channels 1+2 are used; in other words, two

separate 2- wire lines are connected to the modem (see also
switch 2).
Baud rate 1200 bps (see also note)
2))
21

Baud rate 2400 bps (see also note)

2))
21


207

Setting on
DIL switch
Meaning
Baud rate 9600 bps
2))
21

Baud rate 19200 bps

2))
21

Note
The transmission speeds 1200 and 2400 bps are suitable for lines whose bandwidth is
limited to the normal voice band (300 Hz 3400 Hz). This is typically the case with lines
leased from public telephone companies. For the MD2 modem, there is an approval from the
German Telekom for connection to transmission paths with analog connection points (2-wire)
and 3.1 kHz effective bandwidth (300 Hz 3400 Hz).
Table 5- 14
Settings on the 10-pin DIL switch
Setting on DIL switch
Meaning
Normal mode
2))
21

Set this mode when the MD2 is connected to a TIM over its RS-232
port.
Repeater
2))
21

Set this mode when two MD2s are connected together to form a
repeater. The other parameters such as transmitter level, 2- or 4-wire
and the baud rate must be set at the 5-pin DIL switch.
Interface with RS-485
2))
21

Set this mode when the MD2 is connected to a TIM or other MD2
over its RS-485 port.
Test mode: Test f H constant *)

2))
21

In this test mode, the upper keying frequency is output permanently

at the transmitter output of the modem. This mode can be used for
level measurement.
208

Meaning
Test mode: Test send RS-485 *)
2))
21

In this test mode, a short message (2 bytes) in the asynchronous 11bit format is output permanently at the transmitter output of the
modem and on the RS-485 interface.
Test mode: Test send *)
2))
21

In this test mode, a short message (2 bytes) in the asynchronous 11bit format is output permanently at the transmitter output of the
modem.
Test mode: Test receive *)
2))
21

This test mode, along with the "Test send RS-485" and "Test send"
test modes, checks the function of the transmission line and the
receiver unit of the modem.
Test mode: Test f baud *)
2))
21

In this test mode, the lower and upper keying frequency is output
alternately at the clock rate of the transmission speed at the
transmitter output of the modem.
This corresponds to the binary character sequence 01010101...
Test mode: Test f L *)
2))
21

In this test mode, the lower keying frequency is output permanently

at the transmitter output of the modem.
Test mode: Test f H *)

2))
21

In this test mode, the upper keying frequency is output permanently

at the transmitter output of the modem.
*) For detailed explanations of the test modes, refer to Chapter 4 of the MD2 Modem Description 6NH7811-0AA21 that can be ordered
separately.

2))
21
2))
21
Meaning
Character format: Message consisting of a series of asynchronous
characters, each 11-bit (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, 1 stop bit).

This is the standard setting for sending SINAUT messages. In this

case, message format FT 1.2, based on 11-bit asynchronous
characters is normally used for transmitting over dedicated lines.
Character format: Message consisting of a series of asynchronous
characters, each 10-bit (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit).

This setting is required for transmitting SINAUT ST7 messages over

dedicated lines with the optional FT 2 message format. This format is
based on 10-bit asynchronous characters.

209

Meaning
Control output switched with RTS
2))
21

A floating optical relay is provided on pins 1 and 6 of the RJ-12

Western plug. This is active as long as the terminal device (TIM)
outputs the RTS signal (request to send) to the MD2 modem. This
control signal can be used to switch on a wireless device when the
MD2 modem is used in conjunction with a wireless system.
Reserved
2))
21

Squelch OFF *)
2))
21
This is a mandatory setting for the MD2 in conjunction with a TIM.

Squelch ON *)
2))
21
This setting is not permitted for the MD2 in conjunction with a TIM.

Reset "Test receive" off / normal transmit level *)

2))
21
Depending on the selected mode, this switch has two meanings:

In the "Test receive" mode, this switch setting has no function.

In all other modes, the transmit level for operation of the modem on
normal dedicated lines is set depending on switch S1 (5-pin DIL
switch) to 0 dB (S1 = ON) or 6 dB (S1 = OFF).
Reset "Test receive" on / reduced transmit level *)
2))
21
Depending on the selected mode, this switch has two meanings:

In the "Test receive" mode, the test operation can be reset.

In all other modes, the transmit level for operation of the modem on
telephone company leased lines is reduced. Depending on switch S1
(5-pin DIL switch), the transmitter level is then set to
9 dB (S1 = ON) or to 15 dB (S1 = OFF).
*) For detailed explanations of the squelch function and "Reset Test receive", refer to Chapter 4 of the MD2 Modem Description 6NH78110AA21 that can be ordered separately.
210

5.5.3
Connectors and configuration switches accessible from below

The following figure shows the MD2 modem from below with the X3 RJ-12 Western jack, the
DIL switch for activating the RS-232 or RS-485 port and the DIL switch for activating the
WAN terminating resistors.
;SLQ5-:HVWHUQMDFN
:$1FRQQHFWRUIRUWKH0'PRGHP7KH
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOHLVVXSSOLHGZLWKWKH0'
12 3 4
12 3 4
SLQ',/VZLWFKWRDFWLYDWHWKH:$1
WHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRUV
7KLVSLQ',/VZLWFKVSHFLILHVZKHWKHUWKH
56RU56LQWHUIDFHZLOOEHDFWLYDWHG
%HORZWKHVWDQGDUGVHWWLQJVIRU56RU
56
2))
21
2))
21
Figure 5-12

56LQWHUIDFHDFWLYDWHG
DVVKLSSHG

56LQWHUIDFHDFWLYDWHG
WHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRUQRW
DFWLYDWHG0XVWEHDFWLYDWHG
RQWKHODVWFRQQHFWRU
View of the MD2 modem from below

211

DIL switch for activating the RS-232 or RS-485 port

On the bottom of the modem housing, a 4-pin DIL switch is accessible with which you can
specify whether the RS-232 or the RS-485 port is active. For RS-485 operation, you can also
activate the terminating resistor. It is, however, recommended that you activate this
terminating resistor on the RS-485 connector on the last MD2.
The following figure shows the possible settings in general.
1R56
WHUPLQDWLQJ
UHVLVWRU
56
2))
21

56
WHUPLQDWLQJ
UHVLVWRU
DFWLYDWHG
56
Figure 5-13
Possible settings on the 4-pin DIL switch to activate RS-232/RS-485
DIL switch for activating WAN terminating resistors

On the bottom of the MD2 housing, a further 4-pin DIL switch is accessible. This switch
activates terminating resistors at the WAN end. The following figure summarizes the possible
settings, the table lists the default settings.
+LJKUHVLVWDQFH
FKDQQHO
+LJKUHVLVWDQFH
FKDQQHO
2))
21

RKPVFKDQQHO
RKPVFKDQQHO
RKPVFKDQQHO
RKPVFKDQQHO
Figure 5-14
Possible settings for the WAN terminating resistors
212

Table 5- 15
Default settings for the WAN terminating resistors
Attachment type
Baud rate
End point
2-wire (channel 1)
2 x 2-wire (channel 1+2)
4-wire
1200 bps
2400 bps

2))
21
9600 bps
19200 bps
Tapping point
2-wire (channel 1)
2))
21
1200 bps
2400 bps
2))
21
9600 bps
19200 bps
Tapping point
4-wire
2))
21
1200 bps
2400 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
2))
21

Remark
The MD2 is located at the beginning or end of
a 2-wire or 4-wire line and is set to a
transmission speed of 1200 or 2400 bps.
End point as above but with transmission

speed set to 9600 or 19200 bps.

The MD2 is not located at the beginning or

end of a 2-wire line; it taps into this 2-wire line
along the way with high resistance. The
transmission speed is set to 1200 or 2400
bps.
End point as above but with transmission
speed set to 9600 or 19200 bps.

The MD2 is not located at the beginning or

end of a 4-wire line; it taps into this 4-wire line
along the way with high resistance.
Pinout of the RJ-12 Western jack

The X3 connector is designed as a 6-pin RJ-12 Western jack. The pinout is shown in the
following table.
Table 5- 16
Pinout of the X3 RJ-12 Western jack for the MD2 modem
Illustration
6
5
4
3
2
1
Pin no.
Signal name
a1
b1
a2
b2
a
RTS
b
RTS
Signal direction
Remark
Input or bidirectional (channel 1)
With 2-wire: Input and output

channel 1
With 4-wire: Input
Output or bidirectional (channel 2)
With 2-wire: Input and output

channel 2
Output
Output optical relay
With 4-wire: Output
The RTS signal can be output over the floating optical relay at pins 1 and 6 of the RJ-12
connector.

213

The technical specifications of this output are as follows:
max. connected voltage = 60 V AC/DC
R ON max = 3 ohms
I max = 400 mA
A suppressor circuit does not exist for the output.
The connecting cable 6NH7700-2AR60 ships with every MD2 modem. This allows the MD2
modem to be connected to an LTOP overvoltage protection module. The actual connection
of the dedicated cable is on the LTOP overvoltage protection module using screw terminals.
The connecting cable can also be ordered as a spare under the number shown.
Table 5- 17
Standard connecting cable for the MD2 modem
Order no.
Description
6NH7700-2AR60
Connecting cable with 2 x RJ-12 Western plugs for

connection of an MD2 modem (RJ-12) to an LTOP
overvoltage protection module (RJ-12).
Cable length 6 m
Illustration
5-
5-
The pinout of the two RJ-12 plugs is identical.

Note
It is best to hold the cable just below the RJ-12 plug. This makes it easier to insert the plug
than if you hold the RJ-12 plug itself. When inserting it, make sure that you can hear the RJ12 connector click into place!
214

5.5.4
Connecting the MD2 with TIM, LTOP and dedicated line
Introduction
The following figures illustrate the various options for connecting the MD2 modem to a TIM
or other MD2 modems as well as to a dedicated line over an LTOP.
For more detailed information on connecting, wiring up and setting the LTOP, refer to the
section Line transformer with LTOP overvoltage protection.
Connecting an MD2 with a TIM over the RS-232 port

Only one (1) MD2 modem can be connected to a TIM over the RS-232 port. This allows the
following end point and tapping point configurations.
ZLUHHQGSRLQW
ZLUHHQGSRLQW
1+$/FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
7,0
56
0'
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
2YHUYROWDJHSURWHFWLRQ
/723
1+%&
ZLUHGHGLFDWHGOLQH
Figure 5-15
/723
56
1+$/FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
7,0
56
0'
56
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
/723 /723
1+%&
ZLUHGHGLFDWHGOLQH
Connecting an MD2 to a TIM over RS-232, 2-wire and 4-wire end point variants

215

[ZLUHHQGSRLQW
ZLUHWDSSLQJSRLQW
1+$/FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$/FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
7,0
56
0'
56
ZLUH
'HGLFDWHGOLQH
SDWK
Figure 5-16
56
56
0'
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
/723
1+%&
7,0
/723
ZLUH
'HGLFDWHGOLQH
SDWK
/723
1+%&
/723
ZLUH
WDSSLQJSRLQW
Connecting an MD2 to a TIM over RS-232, 2 x 2-wire end point and 2-wire tapping point
variants
216

1+$/FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
56
7,0
56
0'
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
/723
1+%&
/723
/723
ZLUH
WDSSLQJSRLQW
Figure 5-17
Connecting an MD2 to a TIM over RS-232, 4-wire tapping point variant
Note
Any TIM with an RS-232 port can be used, in other words, the TIM 3V-IE variants, the
TIM 4R-IE and all TIM 4 types.

217

Connecting several MD2s with a TIM over the RS-485 port

Several MD2 modems can be connected to a TIM over the RS-485 port. This type of
configuration is necessary when several dedicated lines come together on one TIM; in other
words when connecting a star network. The following figure shows this configuration with
standard components.
7,0
56
0'
0'
0'
56
56
$FWLYDWH
WKH
WHUPLQDWLQJ
UHVLVWRURQ
WKHODVW
FRQQHFWRU
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+'/
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
/7231+%&
RU
/7231+%&
ZLUH
'HGLFDWHGOLQH
Figure 5-18
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
/723
/723
ZLUH
'HGLFDWHGOLQH
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
/723
ZLUH
'HGLFDWHGOLQH
SDWK
ZLUH
'HGLFDWHGOLQH
SDWK
Connecting several MD2s to one TIM over RS-485, star-shaped convergence of several
dedicated lines
218

For the connection from the TIM to the first MD2, the 6NH7701-4DL standard connecting
cable is used. For the connection to the other modems, there is no preassembled connecting
cable available. These can, nevertheless, be implemented with the standard components
from the S7 range. The same parts can be used as when creating an MPI connection. As
cable, we recommend 6XV1830-0AH10, and as connector 6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0. When
necessary, the RS-485 terminating resistor can be activated in this connector.
Note
Any TIM with an RS-485 port can be used, in other words, all TIM 4 types and the
TIM 4R-IE. The TIM 3V-IE variants only have an RS-232 interface. If necessary, a
commercially available RS-232/RS-485 converter would need to be used.
Note
Do not forget to activate the terminating resistor for the RS-485 bus on the last connector
using the slider switch.
The dedicated line is connected over the LTOP 1 or LTOP 2 overvoltage protection module.
The figure shows various options for connecting a 1 x 2-wire, 1 x 4-wire or 2 x 2-wire end
point per MD2 modem. Depending on the type of end point, a setting must be made on the
modem at the 5-pin DIL switch accessible from above.

219

RS-485 operation of the MD2

If several MD2s are connected in parallel over the RS-485 port, remember the following
when making the settings for the modem and setting the parameters for the TIM:
1. The MD2 modem must be set to the "interface with RS-485" mode using the 10-pin DIL
switch.
2. The RS-485 interface must also be activated at the 4-pin DIL switch accessible from
below.
3. The RS-485 interface of the TIM connected to the MD2 modem must also be activated at
the 8-pin DIL switch accessible from above (applies to all TIM 4 types).
4. When setting the parameters for the WAN access of the TIM connected to the MD2,
remember that a RTS-CTS delay 1 ms must be configured.
6HWWLQJDQ576&76
GHOD\WLPHRIPV
Figure 5-19
Setting parameters for the WAN access in the "Dedicated Line" tab
Note
If the MD2 is operated over its RS-485 port, no communication with the otherwise
incompatible MD100 modem is possible. These are only compatible when the RS-232
port of the MD2 is used.
220

7,0
56
3LQQR ,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'56
0RGHP
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

'DWD%
$
'DWD$

%
'DWD$
$
'DWD%
%

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH

,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'56
0RGHP
'DWD%
$
%
$
%

'DWD$

+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'56
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
0RGHP
'DWD%
$
%
$
%

'DWD$

+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 5-20
Assembly of the standard connecting cable 6NH7701-4DL (parallel connection of the

MD2)

221

Connecting two MD2s to form a repeater

Two MD2 modems can be connected to form a repeater when the distances to be covered
are too great (2-wire or 4-wire repeater). The repeater amplifies the signal and regenerates
the individual characters. For more detailed information on calculating the distances that can
be covered depending on the baud rate and number of tapped stations, refer to the following
table.
5HSHDWHU
1+&%FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
PDGHXSRI
[0'
1+$/FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
RU1+'/
0'
7,0
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
/723RYHUYRO
WDJHSURWHFWLRQ
1+%&
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHG
OLQH
Figure 5-21
0'
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
/723
ZLUH
WDSSLQJSRLQW
/723
ZLUHHQG
SRLQW
56
0'
56
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
/723
ZLUHHQG
SRLQW
/723RYHUYRO
WDJHSURWHFWLRQ
1+%&
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHG
OLQH
Two MD2s as 2-wire repeater with simultaneous 2-wire tapping of a TIM (for example
TIM 3V-IE)
222

5HSHDWHU
1+&%FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
PDGHXSRI
[0'
1+$/FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
RU1+'/
7,0
7,0
7,0
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
/723RYHUYRO
WDJHSURWHFWLRQ
1+%&
/723
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHG
OLQH
Figure 5-22
0'
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
56
0'
56
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+$5
/723
6HWWLQJRQDOO/723
ZLUHHQGSRLQW
/723
/723RYHUYRO
WDJHSURWHFWLRQ
1+%&
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHG
OLQH
Two MD2s as 4-wire repeater with simultaneous 4-wire tapping of a TIM (for example
TIM 3V-IE)
In most cases, a repeater is placed at a location where there is also an ST7 station that
includes a TIM. For this reason, the schematics show not only the connection of two MD2s to
form a repeater but also how a TIM is tapped into the 2-wire or 4-wire cable at the location of
the repeater.

223

Transmission speeds and frequencies of the MD2 modem

Table 5- 18
Transmission speeds and frequencies of the MD2 modem
Transmission
speed (bps)
Center frequency
[Hz]
Frequency
deviation f (Hz)
Lower keying
frequency (Hz)
Upper keying
frequency (Hz)
1200
1700
400
1300
2100
2400
2850
450
2400
3300
9600 / 19,200
27,200
6400
20,800
33,600
Attenuation values of the MD2 modem

Table 5- 19
Attenuation values dependent on the transmission speed and wire diameter
Transmission
speed (bps)
0.9
1.2
1.4
Attenuation
per LTOP
(dB)
Attenuation per km (dB) at wire diam. (mm)

0.6
0.8
Insertion
loss per
tapping point
(dB)
Line terminated with Z = 600 ohms

1200
1.5
1.15
0.9
0.65
0.55
0.2
0.4
2400
1.85
1.4
1.1
0.75
0.6
0.2
0.2
2.6
1.8
1.5
1.0
0.2
Line terminated with Z = 150 ohms

9600 / 19,200
4.3
3.2
The values in the table above are guidelines for communication lines without loading coils of
the type 2 x 2 x A J-Y(St)Y (A = core diameter in mm).
Maximum range of the MD2 modem
Table 5- 20
Maximum range dependent on the transmission speed and wire diameter
Transmission
speed (bps)
Maximum range (km)

Transmit level 6 dB *)
With LTOP
Without LTOP
With LTOP
Without LTOP
1200
21.7 NTP x 0.6
22 NTP x 0.3
25.7 NTP x 0.6
26 NTP x 0.3
2400
17.6 NTP x 0.4
17.8 NTP x 0.2
20.8 NTP x 0.4
21 NTP x 0.2
9,600 / 19,200
7.2 NTP x 0.6
7.6 NTP x 0.1
8.6 NTP x 0.6
9 NTP x 0.1
Core diameter 0.6 mm

1200
28.3 NTP x 0.7
28.6 NTP x 0.4
33.5 NTP x 0.7
33.9 NTP x 0.4
2400
23.2 NTP x 0.5
23.5 NTP x 0.2
27.5 NTP x 0.5
27.8 NTP x 0.2
9600 / 19,200
9.6 NTP x 0.7
10.3 NTP x 0.1
11.5 NTP x 0.7
12.1 NTP x 0.1

1200
36.2 NTP x 0.9
36.6 NTP x 0.5
42.8 NTP x 0.9
43.3 NTP x 0.5
2400
29.6 NTP x 0.6
30 NTP x 0.2
35 NTP x 0.6
35.4 NTP x 0.2
224

Transmission
speed (bps)
9600 / 19,200
Maximum range (km)

With LTOP
Without LTOP
With LTOP
Without LTOP
11.9 NTP x 0.9
12.6 NTP x 0.1
14.2 NTP x 0.9
15 NTP x 0.1

1200
50.1 NTP x 1.3
50.7 NTP x 0.7
59.3 NTP x 1.3
60 NTP x 0.7
2400
43.4 NTP x 0.8
44 NTP x 0.3
51.4 NTP x 0.8
52 NTP x 0.3
9600 / 19,200
17.2 NTP x 1.3
18.3 NTP x 0.2
20.5 NTP x 1.3
21.6 NTP x 0.2

1200
59.2 NTP x 1.5
60 NTP x 0.8
70.1 NTP x 1.5
70.9 NTP x 0.8
2400
54.3 NTP x 1
55 NTP x 0.4
64.3 NTP x 1
65 NTP x 0.4
9600 / 19,200
20.6 NTP x 1.5
22 NTP x 0.2
24.6 NTP x 1.5
26 NTP x 0.2
NTP = number of tapping points

*) not permitted with postal leased lines. Transmit level must be set to 9 dB.
The values in the table are guidelines.

When calculating the maximum range, a power margin of 4 dB was included. This is to
compensate for fluctuations in cable properties that experience has shown to occur in
practise, and thus always ensure that sufficient signal level is available for problem-free data
transmission. To calculate the values shown in the table, the following formula was used:
S m ax =
AInsert
[N m in ]+ N Send N Res 2 ALTOP

ACable
NTP
AInsert + 2 ALTOP
ACable
Insertion loss per tapping point [in dB]
ACable
Attenuation per km of the cable used [in dB]
ALTOP
Attenuation per LTOP [in dB]
NTP
Number of tapping points
Nmin
Minimum receive level [in dB]

(-43 dB for MD2, please use only absolute value in formula)
NSend
Transmit level [in dB]

(normally 6 dB or 0 dB)
NRes
Power margin [in dB]
Smax
Max. range [in km]
Sample calculation:
For core diameter 0.8 mm, at 2400 bps, with LTOPs and transmit level 6 dB

225

S m ax =
[ 43]+ (6) 4 2 0,2

1,4
NTP
S m ax =
43 6 4 0,4
0,2 + 0,4
NTP
1,4
1,4
S m ax =
32 ,6
0,6
NTP
1,4
1,4
0,2 + 2 0,2
1,4
S m ax = 23,2 NTP 0,5
Using the above formula, users can create their own calculations if the data of the cable
being used is known.
For lines leased from the telephone company, the range calculation is unnecessary. Here,
the public telephone company is responsible for an adequate signal level. Recommended
cable quality for lines leased from a telephone company:
Analog connections of the type M.1020 or M.1025 in the landline network.
Determining the receive level
To determine the receive level, the test mode "Test fH constant" must be set on the MD2
modem at the beginning of the trunk line. This modem then sends the upper keying
frequency of the set baud rate constantly on the trunk line. The existing receive level can
then be measured at the end of this trunk line. If the trunk line is a line with one or more
tapping points, all the tapping points in the line must be included in the line (as well as
LTOPs).
Note
When measuring the level, make sure that the 150-ohm (at 9600 / 19,200 bps) or 600-ohm
(at 1200 / 2400 bps) terminating resistor is set at an end point or 6-kohm terminating resistor
at a tapping point. You should also make sure that the line is not grounded during the
measurement since the signal is symmetrical.
The MD2 modem can still received data down to a minimum received level of -43 dB. Which
level is actually present at the reception location can then be checked with an oscilloscope or
level measuring device. If this is not available, the level can also be measured with adequate
accuracy using a normal voltmeter. To help you in this situation, the following table
summarizes the level values and corresponding (approximate) voltage values (Ueff
alternating voltage).
Table 5- 21
Comparison of level and voltage values
Level
Voltage value (AC) Level
Voltage value (AC) Level
Voltage value (AC)
+10 dB
2.45 V
-10 dB
245 mV
43.5 mV
0 dB
775 mV
-12 dB
195 mV
-30 dB
24.5 mV
-3 dB
552 mV
-15 dB
137 mV
-35 dB
13.7 mV
-6 dB
389 mV
-18 dB
97.8 mV
-40 dB
7.8 mV
-9 dB
274 mV
-20 dB
77.7 mV
-43 dB
5.5 mV
-25 dB
226

5.6 LTOP line transformer with overvoltage protection
5.6
LTOP line transformer with overvoltage protection
Introduction
The LTOP (Line Transformer with Overvoltage Protection) limits extraneous voltages and
overvoltages to a non-critical level. The floating transformer also provides electrical isolation
preventing coupling of voltages into other cable sections.
5.6.1
Structure
The protection concept

The protection concept involves a combination of components whose functions supplement
each other:
Overvoltage suppressors filled with inert gas providing protection against high voltage
(G1, G2)
Inductors that limit the rise in current (L1, L2)
Metal oxide varistors as fine protection (voltage dependent resistance; R1)
Transformer for electrical isolation (T1)
Suppressor diode to limit the secondary voltage of the transformer (V1)
'HGLFDWHGOLQH /
*
7
5
0RGHP
9
*
/
Figure 5-23
Circuit diagram of an LTOP unit

227

6

;
230 230

;
6
;
7
7
/
/
/
/

;
Figure 5-24
Location of the circuit elements of an LTOP 2 (view from above)
Note
The protection elements in the OPM (Overvoltage Protection Module) undergo high stress
during discharge processes and progressively deteriorate. It is therefore recommended that
you replace the OPMs approximately once a year. To be on the safe side, in regions with
frequent thunderstorms this period should be reduced to approximately 6 months.
228

Structure of the LTOP variants

The housing contains either one LTOP unit (= LTOP 1) or two LTOP units (= LTOP 2). The
following figures show the design of both LTOP variants with their connectors and
configuration switches.
View from above
6
;
;
;

Schematic
0RGHPFRQQHFWRU
;
5-

6
;

/723
'HGLFDWHGOLQHFRQQHF

;
X1
Dedicated line (screw terminals 1, 2, 5, 6)

Chassis (screw terminals 3, 4)
X2
Modem attachment 2-wire over screw terminals
X2 + X3
Modem attachment 4-wire over screw terminals
X6
2-wire/4-wire modem attachment over RJ-12 Western connector; for direct connection of
the SINAUT ST7 MD2 modem over the standard connecting cable (RJ-12 RJ-12) that
ships with this modem.
S1 + S2
Configuration switches

229

View from above

;

6
6

;
;

Schematic
0RGHPFRQQHFWRU
; 5-

;

6

;
5.6.2
;
;

6

/723
'HGLFDWHGOLQHFRQQHFWRU
Connecting up the MD2 modem

The following figures show the connection of the standard cable modem MD2-3. The
connection to the LTOP1 or LTOP2 is via the standard cable that ships with the modem. This
cable has RJ-12 Western plugs at both ends.
Please make sure that the MD2-3 modem has the correct line termination setting:
For end point 1200 or 2400 bps: 600 ohms
For end point 19,200 bps: 150 ohms
For a tapping point: High resistance
Note
Please make sure that the S1 and S2 switches are set correctly in position 1 or 2 as shown
in the following figures!
230

Attachment to a 2-wire end point

2-wire end point over an LTOP 1
0'
5-
;

0'
3LQ
7UDQVPLWWHU
UHFHLYHU
;

;

5-

;
6
6
;
3LQ
7UDQVPLWWHU
UHFHLYHU
5-
;
5-

;
2-wire end point over an LTOP2
/723
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHG
OLQH

6
1
2

/723
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHG
OLQH

231

Attachment with a 4-wire end point or 2 x 2-wire end point

4-wire end point over an LTOP2
0'
;

5-

;
6
;
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHG
OLQH
5-
;
;

5-

;
6
6
;
1
2

3LQ
7UDQVPLWWHU
UHFHLYHU
0'
3LQ
5HFHLYHU
3LQ
7UDQVPLWWHU
5-
;
2 x 2-wire end point over an LTOP2
/723

6
1
2

/723
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHGOLQH
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHGOLQH
232

Attachment to a 2-wire tapping point

2-wire tapping point over an LTOP2
3LQ
6HQGHU
UHFLSLHQW
0'
5-
;
;

5-

;
6
;
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHGOLQH

6
1
2

/723
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHGOLQH

233

Attachment to a 4-wire tapping point

4-wire tapping point over two LTOP2
0'
3LQ5HFHLYHU
3LQ7UDQVPLWWHU
5-
;
;

;
5-

;
6
;
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHG
OLQH

6
1
2

;

5-

;
6
/723
;

6
1
2

/723
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHG
OLQH
234

5.7 Analog dial-up modem MD3
5.7
Analog dial-up modem MD3

switches.
5.7.1
Indicators and connectors accessible from the front

The following figure shows the front view of the MD3 modem with the front panels closed.
)URQWSDQHOODEHOHG
0RGHP
7;'
5;'
'75
57621/
&765,
'&'

Modem
GHYLFH7,0
'LVSOD\HOHPHQWV
:HVWHUQMDFN
6,1$87
67
;

1+$$
Figure 5-25
Front view of the MD3 modem with the front panels closed

235


The following table summarizes the meaning and activity of the six LEDs on the front of the
modem for dial-up operation.
Table 5- 22
Meaning of the LEDs on the front of the MD3 for dial-up operation
LED no.
Labeling
TXD
Description
Transmit data
The LED flashes in rhythm with the data flow sent to the modem by the
terminal device (TIM) over the RS-232 or RS-485 interface.
RXD
Receive data
The LED flashes in rhythm with the data flow sent by the modem to the
terminal device (TIM) over the RS-232 or RS-485 interface. The data
flow is indicated both in the data and in the command phase.
DTR
Data terminal ready

Outgoing call:
The LED lights up when the terminal device (TIM) wants to establish a
connection and goes off as soon as the terminal device wants to
terminate the established connection. If no connection can be
established or the connection is terminated by the partner or is aborted
due to a disruption, the terminal device deactivates the DTR signal as
soon as it receives a message to this effect from the modem.
Incoming call:
The LED lights up when the terminal device (TIM) wants to accept an
incoming call. The LED goes off again under the same conditions as
with an outgoing call.
RTS / ONL
Modem online (ONL) "receiver taken off the hook"

Outgoing call:
The LED lights up as soon as the modem has received the dialing
command from the terminal device (TIM) and begins connection
establishment. The LED goes off again when the connection is
terminated (by its own terminal device or by the partner) or when the
connection is aborted due to a disruption.
Incoming call:
The LED lights up when the terminal device (TIM) signals with DTR that
it wants to accept the incoming call. The LED goes off again under the
same conditions as with an outgoing call.
CTS / RI
DCD
Ring indicator (RI)

The LED lights up when there is an incoming call.
The LED has a dual function:
1. Operating status
This signals the operating status of the modem. The LED lights up after
the power is turned on if the operating voltage is correct. If the modem
is not operational, the LED remains off.
2. Connection established
During normal operation of the modem, the LED goes off as soon as
the two participating modems are synchronized during connection
establishment (reported to terminal device with CONNECT). The LED
lights up again when the connection is terminated or aborted due to a
disruption.
236

The RTS and CTS signal names are irrelevant for the MD3.
modem for dedicated line operation.
Table 5- 23
Meaning of the LEDs on the front of the MD3 for dedicated line operation
LED no.
Labeling
Description
TXD
Transmit data
RXD
Receive data
DTR
Data terminal ready

This LED indicates the signal state of the DTR line of the data terminal
equipment (TIM). Due to the default setting of the MD3, the signal state
of the DTR line in the dedicated line mode has no effect on the modem.
RTS / ONL
Modem online (ONL)

The modem attempts to establish a connection to the partner modem
after power ON; in other words, the two modems attempt to
synchronize themselves. As soon as they are synchronized, the ONL
LED remains lit but the DCD LED goes off.
If there is no synchronization within 60 seconds, the ONL LED goes off
briefly and then lights up again to indicate that the modem is attempting
to synchronize once again.
CTS / RI
DCD
The LED has a dual function:

1. Operating status
This signals the operating status of the modem. The LED lights up after
the power is turned on if the operating voltage is correct. If the modem
is not operational, the LED remains off.
2. Connection established
The LED goes off as soon as the two modems involved in connection
establishment are synchronized (see also "ONL" LED). The LED lights
up when the connection was aborted due to a disruption.
The RTS, CTS and RI signal names are irrelevant for the MD3.

237

Front view of the MD3 with removed front panels

The following figure once again shows the front view of the MD3 modem, here, however, the
front panels have been removed to show the connectors located behind them.
s 7;'
5;'
'75
57621/
&765,
'&'

X1
;SLQPDOHFRQQHFWRU
7,0
$FFHVVIURPEHORZWRWKH;:$1MDFNRIWKH
PRGHP5-:HVWHUQMDFN
;SLQIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU
0'PRGHP
7KH56LQWHUIDFHDQGWKHWHUPLQDWLQJ
UHVLVWRUDUHDFWLYDWHGXVLQJDSLQ',/
X3
VZLWFK7KLVLVDFFHVVLEOHIURPEHORZWKURXJK
WKHKRXVLQJJULOO
M
L+DC
M 24V
X2
Figure 5-26
Front view of the MD3 modem with removed front panels

238

Table 5- 24

Pin no.
Signal name
DCD
Output
RXD
Output
TXD
Input
DTR
Input
GND
DSR
RTS
Input
CTS
Output
RI / T
Output
Illustration
Signal direction
Remark
Output
Table 5- 25
Illustration
Pin no.
Signal name
Signal direction
Remark
Data B
Bidirectional
M5

connector*)
P5

connector*)
Data A
Bidirectional
1
2
3
4
5
9
4
8
3
7
2
6
1
7
8
9

The TIM module or other terminal device with a suitable interface is connected to the X1 9pin RS-232 connector or the 9-pin X2 RS-485 jack.
The following standard connecting cables are available for the X1 connector or X2 jack.

239

Table 5- 26
Order no.
Description
Illustration
6NH7701-4AL

TIM (RS-232) or other DTE with a 9-pin RS-232 interface with
an identical pin assignment.
Cable length 1.5 m
7,0
6NH7701-4DL
0'

TIM 4 or TIM 4R-IE (RS-485) or other DTE with a 9-pin RS485 interface with an identical pin assignment.
Cable length 1.5 m
0'
7,0
Note
top.
7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 5-27

5;'
7;'
'75
*1'
'65
576
&76
5,7
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

'&'
3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'0'
56

,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
240

7,07,05,( 3LQQR
56
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'56
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

'DWD%
'DWD$
$
%

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 5-28

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
You will find an example of connecting the MD3 modem to a TIM and to a telephone outlet
below in the section Connecting the MD3 to a TIM and telephone outlet.

241

5.7.2

The following figure shows the MD3 modem from above. It indicates the location of the SW1
(4-pin) and SW2 (10-pin) DIL switches that are accessible from above.
SLQ6:',/VZLWFKIRUVHWWLQJWKH
UHTXLUHGGLDOXSQHWZRUNRUGHGLFDWHG
OLQHPRGH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6:
SLQ6:',/VZLWFKIRUVHWWLQJWKH
PHWHULQJSXOVHILOWHUDQGIRUGHDFWLYD
WLQJWKHORRSSRZHUVHFWLRQIRU
GHGLFDWHGOLQHPRGH
12 3 4
6:
Figure 5-29

The MD3 modem has a 4-pin and a 10-pin DIL switch. The 10-pin DIL switch, SW2 is
located directly on the top housing grill. The 4-pin DIL switch, SW1, can also be reached
from above through the housing grill, however it is located deeper within the housing and
may therefore be more difficult recognize. To set this switch, you require a long, thin tool, for
example a small screwdriver or a toothpick.
The DIL switches have the following functions:
242

4-pin DIL switch SW1
Metering pulse filter
at 12 kHz or at 16 kHz
Activating or deactivating the loop power section
10-pin DIL switch SW2
Setting one of the 16 standard profiles
Data format 11 bits or 10 bits
Tone or pulse dialing
Modem type A (originate) or B (answer) for dedicated line operation
Reset function
Loudspeaker ON or OFF
Line adjustment with 600 ohms or Zr (frequency-dependent)

243

The following figure summarizes the possible settings.
6:
6:
ELWVGDWDSKDVH

'LDOXSQHWZRUN

WRQHGLDOLQJ

'HGLFDWHGOLQH
PRGHP$
5HVHW2))
/RXGVSHDNHU2))
RKPV

5HVHUYHG
5HVHUYHG
/RRSSRZHUVHFWLRQ
2))
N+]

2))
21

N+]

=U
/RXGVSHDNHU21
5HVHW21
'LDOXSQHWZRUN

SXOVHGLDOLQJ

'HGLFDWHGOLQH
PRGHP%
ELWVGDWDSKDVH
/RRSSRZHUVHFWLRQ
21

6WDQGDUG SURILOHIRUGLDOXSQHWZRUN

$7 PRGH
9ELVESV9
9ELVESV9ELV
9ELVESV9ELV
9ELVESV9ELV
9ELVESV9ELV
9ELVESV9ELV
$7 PRGHIUHHO\VHWDEOH
6WDQGDUGSURILOHIRUGHGLFDWHGOLQH

ESVGLUHFW
ESVGLUHFW
ESVGLUHFW
ESVGLUHFW
ESVGLUHFW
ESVEXIIHUHG
ESVEXIIHUHG
$7 PRGHIUHHO\VHWWDEOH

2))
2))
2))
2))
2))
2))
2))
2))
2))
21
2))
21
2))
21
2))
21
2))
2))
21
21
2))
2))
21
21
2))
2))
2))
2))
21
21
21
21

21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
2))
21
2))
21
2))
21
2))
21
2))
2))
21
21
2))
2))
21
21
2))
2))
2))
2))
21
21
21
21
Figure 5-30
Possible settings with the DIL switches accessible from above
Note
Reserved DIL switches must always be set to the OFF position. See also DIL switch setting
as shipped.
Setting the metering pulse filter
The metering pulse filter can be set
to 12 kHz or
to 16 kHz
244

Table 5- 27
Setting the metering pulse filter
Metering pulse filter
16 kHz
(for example for Germany or Switzerland)
6:
2))
21
6:
2))
21
12 kHz
(for example for Austria)

When operating the MD3 as a dedicated line modem, the setting for the metering pulse filter
is irrelevant.
Setting the loop power section
For dial-up operation, the loop power section must always be activated. For dedicated line
operation, the loop power section is deactivated.
Table 5- 28
Setting the loop power section
Loop power section
Turned off
(default for dedicated line operation)
6:
2))
21
6:
2))
21
Turned on
(default for dial-up operation)

Basic settings for dialing mode

Certain basic settings must be made for the dialing mode. The settings relate to the data
format, the dialing procedure, and line adjustment. You make the basic settings with the DIL
switches SW2.1, SW2.5, SW2.6 and SW2.9.
The procedure is as follows:
Turn of the power supply and set the four switches mentioned above to the required position.
When you turn on the power supply, the modem then adopts the selected basic setting.

245

Table 5- 29
Basic setting for dialing mode
Meaning
Data format 11 bits
(required, for example, for FT 1.2 format)
Data format 10 bits

(required, for example, for FT 2 format)

2))
6: 21
6:
2))
21

Tone dialing
2))
6: 21

Pulse dialing
6:
2))
21

Line adjustment 600 ohms 1)

2))
6: 21

Line adjustment Zr 1)
6:
2))
21

1) When shipped, the line adjustment is set to Zr, because the MD3 is normally connected to a digital telephone exchange. If an older analog
telephone exchange is used, change the line adjustment to 600 ohms if you encounter transmission problems.
Settings for a standard dialing profile

Apart from the default setting for the dial-up mode, switches SW2.2, SW2.3 and SW2.4 can
be used to select one of the 8 standard dialing profiles. Standard dialing profiles 0 to 6 are
default settings that enable the MD3 modem to be operated without any programming using
a terminal program if one of these profiles matches the intended application. Standard
dialing profile 7 can be freely configured by the user and therefore requires programming by
a terminal program before it can be put into operation (for details see section Userconfigurable profiles).
Turn of the power supply and set the four switches SW2.1 to SW2.4 to the required position.
When you turn on the power supply, the modem then adopts the selected standard dialing
profile.
The following table lists the properties of the individual dialing profiles and how to set them
using the switches mentioned above.
246

Table 5- 30
Setting standard dialing profiles
Profile no.
Meaning
AT mode

2))
21
V.25bis
1200 bps duplex, V.22
2))
21

2))
21

2))
21

V.25bis
33600 bps duplex, V.34bis

V.25bis
2))
21
V.25bis

V.25bis
2))
21
V.25bis

2))
21

AT mode
Freely configurable
2))
21

Basic settings for dedicated line mode

Certain basic settings must be made for the dedicated line mode. The settings relate to the
data format, the modem type, and line adjustment. You make the basic settings with the DIL
switches SW2.1, SW2.5, SW2.6 and SW2.9.
Turn of the power supply and set the four switches mentioned above to the required position.
When you turn on the power supply, the modem then adopts the selected basic setting.

247

Table 5- 31
Basic setting for dedicated line mode
Meaning
Data format 11 bits (8E1)

2))
21

Data format 10 bits (8N1)

2))
21

Modem A (originate) 2)
2))
21

Modem B (answer) 2)
2))
21

Line adjustment 600 ohms 1)

2))
21

Line adjustment Zr 1)
2))
21

1) The factory setting for the line adjustment is Zr because this normally adapts MD3 optimally to the dedicated line and the frequencies used.
Line adjustment with 600 ohms is not normally necessary. It is, however, important that the two modems connected to each other over the
dedicated line are set to the same line adjustment.
2) Refer to the explanations in the section Modem A and modem B for dedicated line mode.
Note
A further important basic setting for dedicated line mode is deactivating the loop power
section.
Modem A and modem B for dedicated line mode
When setting up a point-to-point link, remember that the two MD3 modems being used for
the connection must have different parameter settings. To simplify matters, the modems with
the difference settings are referred to as "modem A" and "modem B". "Modem A" (originate)
is the modem in the role of active modem that attempts to establish the connection to the
partner over the dedicated line. Modem B (answer) is the passive answering modem during
connection establishment.
248

During connection establishment, the modems synchronize themselves to establish a duplex
connection for data transmission.
0RGHP$
0RGHP%
0'
0'
ZLUHGHGLFDWHGOLQH
Figure 5-31
Point-to-point link between two MD3 modems over a 2-wire dedicated line
Settings for a standard dedicated line profile

Apart from the default setting for the dedicated line mode, switches SW2.2, SW2.3 and
SW2.4 can be used to select one of the 8 dedicated line profiles. Standard dedicated line
profiles 8 to 14 are default settings that enable the MD3 modem to be operated without any
programming using a terminal program if one of these dedicated line profiles matches the
intended application. Standard dedicated line profile 15 can be freely configured by the user
and therefore requires programming by a terminal program before it can be put into
operation.
Turn of the power supply and set the four switches SW2.1 to SW2.4 to the required position.
When you turn on the power supply, the modem then adopts the selected standard
dedicated line profile.
The following table lists the properties of the individual dedicated line profiles and how to set
them using the switches mentioned above.
Table 5- 32
Profile no.
8
Setting standard dedicated line profiles

Meaning
300 bps (direct)
(suitable only for RS-232 port)

2))
21

1200 bps (direct)

2))
21


249

Profile no.
Meaning
10
2400 bps (direct)

11

2))
21

2))
21


15
2))
21

14

19200 bps (direct)

13
2))
21
9600 bps (direct)

12
2))
21

AT mode
Freely configurable
(also suitable for RS-485 port)
2))
21

Note
The selection of the standard dedicated line profile not only depends on the required
transmission speed but also on the interface to be used, the RS-232 or the RS-485 interface.
Standard dedicated line profiles 8 to 14 are only suitable for use with the RS-232 interface. If
you require the RS-485 interface, the user-configurable dedicated line profile 15 must be set
and configured. Profile 15 can, however, also be used with the RS-232 interface.
Loudspeaker ON or OFF
The MD3 modem is equipped with a loudspeaker. The loudspeaker allows you to hear all the
signal tones during the connection phase and during data transmission. The loudspeaker
can be turned on for test purposes or for normal operation.
250

Table 5- 33
Setting the loudspeaker
Loudspeaker
Turned off
2))
6: 21

Turned on
6:
2))
21

Modem reset
If the configuration of the modem is unclear, you can reset to the factory default settings.
When you reset the modem, all 16 standard profiles are reset to the default setting.
Procedure:
1. Power supply OFF
2. Set switch SW2.7 to ON
3. Turn the power supply ON and then wait at least 10 seconds until the DCD LED lights up.
4. Power supply OFF, set switch SW2.7 to OFF
5. Select the basic setting and standard profile and turn the power supply ON
2))
6: 21
Figure 5-32

Setting the DIL switch for a modem reset
Default settings of the DIL switches SW1 and SW2

When it ships, the modem has the following default settings:
Metering pulse filter 16 kHz
Loop power section activated
Standard dialing profile 0: AT mode
Data format 11 bits (8E1)
Tone dialing
Loudspeaker OFF
Line adjustment Zr

251

When shipped, the switches are set as shown in the following figure.
6:

6:
2))
21
Figure 5-33
5.7.3

Default settings of the DIL switches SW1 and SW2

The following figure shows the MD3 modem from below with the X3 RJ-12 Western jack and
the DIL switch for activating the RS-232 or RS-485 interface
SLQ5-:HVWHUQMDFN;
:$1DWWDFKPHQWIRUWKH0'PRGHP$
VXLWDEOHVWDQGDUGFRQQHFWLQJFDEOHLV
VXSSOLHGZLWKWKH0'
12 3 4
7KLVSLQ',/VZLWFKLVXVHGWRDFWLYDWHHLWKHU
WKH56RU56LQWHUIDFH)RU56
RSHUDWLRQ\RXFDQDOVRDFWLYDWHWKHWHUPLQD
WLQJUHVLVWRU
7KHVWDQGDUGVHWWLQJVIRU56RU56
DUHVKRZQEHORZ
2))
21
2))
21
Figure 5-34

56LQWHUIDFHDFWLYH
DVVKLSSHG
56LQWHUIDFHDFWLYH
DQGWHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRU
FRQQHFWHG
252

Settings with the DIL switches accessible from below
A further 4-pin DIL switch on the bottom of the modem housing is accessible from below.
This DIL switch is used to activate either the RS-232 or RS-485 interface. For RS-485
operation, you can also activate the terminating resistor. The following figure shows the
possible settings in general.
1R56
WHUPLQDWLRQ
56
2))
21

56
Figure 5-35
56
WHUPLQDWLRQ
DFWLYDWHG
Configuration switches on the 4-pin DIL switch accessible from below
Pinout of the X3 RJ-12 jack

The X3 connector of the MD3 modem is designed as a 6-pin RJ-12 Western jack. The pinout
Table 5- 34
Pinout of the X3 RJ-12 jack for the MD3 modem
Illustration

Pin no.
Signal name
Signal direction
Remark
a2
Bidirectional
Outgoing wire pair (along with

b2)
Ground
b1
Bidirectional
Incoming wire pair
a1
b2
Bidirectional
Outgoing wire pair (along with

a2)
Metering pulse

The connecting cable 6NH7700-3BR60 ships with every MD3 modem. It allows the modem
to be connected to a TAE6 telephone outlet for dial-up mode or with an LTOP voltage
protection module for dedicated line mode.

253

Table 5- 35
Standard connecting cable for the RJ-12 port of the MD3 modem
Order no.
Description
Illustration
6NH7700-3BR60
Connecting cable with 2 x RJ-12 Western plug and snap-on

TAE6N plug to connect an MD3 modem (RJ-12) to a
telephone jack (TAE6N) or an LTOP overvoltage protection
module (RJ-12) in dedicated line mode.
Cable length 6 m
7$(1
5-
5-
Note
The 6NH7700-3BR60 connecting cable has a ferrite at one of the cable ends to suppress
electromagnetic interference over the connecting cable. You should not normally remove the
ferrite. Make sure that the RJ-12 Western connector at the end of the cable with the ferrite is
connected to the modem.
The following table shows the pinout of the RJ-12 Western plug at the modem end of the
standard connecting cable described above and the fitted TAE6N connector.
Table 5- 36
Pinout of the RJ-12 and TAE6 connectors

Signal name
RJ-12 Western plug

Illustration
Pin no.
TAE6 plug
Pin no.
a1
b1
b2
a2
Illustration

254

Standard cable for dial-up mode
For dial-up mode, cable 6NH7700-3BR60 is used to connect the MD3 modem to a TAE6
telephone outlet. The TAE6N plug is then clipped onto one of the RJ-12 Western plugs of the
cable.
Note
When the MD3 modem is used outside Germany, a telephone plug adapter for the specific
country can be clipped onto the RJ-12 Western plug. Some countries already use RJ-12
jacks in their telephone outlets which means that the 6NH7700-3BR60 cable can be
connected directly without the need for an adapter.
Standard cable for dedicated line mode
For dedicated line mode, cable 6NH7700-3BR60 is used to connect the MD3 modem to an
LTOP overvoltage protection module. In this case, the connecting cable is used without the
TAE6N connector.
The actual connection of the dedicated cable is on the LTOP overvoltage protection module
using screw terminals.
Note
To insert the cable in the X3 RJ-12 jack of the modem, it is best to hold the cable directly
below the RJ-12 plug. This makes it easier to insert the plug than if you hold the RJ-12 plug
itself. When inserting it, make sure that you can hear the RJ-12 connector click into place!

255

5.7.4
Connecting the MD3 with a TIM and TAE6 outlet

The following figure summarizes how the MD3 modem is connected to a TIM (over RS-232)
and with the telephone outlet (TAE6N jack) in dialing mode using the specified standard
connecting cables. A telephone can also be connected to the same telephone outlet as the
modem (using the TAE6F jack).
1+$/FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
7,0
56
0'
56
7$()
5-
7$(1
7HOHSKRQHVRFNHW
1+$5FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
Figure 5-36
Connecting the MD3 with a TIM and telephone outlet
Note
256

Connecting an MD3 and a telephone in parallel to a TAE6 outlet
The following figure shows how to connect an MD3 and a telephone in parallel to a TAE6
outlet. The diagram shows the standard wiring of the TAE6 socket of the German Telekom
with a connection for one telephone (TAE6F) and a connection for a modem or a fax
machine (TAE6N).
0'
7$(1
5-
D

E
*
(

D
*
(
E
D
%XV\
GHWHFWLRQ
D
X
E
E
X
QVL
0RGHPFRQWURO
7$(
RXWOHW
&DOO
GHWHFWLRQ
H
7$()
D

D
E
7HOHSKRQH
E
*
(
Figure 5-37
5.7.5
Connecting an MD3 and a telephone in parallel to a TAE6 outlet
Connecting the MD3 with TIM, LTOP and dedicated line
Introduction
The following figures illustrate the various options for connecting the MD3 modem to a TIM
(over RS-232) or other MD3 modems (over RS-485) in dedicated line mode as well as to a
dedicated line over an LTOP.
For more detailed information on connecting, wiring up and setting the LTOP, refer to the
section Line transformer with LTOP overvoltage protection.

257

Connecting an MD3 with a TIM over the RS-232 port
Only one (1) MD3 modem can be connected to a TIM over the RS-232 port. This results in
the following configuration:
1+$/FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
,PSRUWDQW
7KH56VLJQDOV576
DQG&76KDYHQRIXQFWLRQ
IRUWKH0'
7KLVFDQEHWDNHQLQWR
DFFRXQWRQD7,0E\
VHWWLQJDQ576&76GHOD\
RIPV
7,0
56
0'
56
5HTXLUHPHQWVIRU
GHGLFDWHGOLQHPRGHRYHU
56
56LQWHUIDFHPXVW
EHDFWLYDWHG
7KHEDVLFVHWWLQJVIRU
GHGLFDWHGOLQHPRGH
KDYHEHHQPDGH
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+%5
/723
1+%&
2QHRIWKHVWDQGDUG
SURILOHVWRIRU
56KDVEHHQVHW
/723
ZLUHGHGLFDWHGOLQH
Figure 5-38
Connecting an MD3 to a TIM over RS-232, 2-wire end point variant
Please follow the instructions in the figure above to ensure problem-free operation,
Note
Connecting several MD3s with a TIM over the RS-485 port
Several MD3 modems can be connected to a TIM over the RS-485 port. This type of
configuration is necessary when several dedicated lines come together on one TIM; in other
words when connecting a star network. The following figure shows this configuration with
standard components.
258

5HTXLUHPHQWVIRUGHGLFDWHGOLQHPRGHRYHU
56ZLWKDOO0'PRGHPV
5HPHPEHUWKHIROORZLQJIRUWKH7,0
0RGHKDOIGXSOH[
56LQWHUIDFHPXVWEHDFWLYDWHG
6HW576&76GHOD\IRUWKH7,0
7KHEDVLFVHWWLQJVIRUGHGLFDWHGOLQHPRGH
KDYHEHHQPDGH
3URILOHZDVVHWDQGFRQILJXUHGIRU
GHGLFDWHGOLQHPRGHRYHU56
56
7,0
0'
0'
56
0'
56
56
2QODVW
&RQQHFWRU
WHUPLQDWLQJV
UHVLVWRU
DFWLYDWH
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+'/
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+%5
/723
1+%&
/723
ZLUHGHGLFDWHGOLQH
Figure 5-39
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+%5
/723
ZLUHGHGLFDWHGOLQH
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH
1+%5
/723
ZLUHGHGLFDWHGOLQH
Connecting several MD3s to one TIM over RS-485, star-shaped convergence of several
dedicated lines

259

For the connection from the TIM to the first MD3, the 6NH7701-4DL standard connecting
cable is used. For the connection to the other modems, there is no preassembled connecting
cable available. These can, nevertheless, be implemented with the standard components
from the SIMATIC S7 range. The same parts can be used as when creating an MPI
connection. As cable, we recommend 6XV1830-0AH10, and as connector 6ES7972-0BA110XA0. When necessary, the RS-485 terminating resistor can be activated in this connector.
Note
Note
Do not forget to activate the terminating resistor for the RS-485 bus on the last connector
using the slider switch.
RS-485 operation of the MD3
If several MD3s are connected in parallel over the RS-485 port, remember the following
when making the settings for the modem and setting the parameters for the TIM:
1. The MD3 modem must be set to profile 15 using the 10-pin DIL switch.
2. Make sure that this user-configurable profile 15 is set so that it is suitable for RS-485
mode using a PC and terminal program.
3. The RS-485 interface must also be activated at the 4-pin DIL switch accessible from
below.
4. The RS-485 interface of the TIM connected to the MD3 modem must also be activated at
the 8-pin DIL switch accessible from above (applies to all TIM 4 types).
5. Since data traffic can only handled in half duplex over RS-485, the mode of the
connected TIM must be set to half duplex.
6. Once the MD3 has received data and forwarded it to the TIM, the MD3 requires a pause
of several ms before it is ready to send data. The TIM must take this pause into account
by setting an RTS/CTS delay; in other words, after receiving data it must only start
transmitting data after the RTS/CTS delay has expired. The duration of the delay
depends on the transmission speed being used on the dedicated line (see table below).
Table 5- 37
RTS/CTS delay for MD3 in RS-485 mode
Speed on the dedicated RTS/CTS delay

line
Speed on the dedicated RTS/CTS delay

line
300 bps
100 ms
14400 bps
10 ms
1200 bps
100 ms
19200 bps
10 ms
2400 bps
50 ms
26400 bps
10 ms
9600 bps
25 ms
33600 bps
10 ms
260

,Q56PRGHWKHW\SHRI
FRQQHFWLRQKDOIGXSOH[PXVW
EHVHWRQWKHGHGLFDWHGOLQH
Figure 5-40
Setting parameters for "half duplex" mode in the properties dialog of the SINAUT
dedicated line, "Network Settings" tab
,Q56PRGHDQ576&76
GHOD\WLPHPXVWEHVHW
UHJDUGOHVVRIWKHVSHHG
,IWKH0'LVRSHUDWHGRYHUWKH
56SRUWDQ576&76
GHOD\WLPHRIDWOHDVWPV
PXVWEHVHW
Figure 5-41
Setting the RTS/CTS delay time in the properties dialog for TIM WAN access,
"Dedicated Line" tab.

261

7,0
56
3LQQR ,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'56
0RGHP
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

'DWD%
$
'DWD$

%
'DWD$
$
'DWD%
%

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH

,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'56
0RGHP
'DWD%
$
%
$
%

'DWD$

+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'56
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
0RGHP
'DWD%
$
%
$
%

'DWD$

+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG
6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 5-42
Assembly of the standard connecting cable 6NH7701-4DL from the TIM to the MD3
modems
262

Attenuation values of the MD3 modem in dedicated line mode
Table 5- 38
Attenuation values of the MD3 modem in dedicated line mode
Transmission speed (bps)
Attenuation per km
(dB)
Attenuation per LTOP

(dB)
1,0
0,4
With line termination with Z = Zr

300 to 33600
Maximum range of the MD3 modem in dedicated line mode

Transmission
speed (bps)
Maximum range (km)

Transmit level 15 dB
With LTOP
Transmit level -10 dB
Without LTOP
With LTOP
Without LTOP
With line termination with Z = Zr

300
29
30
34
35
1200 to 19200
23
24
28
29
33600
14
15
19
20
The values in the table are guidelines for communication lines without loading coils of the
type 2 x 2 x 0,8 J-Y(St)Y.
When calculating the maximum range, a power margin of 4 dB was included. This is to
compensate for fluctuations in cable properties that experience has shown to occur in
practise, and thus always ensure that sufficient signal level is available for problem-free data
transmission.
5.7.6
User-configurable profiles
Introduction
Apart from the seven standard profiles for dialing mode (profile 0 to 6) and dedicated line
mode (profile 8 to 14), the MD3 modem provides a further user-configurable profile for each
mode. Profile 7 is available as a user-configurable profile for dialing mode, profile 15 for
dedicated line mode.
Both profiles are configured at a PC using AT commands. The PC and modem are
connected together using a cable. On the PC, the connecting cable is attached to COM1 or
COM2, on the modem over the RS-232 port.
The AT commands are transferred using a terminal program. One suitable program is
HyperTerminal from WINDOWS.

263

Connecting the PC and modem
To transfer the AT commands, the PC and modem are connected using the SINAUT ST7
standard cable 6NH7701-4AL. If the standard cable is not available, a connecting cable with
two 9-pin D-sub female connectors and the following pinout can be used.
3&&20&20
0RGHP56

5['
7['

*1'
Figure 5-43
Wiring diagram of a PC-modem cable
User-configurable profile 7 for dialing mode

If none of the standard profiles 0 to 6 is suitable for the required application, profile 7 can be
configured by the user and stored in non-volatile memory. As default, the configurations of
profiles 7 and 0 are identical.
When configuring profile 7, you can use all the AT commands listed in Chapter 6 of the MD 3
description 6NH7811-0AA31 that can be ordered separately.
To configure profile 7, follow the steps below:
1. Turn off the power supply to the modem.
2. Set standard profit 7 on the modem (SW2 DIL switch).
3. Connect the modem to the PC over its RS-232 port.
4. Turn on the power supply to the modem.
5. Transfer the required AT commands to the MD 3 using the terminal program.
6. Store the profile in non-volatile memory.
Type in: AT &W7
Modem: OK
User-configurable profile 15 for dedicated line mode
The user-configurable dedicated line profile 15 is intended mainly for applications in
dedicated line mode in which the RS-485 port of the MD 3 is used. Profile 15 can, of course,
also be configured so that it works in conjunction with the RS-232 port. This is useful, for
example, if the user requires a transmission rate that is not available with any of the standard
profiles 8 to 14.
When configuring profile 15, you can use all the AT commands listed in Chapter 6 of the MD
3 description 6NH7811-0AA31 that can be ordered separately.
264

The tables summarize the AT string for configuring profile 15 for dedicated line mode for use
with the RS-485 and RS-232 port.
Table 5- 39
Configuration for use with the RS-485 port
Description of the profile
AT string
300 bps (buffered)
AT\N0F1&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
1200 bps (buffered)
AT\N0F2&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
2400 bps (buffered)
AT\N0F3&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
4800 bps (buffered)
AT\N0F8&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
7200 bps (buffered)
AT\N0F9&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
9600 bps (buffered)
AT\N0F10&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
AT\N0F11&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
AT\N0F12&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
AT\N0F13&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
AT\N0F14&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
AT\N0F15&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
AT\N0F16&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
AT\N0F17&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
AT\N0F18&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
AT\N0F19&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
AT\N0F20&D0%E0\Q0&C2&L1&W15
Table 5- 40
Profile 15 - configuration for use with the RS-232 port
AT string
300 bps (direct)
AT\N1F1&D0%E0\Q0&L1&W15 (standard profile 8)
1200 bps (direct)
2400 bps (direct)
4800 bps (direct)
AT\N1F8&D0%E0\Q0&L1&W15
7200 bps (direct)
AT\N1F9&D0%E0\Q0&L1&W15
9600 bps (direct)
AT\N0F11&D0%E0\Q0&L1&W15
AT\N0F12&D0%E0\Q0&L1&W15
AT\N0F13&D0%E0\Q0&L1&W15
AT\N0F15&D0%E0\Q0&L1&W15
AT\N0F16&D0%E0\Q0&L1&W15
AT\N0F17&D0%E0\Q0&L1&W15
AT\N0F18&D0%E0\Q0&L1&W15
AT\N0F19&D0%E0\Q0&L1&W15

265

To configure profile 15, follow the steps below:

1. Turn off the power supply to the modem.
2. Set standard profit 15 on the modem (SW2 DIL switch).
3. Connect the modem to the PC over its RS-232 port.
4. Turn on the power supply to the modem.
5. Transfer the required AT strings to the MD 3 using the terminal program according to the
tables.
Note
If you want to transfer AT commands to the modem in addition to those in the tables, they
should be included before the AT sequence &L1&W15. The reason for this is that the
modem changes to online mode following the &L1 AT command after which no further AT
commands can be transferred to the MD3. In this case, the mode must first be reset with
the SW2.7 DIL switch and then reconfigured.
Note
If the modem is reset with the SW2.7 DIL switch, profile 15 once again as the factory
default setting. Profile 15 must then be reconfigured.
5.7.7
LTOP line transformer with overvoltage protection
Introduction
The LTOP (Line Transformer with Overvoltage Protection) limits extraneous voltages and
overvoltages to a non-critical level. The floating transformer also provides electrical isolation
preventing coupling of voltages into other cable sections.
Note
The LTOP line transformer with overvoltage protection is intended only for connection to
dedicated lines. For dial-up network applications, other suitable overvoltage protection
modules should be used. Companies such as Phoenix and Dehn offer TAE6 and RJ-12
outlets with overvoltage protection.
266

The design, protection concept, and the LTOP variants are described in the section LTOP
line transformers with overvoltage protection.
Note
If you require an LTOP in conjunction with the MD3 modem in dedicated line mode, only the
LTOP1 variant can be used.
Connecting up the MD3 modem
The following figure shows how to connect the MD3 modem in dedicated line mode. The
LTOP 1 is connected up over the standard cable 6NH7700-3BR60 that ships with the
modem. This cable has RJ-12 Western plugs at both ends.
Note
Please make sure that the S1 switch is set correctly to position 2 as shown in the following
figure.
Attachment to a 2-wire end point
0'
;
5-

; 5-

6
;
/723
ZLUH
GHGLFDWHGOLQH
Figure 5-44
Connecting the MD3 to an LTOP1 with a 2-wire end point

267

5.8 ISDN dial-up modem MD4
5.8
ISDN dial-up modem MD4

switches.
5.8.1
Indicators and connectors accessible from the front

The following figure shows the front view of the MD4 modem with the front panels closed.
)URQWSDQHOODEHOHG
0RGHP
7;'
5;'
'75
57621/
&765,
'&'
Modem
GHYLFH7,0
'LVSOD\HOHPHQWV
:HVWHUQMDFN
6,1$87
67
1+$$
Figure 5-45
;

Front view of the MD4 modem with the front panels closed
268


modem for dial-up operation.
Table 5- 41
Meaning of the LEDs on the front of the MD4 for dial-up operation
LED no.
Labeling
TXD
Description
Transmit data
RXD
Receive data
terminal device (TIM) over the RS-232 or RS-485 interface. The data flow
is indicated both in the data and in the command phase.
DTR
Data terminal ready

Outgoing call:
The LED lights up when the terminal device (TIM) wants to establish a
connection and goes off as soon as the terminal device wants to
terminate the established connection. If no connection can be
established or the connection is terminated by the partner or is aborted
due to a disruption, the terminal device deactivates the DTR signal as
soon as it receives a message to this effect from the modem.
Incoming call:
The LED lights up when the terminal device (TIM) wants to accept an
incoming call. The LED goes off again under the same conditions as with
an outgoing call.
RTS / ONL
Modem online (ONL) "receiver taken off the hook"

Outgoing call:
The LED lights up as soon as the modem has received the dialing string
from the terminal device (TIM) and begins connection establishment. The
LED goes off again when the connection is terminated (by its own
terminal device or by the partner) or when the connection is aborted due
to a disruption.
Incoming call:
The LED lights up when the terminal device (TIM) signals with DTR that it
wants to accept the incoming call. The LED goes off again under the
same conditions as with an outgoing call.
CTS / RI
DCD
Ring indicator (RI)

The LED light ups with every ring of an incoming call.
Connection established
The LED lights up as soon as the participating modems are synchronized
during connection establishment (signaled to terminal device (TIM) with
CONNECT). The LED goes off when the connection is terminated or
aborted due to a disruption.
The RTS and CTS signal names are irrelevant for the MD4.

269

Front view of the MD4 with removed front panels

The following figure once again shows the front view of the MD4 modem, here, however, the
front panels have been removed to show the connectors located behind them.
;SLQPDOHFRQQHFWRU
7,0
7;'
5;'
'75
57621/
&765,
'&'
$FFHVVIURPEHORZWR;:$1MDFNRIWKH

PRGHP5-:HVWHUQMDFN
;SLQIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU
0'PRGHP
7KH56LQWHUIDFHDQGWKHOLQHWHUPLQDWLRQ
DUHDFWLYDWHGXVLQJDSLQ',/VZLWFK7KLVLV
DFFHVVLEOHIURPEHORZWKURXJKWKHKRXVLQJ
X3
M
L+DC
M 24V
JULOO
&RQQHFWRUIRU9'&
X2
Figure 5-46
Front view of the MD4 modem with removed front panels

270

Table 5- 42

Pin no.
Signal name
DCD
Output
RXD
Output
TXD
Input
DTR
Input
GND
DSR
RTS
Input
CTS
Output
RI / T
Output
Illustration
Signal direction
Remark
Output
Table 5- 43

Signal name
Signal direction
Data B
Bidirectional
Illustration
Pin no.
Remark
M5

connector*)
P5

connector*)
Data A
Bidirectional
1
2
3
9
8
3
7
2
6
1
7
8
9

The TIM module or other terminal device with a suitable interface is connected to the X1 9pin RS-232 connector.
The following standard connecting cable is available to attach to the X1 connector.

271

Table 5- 44
Standard connecting cables for the RS-232 port
Order no.
Description
Illustration
6NH7701-4AL

TIM 3V-IE / TIM 4 (RS-232) or other DTE with a 9-pin RS-232
interface with an identical pin assignment.
Cable length 1.5 m
7,0
0'
Note
top.
The following figure shows how the connecting cable listed above is assembled.
7,09,(5,(3LQQR
7,056
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
Figure 5-47

5;'
7;'
'75
*1'
'65
576
&76
5,7
+RXVLQJ
VKLHOG

'&'
3LQQR 0RGHP0'
0'0'
56

,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ

6XE'VRFNHW
SROH
You will find an example of connecting the MD4 modem to a TIM and to an ISDN outlet
below in the section Connecting the MD4 to a TIM and ISDN outlet.
272

5.8.2

The following figure shows the MD4 modem from above. It shows the location of the 4-pin
DIL switch that is accessible from above.
SLQ',/VZLWFKIRUVHOHFWLQJRQHRIWKH
VWDQGDUGSURILOHVRUIRUUHVHWWLQJLQWKHHYHQW
RIDIDXOW
)URQWSDQHOODEHOHG
0RGHP

Figure 5-48

The MD4 modem has a 4-pin DIL switch mounted directly on the grill of the housing.
The DIL switch has the following function:
Setting the mode
Setting one of the four standard profiles for the dialing mode
Reset function
The following figure summarizes the possible settings.

273

2))
21

'HGLFDWHGOLQHPRGH
5HVHW21

$7PRGH
9ELVESV
9ELVESV
9ELVESV
Figure 5-49
2))
21
2))
21
2))
2))
21
21
Possible settings with the DIL switch accessible from above
Note
The MD4 modem adopts the settings at the DIL switch only when the 24 V DC power supply
is turned on. While the settings are being adopted, the MD4 indicates this by the four lower
LEDs lighting up in sequence. As soon as the LEDs start flashing sequence, the set function
has been adopted.
Settings for dialing mode
For dialing mode, a standard profile must be set. The setting is made with the 4-pin DIL
switch. Standard profiles 0 to 3 are default settings that enable the MD4 modem to be
operated without any programming using a terminal program if one of these standard profiles
matches the intended application. Each standard profile can also be freely configured by the
user and therefore requires programming by a terminal program before it can be put into
operation.
Turn of the power supply and set all four switches mentioned above to the required position.
When you turn on the power supply, the modem then adopts the selected setting.
Note
Standard profile 0 should be selected for connecting the MD4 to a TIM.
The following table lists the properties of the individual profiles and how to set them using the
switches mentioned above.
274

Table 5- 45
Overview of the configurable standard profiles for dialing mode
Profile no.
AT command set
Data format:
In the command phase: Self-adapting
In the data phase: 10 bits (8N1)

(factory default)
V.25bis,
1200 bps V.23 hx
Data format:
In the command phase: 10 bits (7E1)
In the data phase: 11 bits (8E1)
V.25bis,
2400 bps V.22bis
Data format:
V.25bis,
9600 bps V.32
Data format:
Profile setting on DIL switch

SW1 (SW1.3 = ON)
2))
21
2))
21
2))
21
2))
21


275

Resetting the modem
If the configuration of the modem is unclear, you can reset to the factory default settings.
When you reset the modem, all four standard profiles for dialing mode are reset to the
factory defaults.
Procedure:
1. Power supply OFF
2. Set switch 3 to ON and switch 1, 2 and 4 to OFF
3. Power supply ON and then wait until the lower four LEDs have stopped flashing in
sequence.
4. Power supply OFF, set switch 3 to OFF
5. Select basic setting for dedicated line mode or standard profile for dialing mode and then
power ON
2))
21

Figure 5-50
Setting the DIL switch to reset the MD4 modem
Note
Following the reset, the settings made with the terminal program for the dedicated line
mode are deleted. The settings must therefore be transferred to the modem again using
the terminal program.
Factory setting on the DIL switch
When it ships, the modem has the following default settings:
Standard profile 0: AT mode
Reset OFF
When shipped, the switches are set as shown in the following figure.
2))
21

Figure 5-51
Factory setting on the DIL switch
276

5.8.3

The following figure shows the MD4 modem from below with the X3 RJ-12 Western jack and
the DIL switch for activating the RS-232 or RS-485 interface.
;SLQ5-:HVWHUQMDFN
:$1FRQQHFWRUIRUWKH0'PRGHP7KH
FRQQHFWLQJFDEOHLVVXSSOLHGZLWKWKH0'

7KLVSLQ',/VZLWFKVSHFLILHVZKHWKHUWKH
56RU56LQWHUIDFHZLOOEHDFWLYDWHG
)RU56PRGHWKHWHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRULV
DOVRDFWLYDWHGKHUH%HORZWKHVWDQGDUG
VHWWLQJVIRU56RU56
2))
21
2))
21
Figure 5-52

56LQWHUIDFH
DFWLYDWHGDVVKLSSHG
56LQWHUIDFH

DFWLYDWHGDQGWHUPLQDWLQJ
UHVLVWRUDFWLYDWHG
Settings with the DIL switches accessible from below

A 4-pin DIL switch on the bottom of the modem housing is accessible from below. This DIL
switch is used to activate either the RS-232 or RS-485 interface. For RS-485 operation, you
can also activate the terminating resistor. The following figure shows the possible settings in
general.
1R56
WHUPLQDWLQJ
UHVLVWRU
56
2))
21
56
Figure 5-53

56
WHUPLQDWLQJ
UHVLVWRU
DFWLYDWHG
Possible settings on the 4-pin DIL switch accessible from below

277

Pinout of the RJ-12 Western jack
The X3 connector of the MD4 modem is designed as a 6-pin RJ-12 Western jack. The pinout
Table 5- 46
Pinout of the X3 RJ-12 jack for the MD4 modem
Illustration
Pin no.
6
5
4
3
2
1
Signal name
TX-
RX-
RX+
TX+
Signal direction
Remark

The connecting cable 6NH7700-4AR60 ships with every MD4 modem. This allows the
modem to be connected to an ISDN S0 outlet.
Table 5- 47
Standard connecting cable for the MD4 modem
Order no.
Description
Illustration
6NH7700-4AR60
Connecting cable with RJ-12 and RJ-45 plug to

connect an MD4 modem (RJ-12) with an ISDN-S0 jack
(RJ-45).
Cable length 6 m
5-
5-
Note
It is best to hold the cable just below the RJ-12 plug. This makes it easier to insert the plug
than if you hold the RJ-12 plug itself. When inserting it, make sure that you can hear the RJ12 connector click into place!
The following table shows the pinout of the two connectors for the above standard
connecting cable.
278

Table 5- 48
Pinout of the RJ-12 and RJ-45 Western connectors

RJ-12 Western plug
Illustration
Pin no.

Pin no.
-
TX-
RX-
RX+
TX+
5.8.4
RJ-45 Western plug
Signal name
Illustration

Connecting the MD4 with a TIM and ISDN outlet

The following figure summarizes how the MD4 modem is connected to a TIM (over RS-232)
and with the ISDN outlet (S0) using the specified standard connecting cables.
1+$/FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
7,0
56
0'
5-
56
5-
,6'1VRFNHW6
1+$5FRQQHFWLQJFDEOH
Figure 5-54
Connecting the MD4 with a TIM and ISDN outlet (S0)

279

5.9 Installing and putting a SINAUT MD2, MD3, MD4 modem into operation
Note
Any TIM with an RS-232 port can be used, in other words, the two TIM 3V-IE variants, the
TIM 4R-IE and the TIM 4.
5.9
Installing and putting a SINAUT MD2, MD3, MD4 modem into

operation
5.9.1
Installation
Introduction
The MD2, MD3 and MD4 modems can be installed on a SIMATIC S7-300 rail or using the
6NH7760-0AA adapter (must be ordered separately) on a 35 mm standard rail.
The modem can be operated both in a horizontal and in a vertical installation.
Note
Before the modem is installed on the S7-300 or standard rail, all the DIL switches of the
modem must be set correctly for operation. These switches are practically inaccessible when
the module is installed.
5.9.2
Installation on an S7-300 rail

Note
If you want to install the modem along with other S7-300 modules, remember that the
modem does not have an S7-300 backplane bus. There must therefore be no S7-300
module that communicates with the S7 CPU over the backplane bus (SM, FM or CP)
installed to the right of the modem.
To install the modem on an S7-300 rail, follow the steps below in the order shown:
1. Turn off the power supply to which the modem will be connected.
2. Place the modem on the rail and push it in towards the bottom.
3. Screw the modem tight.
4. Connect the modem to the power supply.
280

5. Insert the cable supplied with a modem into the X3 RJ-12 Western jack. This is located
above the power supply connector of the modem. The catch of the RJ-12 plug must be
on the right hand side when it is inserted.
Note
It is best to hold the cable just below the RJ-12 plug. This makes it easier to insert the
plug than if you hold the RJ-12 plug itself. When inserting it, make sure that you can hear
the RJ-12 connector click into place!
6. To connect the modem to the TIM, the 9-pin D-sub connector of the mode and
connecting cable must be plugged onto the X1 connector (RS-232 interface) or X2
connector (RS-485 interface) of the modem and screwed tight.
Note
(RS-232) is connected to the modem "head first" so that the cable comes away towards
the top.
7. To install further modems in a rack, follow the same steps as described above.
8. Once all the modems are installed, the power supply can be turned on.
A type MD2 or MD4 modem starts up but does not indicate anything with its LEDs until
it is activated by the TIM.
The MD3 modem starts up and indicates the presence of the power supply by its DCD
LED lighting up. The other LEDs of the modem only light up when it is activated by the
end device.

281

5.9.3

To install the modem on a 35 mm standard rail, the 6NH7760-0AA adapter is required (must
be ordered separately).
Figure 5-55
Adapter for installation on a 35 mm standard rail
Fit the modem onto the adapter in the same way as the modem is fitted to an S7-300 rail.
Screw the modem to the adapter. The modem is now prepared for installation on a standard
rail and can be clipped onto it.
The remaining steps in installation are analogous to installation on an S7-300 rail.
5.9.4

A SINAUT modem can be operated both in a horizontal and in a vertical installation.
The SINAUT modems can be operated in the same temperature range specified for the S7300.
282

Table 5- 49
Permitted ambient temperature for SINAUT modems

0 to 60 C
MDx
Horizontal
MDx
0 to 40 C
Vertical
Dimensions for installing SINAUT modems

Table 5- 50
5.9.5
Dimensions for installing SINAUT modems
Module
Module width
Module height
Max. depth
Modem module
MD2, MD3 and MD4
80 mm
125 mm
120 mm or 180 mm
with open front panel

WARNING
Connecting the modem module to a live power supply can damage the module. Connect
the modem to the power supply only when the power supply is off.
WARNING
The power for the device (24 V DC) must be generated as a safe extra low voltage. This
means it must be a SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV (Protective Extra Low
Voltage) according to DIN VDE 0100 Part 410 (IEC 60364-4-41).
Cables
To wire the power supply, use flexible cables with a cable cross-section of 0.25 ... 0.75 mm2.
If you wire only one cable per connection, no wire-end ferrule is necessary.

283

Wiring
To wire up the power supply module with a SINAUT modem, follow the steps below:
1. Open the front panels of the power supply unit and the modem.
2. Connect the power supply cables from the power supply unit to the modem: M and L+
3. Close the front panels.
Note
To avoid ground loops, do not connect the shielding of the modem.
Wiring diagram
The figure below shows the wiring diagram for one or more modems and a TIM. The same
wiring diagram applies to all modules.
Network
teil
TIM
L+
M
1. Modem
M
L+ '&
M 9
letztes Modem
M
L+ '&
M 9
M
L+ '&
M 9
9'&
9
Figure 5-56
Connection to the 24 V DC power supply
Note
The two TIM 3V-IE variants and the TIM 4R-IE do not have a 4-ping but a 2-pin terminal strip
for connection of the 24 V DC power supply (L+ and M).
284
Approvals issued
NOTICE
Issued approvals on the type plate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the
markings on the type plate.
Standards and test specifications

The device meets the following standards and test specifications. The test criteria for the
module are based on these standards and test specifications.
6.1
Approvals for the TIM 4R/4RD and the SINAUT modems
List of SINAUT ST7 products

The CE declaration and the approvals listed in this section relate to the following products:
Device
Order no.
TIM 4R
6NH7 800-4AA90
TIM 4RD
6NH7 800-4AD90
SINAUT MD2
6NH7 810-0AA20
SINAUT MD3
6NH7 810-0AA30
SINAUT MD4
6NH7 810-0AA40
Installation guidelines
The products meet the following requirements if you adhere to the configuration instructions
contained in this product documentation, see section Installation guide (Page 97), and
installation instructions, see sections Installing and putting a TIM into operation (Page 131)
and Installation and commissioning of the modems and routers (Page 185).

285

6.1 Approvals for the TIM 4R/4RD and the SINAUT modems
Overview of approvals and standards

EU directive "Safety"
EN 60950-1
Information technology equipment - Safety
EU directives on electromagnetic compatibility
EU Directive EMC 2004/108/EEC
The products listed above comply with the requirements of the EU Directive
2004/108/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" and the Harmonized European
Standards (EN) published in this connection.
EU Directive TTE 1999/5/EEC
The products listed above comply with the requirements of the EU Directive
1999/5/EU "Directive of the European Parliament and Council Governing Radio and
Telecommunication Terminal Equipment and the Mutual Recognition of their
Conformity".
EN 55022
Information technology equipment - Radio disturbance characteristics
EN 61000-3-2
Limit values for harmonic current emissions
EN 61000-3-3
Limits Limitation of voltage changes
EN 61000-4-2
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-3
Radiated electromagnetic field
EN 61000-4-4
Fast transients
EN 61000-4-5
Surge immunity (power supply)
EN 61000-4-6
Cable-propagated interference
EN 60870-2-1
Immunity (equipment in areas without special protection)
286

6.1 Approvals for the TIM 4R/4RD and the SINAUT modems
CE declaration of conformity
In accordance with the EU directives mentioned above, the EU conformity
declarations are available for the relevant authorities at the following
address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Industrial Solutions & Services
I&S IS 6 E D
Postfach 3249
D-91050 Erlangen
EU directives and standards

Standard
EMC 2004/108/EEC (EN 55022)
TIM 4R
TIM 4RD
MD2
MD3
MD4
Class A *
Class A *
Class B **
Class B **
Class B **
TTE 1999/5/EEC
EN 60870-2-1 (1996)
***
***
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
EN 60950-1 ****
EN 61000-3-2 / EN 61000-3-3
: Means that the device has the approval or meets the standard.
-: Means that the device does not have the approval or does not meet the standard.
Class A *: EN 55022, class A: Industrial area
Class B **: EN 55022, class B: Domestic
1: CTR / TBR 15 (analog leased lines, 2-wire);
CTR / TBR 17 (analog leased lines, 4-wire)
2: CTR / TBR 3 (digital leased lines)
***: Operation of the device only within a closed, metallic cabinet
****: The requirements of EN 60950-1 relating to bottoms of fire enclosures are not met. The device does not have a fireproof enclosure. It is therefore necessary to install the system in a cabinet or comparable housing that serves as a fireproof housing.
FM approval
The SINAUT ST7 products included in the "List of SINAUT ST7 products" are certified as
follows:

287

6.2 Additional approvals for SINAUT products for the analog telephone network
FM Approval according to Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I,
Division 2, Group A, B, C, D
WARNING
Injury to persons and damage to property is possible.
Injury to persons and damage to property can occur in hazardous areas in the connecting
cables are removed while a SINAUT ST7 device is in operation.
Always turn off the power to SINAUT ST7 devices before removing connecting cables in
hazardous areas.
UL/CSA approval
The SINAUT ST7 products included in the "List of SINAUT ST7 products" are certified as
follows:
UL Recognition Mark
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) based on:
Standard UL 508
CSA Certification Mark
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) based on:
Standards CSA No. 14 and 142
File no. E208174
Approvals of the MD720-3 and MD741-1

You will find the approvals of the GSM modem SINAUT MD720-3 and the GPRS router
SINAUT MD741-1 in the manual of the relevant product and in the section Technical
specifications of the SINAUT mobile wireless components (Page 49).
6.2
Additional approvals for SINAUT products for the analog telephone

network
SINAUT ST7 products for the analog telephone network including the MD3 modem
Name
Order no.
Hardware version
TIM 33
6NH7 800-3AA30
6 or higher
TIM 43
6NH7 800-4AA30
6 or higher
TIM 43D
6NH7 800-4AD30
6 or higher
MD3
6NH7 810-0AA30
4 or higher
For the stand-alone MD3 modem and for all TIM modules with integrated MD3 modems
listed in the table, the following certifications apply for Europe, USA and Canada.
288

Approval for Europe

Approval regulations
The MD3 is intended for connection to the analog public telecommunication network. In
Germany, the device is connected with the standard TAE6 connecting cable with N coding
supplied with the device. The telephone line is passed through and allows down-line
connection of an approved telephone.
It should be pointed out that if a handset is off the hook when the modem terminates the
connection, there may still be an established connection that is subject to charge.
The device meets the requirements of the "Allgemeinen Anschalterlaubnis" (AAE) "general
connection permit". Anyone may connect and operate the device over the standard plug
("Telekommunikations-Anschalte-Einrichtungen" (TAE)).
EU approval
In accordance with the Council ruling 98/482/EEC, this device is approved for connection as
an individual terminal device in the public telephone network. Due to the differences existing
between the public telephone networks in various countries, this approval is not necessarily
a guarantee for successful operation of the device at all network connection points.
Network compatibility
This product conforms to both the European standard TBR21 and national regulations
according to the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) Guide EU
201121 (R&TTE Directive) This product therefore operates without problems in the PSTN
network of all countries of the EU and in countries that support the TBR21 standard.
Approval for the USA

EXHIBIT J (FCC PART 68 REQUIREMENTS)
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. On the soldering side of this
equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC Registration Number
and Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment. You must, upon request, provide
this information to your telephone company.
This equipment uses RJ12 plugs.
An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug are provided with this equipment. This
equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a
compatible modular jack which is part 68 compliant. See installation instructions for details.
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone
line and still have all those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most, but
not all areas, the sum at the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not exceed
five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line, as
determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone company to determine the
maximum REN for your calling area.
If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the Telephone
Company may discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in
advance. But if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You
will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

289

Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or
procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your equipment. If they do, you will be
notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service.
If you experience trouble with this telephone equipment, please contact
SIEMENS Energy & Automation, Inc.
Factory Service Center
3000 Bill Garland Road
Johnson City, Tennessee 37605
Tel: (423) 461-3000
for information on obtaining service or repairs. The telephone company may ask that you
disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you
are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning.
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company.
Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs.
Approval for Canada

INDUSTRY CANADA (IC) NOTICE
The Industry Canada (IC) label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that
the equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational and safety
requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements
document(s). The department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's
satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to
the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed
using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance
with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations,
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the
supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by a user to this equipment, or equipment
malfunctions, may give telephone communications company cause to request the user to
disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the
power utility, telephone lines an international metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION
Caution
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician, as appropriate.
290

6.3 Approvals for the TIM 3V-IE variants and the TIM 4R-IE
Note
Note
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an
indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone
interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject
only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices
does not exceed 5.
REN: 0.9
Repair Service Center:
SIEMENS Energy & Automation, Inc.
Factory Service Center
3000 Bill Garland Road
Johnson City, Tennessee 37605
Tel. +1 (423) 461-3000
6.3
Approvals for the TIM 3V-IE variants and the TIM 4R-IE
Product name
Name
Order number
TIM 3V-IE
6NH7 800-3BA00
TIM 3V-IE Advanced
6NH7 800-3CA00
TIM 4R-IE
6NH7 800-4BA00
Note
You can find the currently valid certificates and approvals on the type plate of each product.
IEC 61131-2
The SINAUT products listed above fulfill the requirements and criteria of the IEC 61131-2
standard (Programmable Logic Controllers, Part 2: equipment requirements and
verifications).

291

CE mark
The SINAUT products listed above fulfill the requirements and protection goals of the
following EC directives and meet the harmonized European standards (EN) that have been
published for the programmable logic controllers in the official journals of the European
communities:
2004/108/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
94/9/EC "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive)
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for this product on the Internet at the following
address:
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805878) Tab "Entry List"
Filter settings:
Entry type: "Certificates"
Certificate type: "Declaration of Conformity"
Search item(s): <Name of the module>
The EC Declarations of Conformity are available for the responsible authorities according to
the above-mentioned EC Directive at the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Industry Automation
Industrielle Kommunikation SIMATIC NET
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nrnberg
EMC Directive
The SINAUT products listed above are designed for use in an industrial environment.
Area of application
Industry
Requirements
Emission
Immunity
EN 61000-6-4 : 2001
EN 61000-6-2 : 2001
Explosion Protection Directives

Complying with EN 50021 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type
of protection "n")
II 3G Ex nA II T3...T6
292

Note
When using (installing) SIMATIC NET product in zone 2 hazardous areas make sure that
you note the following "Special conditions"!
You will find these conditions on the SIMATIC NET Manual Collection (DVD ships with every
product):
Directory: All documents
Document name: "Approval of SIMATIC/SIMATIC NET Products for Direct Installation in
Ex-Zone 2"
Installation guidelines
The product meets the requirements if you adhere to the installation guidelines included in
this manual during installation and operation.
WARNING
Personal injury and property damage can occur.
By installing expansions that are not approved for SINAUT products or their target systems,
the requirements and regulations relating to safety and electromagnetic compatibility may
be violated.
Use only expansions approved for the system.
Notes for Australia

The above listed SINAUT products meet the requirements of the standard AS/NZS 2064
(Class A).
UL und CSA approvals

Note
You will recognize the approval, UL/CSA or cULus, assigned to your product from the mark
on the rating plate.
UL approval
UL Recognition Mark Underwriters Laboratories (UL) complying with Standard UL 508:
Report E 85972

293

CSA approval
CSA Certification Mark Canadian Standard Association (CSA) complying with Standard C
22.2 No. 142:
Certification Record 063533C-000
CULus approval, hazardous location

CULUS Listed 7RA9 IND. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
HAZ. LOC.
CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
CSA213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for Use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D T4A
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, AEx nC IIC T4
WARNING
Explosion Hazard Do not disconnect while circuit is live when a flammable or combustible atmosphere is
present.
WARNING
Explosion Hazard Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2.
Note
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D or nonhazardous locations only.
Note
This plant has to be mounted according to the NEC (National Electrical Code)
stipulations.
When used in environments according to class I, division 2 (see above) , the SINAUT
products must be mounted in an enclosure that corresponds to at least IP54 according to
EN 60529.
294

FM approval
Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C,
D.
WARNING
Personal injury and property damage can occur.
In hazardous areas, personal injury or property damage can result if you create or break an
electrical circuit during operation of a SINAUT product (for example, by means of plug-in
connections, fuses, switches).
Do not create or break live electric circuits unless you are certain there is no danger of
explosion.
If you use SINAUT products under FM conditions, they must be mounted in an enclosure
that at least corresponds to IP54 in accordance with EN 60529.

295

296
References
A.1
Introduction to S7 CMs/CPs
Where to find Siemens documentation

You will find the order numbers for the Siemens products of relevance here in the
following catalogs:
SIMATIC NET Industrial Communication / Industrial Identification, catalog IK PI
SIMATIC Products for Totally Integrated Automation and Micro Automation, catalog
ST 70
You can request the catalogs and additional information from your Siemens
representative.
You will find SIMATIC NET manuals on the Internet pages of Siemens Automation
Customer Support:
Auto-Hotspot
Enter the entry ID of the relevant manual as the search item. The ID is listed below some
of the reference entries in brackets.
As an alternative, you will find the SIMATIC NET documentation on the pages of Product
Support:
Auto-Hotspot
Go to the required product group and make the following settings:
Entry list Entry type "Manuals / Operating Instructions"
You will find the documentation for the SIMATIC NET products relevant here on the data
medium that ships with the product:
Product CD / product DVD or
SIMATIC NET Manual Collection
A.2
/1/
SIMATIC
S7-300
CPU 31xC and 31x: Installation
Operating instructions
Entry ID: 13008499 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/13008499)
Siemens AG

297
References
A.3 /2/
A.3
/2/
SIMATIC NET
GPRS/GSM modem SINAUT MD720-3
system manual
Siemens AG
A.4
/3/
SIMATIC NET
EGPRS/GPRS router SINAUT MD741-1
system manual
Siemens AG
entry ID: 31385703 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/31385703)
A.5
/4/
SIMATIC NET
UMTS router with HSDPA SCALANCE M873-0
system manual
Siemens AG
298
Glossary
Analog value
An analog value is an analog process variable such as pressure, temperature etc. It is
acquired over an analog input as a current or voltage value and converted by this module to
a binary-coded value. In total, the converted value occupies 1 word; in other words, 16 bits
including sign bit.
APN - Access Point Name

DNS host name of the access point for an external network (in this case: access point in the
GPRS network to the Internet).
Automation program
The automation program is the program section on the CPU that monitors and controls the
technological process.
COM port
RS-232
Command
A command is binary information that is transferred once as a 1 when there is a signal
change from 0 to 1. The trailing edge from 1 to 0 does not trigger transmission again. At the
receiving end, a command is either output as a pulse (selectable duration) or it is reset by
the local user program after it is has been executed. 8 commands are put together to form a
byte.
When inputting and outputting commands, reliability and safety are important. At the input
end, for example, there is a check to determine whether only one command is pending at the
time of acquisition (1-out-of-n check). Only then is the transmission triggered. If several
commands are pending at the same time, an error is detected. There is no transmission. To
transmit a command byte, a total of 1 word is used: One "original" command byte and a
copy. At the receiving end, a command is only output when the "original" command byte and
the copy have the identical content and when only 1 command was received (once again a
1-out-of-n check).

299
Glossary
Conditional spontaneous message

In the dial-up network, you can specify whether or not a change causes a "conditional
spontaneous" or "unconditional spontaneous" transmission for each individual message.
Conditional spontaneous messages are initially only entered in the send buffer of the TIM.
They are only transmitted when a connection is established to the partner for whatever
reason, for example because an unconditional spontaneous message needs to be
transmitted or because the partner calls.
Even when using pay by volume transmission in a GPRS network, message prioritization
"conditional spontaneous" can also be used. Such a message is not transmitted
immediately, but is first buffered. In a GPRS network, the TIM stores "conditional
spontaneous" messages in the following situations:
When the collected messages reach or exceed a size of 202 bytes.
When an important message (priority "conditional spontaneous" or "alarm") needs to be
transmitted immediately.
When the collected messages have not yet reached a volume of 202 bytes, but the
TCP/IP keepalive interval expires.
Configuration
During configuration, communication- and connection-specific system settings are made for
each device.
Counted value
A counted value (for example amount of flow) is acquired over a digital input as a pulse train
and totaled to produce a binary-coded value. A counted value is 2 words: 28 bits for the
binary-coded value 4 display bits.
CP
Communications processor
CPU
(Central Processing Unit)
The CPU handles the central sequential control and coordination of all activities of the
module.
CSD
(Circuit Switched Data)
Service in GSM for wireless transmission of data at 9 600 bps full duplex. Connections can
be established to other GSM devices, to analog modems or to ISDN modems in the fixed
network. The connection establishment can be started at both ends. Only dial-up
connections are supported.
300
Glossary
Data messages
The actual transmission of data takes the form of data messages. These contain a fixed
amount of a specific information type.
There are status messages, analog value messages, counted value messages, command
messages, setpoint messages, parameter messages and data messages for the various
information types.
DCF77 radio clock

DCF77 is a time signal transmitted on the normal frequency 77.5 kHz as encoded time
information. Reception of the time signal is restricted to Western Europe.
Some TIM variants (TIM 4VD, TIM 42D, TIM 43D, TIM 44D, TIM 4RD) are equipped with a
DCF77 receiver module that can receive the DCF77 time signal either over an indoor or
outdoor antenna. The ST7 time management currently requires the existence of a DCF77
time signal to allow time synchronization of the stations and the control center throughout a
network.
For applications that cannot receive the DCF77 time signal, SINAUT provides a GPS
receiver module with a GPS outdoor antenna that converts the GPS Time signal for the
DCF77 receiver module.
Direct data communication

Communication between two stations. In dial-up networks or in Ethernet, this is achieved by
direct connection establishment between the two stations. On dedicated lines and in wireless
networks or in GPRS mobile wireless service or when using the MSC protocol, direct
communication is more "indirect". It is switched via the closest master TIM.
DSL
Digital Subscriber Line
DSL is used mainly for transmission of telephone and Internet data. By using a higher
bandwidth, data can be transmitted at transmission speeds in the two to three figure Mbps
range.
Ethernet / Industrial Ethernet

Industrial Ethernet is a powerful communication network complying with the international
standard IEEE802.3 (Ethernet) that was optimized to meet the requirements of industrial
application. Ethernet is designed with a linear or star topology. The transmission media are
shielded coaxial cables, twisted pair, or fiber-optic cables. SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet
uses both the Ethernet and Fast Ethernet standards.
Ethernet TIM
TIM

301
Glossary
Firewall
A firewall is a network component via which a secure network can be linked with an
unsecure network. The task of a firewall is to control data exchange between the networks.
General request (GR)

With a general request, subscribers in a SINAUT network can request a current process
image from their communications partners. This happens automatically when a disrupted
connection has been restored or when a failed partner reports a restart. Apart from the
automatic general request, a general request can also be triggered at any time by the user
program or from the control center.
TD7onTIM does not support the general request.
GPRS
(General Packet Radio Service)
GPRS is an expansion of GSM mobile wireless that adds packet-oriented data transmission.
Network connections are established over GPRS either in the Internet or in private networks.
The data is transmitted using the Internet protocols TCP/IP or UDP/IP.
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
GPS is a worldwide US satellite navigation system for highly accurate location, navigation
and time distribution. It operates with 24 orbiting satellites (21 operational and 3 spare
satellites) on 6 satellite orbits at a height of approximately 20,000 kilometers. Each satellite
contains an atomic clock whose time is transmitted continuously along with the orbit data.
The GPS receiver receives data from a maximum of six satellites and calculates its position
based on these values. Once the position has been calculated, the transmission time of the
data from the individual satellites can be calculated. The GPS world time (UTC) is calculated
in the system based on these values.
GSM
(Global System for Mobile communications)
Worldwide standard for wireless transmission of voice, data, fax and text messages (SMS).
GSM-based wireless networks can be found in many countries throughout the world. A
distinction is made according to frequencies: PCS 850 MHz, GSM 900 MHz, DCS 1800 MHz
and PCS 1900 MHz.
Image memory / send buffer

A TIM has a send buffer and an image memory for buffering send messages.
Before it is forwarded to the communications partner, each message is entered in the send
buffer. Once it has been sent, the message is cleared from the send buffer. A message is
transmitted according to either the send buffer principle or the image memory principle.
The user specifies the transmission principle during configuration of the data messages.
302
Glossary
The storage capacity of the send buffer depends on the particular TIM type and ranges from
10 000 to 56 000 data messages.
Image memory principle

A fixed position is reserved in the image memory for each data message transferred to the
TIM for transmission. Each newly transferred message always overwrites the old message in
the image memory. The image memory therefore contains all data messages with their most
recent content from the process.
If a send message is entered using the image memory principle, only a reference to the
location of the message in the message image memory is entered. If the TIM has not yet
been able to transmit the message when the same message is transferred to it again, the
message is not entered in the send buffer a second time, but rather the image is simply
updated.
At the time of transmission, the message is sent with its latest content from the image
memory. Only then can the message be entered in the send buffer again.
Transmission using the image memory principle achieves the following:
There is less load on transmission link, fewer messages are transmitted.
There is less load on the send buffer of the TIM; an image memory message is entered a
maximum of once in the send buffer.
See also Image memory / send buffer
ISDN
(Integrated Services Digital Network)
ISDN integrates various services in one transmission network. ISDN networks integrate
telephone, telefax, teletext, Datex-J, video phones and data transfer. This makes a wide
variety of digital services available to the user: Language, texts, graphics and other data.
LAN
(Local Area Network)
Local area network.
Local data traffic is possible in the SINAUT ST7 system via the LAN types "MPI" and
"Industrial Ethernet".
In SINAUT, the LAN is also used as a "WAN", for example when communication via the
Internet is required or when GPRS stations transfer their data onto the Internet to a master
station via a GPRS network.
Local TIM
A TIM connected to a PC (ST7cc, ST7sc) or an S7 CPU over the MPI bus, Industrial
Ethernet or an IP-based network.

303
Glossary
LTOP
(Line Transformer with Overvoltage Protection)
The LTOP overvoltage protection modules limit extraneous voltage and overvoltage to a
non-critical level. The floating transformer also provides electrical isolation preventing
coupling of voltages into other cable sections. An LTOP protects persons and investment
and is therefore an indispensable safety element in private dedicated line networks.
Main and subcycle

The sequence of the polling cycle can be structured on the master TIM by assigning
individual polling stations to a main cycle or a subcycle. The subcycle is always activated at
the end of the main cycle; in other words, once all stations from the main cycle have been
polled, a certain, selectable number of stations are polled in the subcycle. Following this, all
the stations in the main cycle are polled again.
Master TIM
WAN interface of a TIM set to the "master" function. Use in control centers and node
stations.
MPI
The multipoint interface (MPI) is the programming device interface of SIMATIC S7. Devices
with an MPI interface (for example a TIM), can also communicate with each other (MPI bus).
MSC protocol
The MSC protocol is a proprietary protocol and is used in SINAUT ST7 for the data
exchange between TCP/IP-compliant devices in Ethernet, landline or mobile wireless
networks. The MSC protocol provides an authentication mechanism and simple encryption of
data. To transfer messages in IP-based WANs, the MSC protocol is linked into the protocol
of SINAUT ST7.
Multimaster polling with time slots

When stations need to communicate with more than one master station in dedicated line or
wireless operation, the multimaster polling with time slots mode is used. Each of the
connected master stations is assigned one or more defined time slots per minute for polling.
The master stations then have their turn to poll in every minute.
304
Glossary
Node station
A node station is a station located between the master station and stations in the hierarchy
of a telecontrol network. One or more subordinate stations are connected to a node station.
The data traffic between these stations and the master station is handled via the node
station. Direct data exchange between the node station and the subordinate stations is also
possible. It is possible to have several node stations in a SINAUT network; in other words
the data traffic between stations and master station can involve two or more node stations.
Node station TIM

WAN interface of a TIM in a node station set to the "node station" function.
If the TIM used in a node station has two WAN interfaces, the "station", "node station" and
"master station" functions can be used in any combination on one TIM.
OPC
(OLE for Process Control)
OPC includes a series of specifications for data exchange in automation engineering
between controllers, alarm transmitters etc. and control systems.
Organizational message
Organizational messages are used to execute organizational system functions.
These include, for example:
General requests
Time synchronization
Counted value storage
Coordinated connection establishment and termination in a dial-up network
Message indicating station startup and station failure
Requests for and transmission of subscriber records
Parameter assignment
A device is assigned the parameters it requires for starting up when it is supplied with data.
Permanent call
A permanent call does not interrupt the normal polling cycle; it is always executed alternating
with the standard poll from the normal polling cycle.
PG / programming device
A PG is a personal computer designed specifically for use in industry. A PG is fully equipped
for programming SIMATIC automation systems.

305
Glossary
PG Routing
Using PG routing, it is possible to access programmable modules or modules with diagnostic
capability beyond network boundaries from a programming device (PG) or computer (PC).
PLC
Programmable logic controller
Polling
Polling is a method of SINAUT data transmission in which a master TIM controls the data
exchange in the telecontrol network.
Using a polling message, the master TIM instructs the connected stations (station TIMs) one
after the other to transmit their stored data messages to the master TIM. If a polled station
has no stored data messages, it responds with an acknowledgment message and the polling
cycle then continues by polling the next station.
A station that has stored data sends a single data message or, if block transfer was
configured, several messages in a block. In the reply, the station indicates whether it still has
other stored data messages. In this is the case, the station is then polled again immediately
until all stored messages have been transmitted or until a selected maximum number of
messages have been sent. The polling cycle then moves on to the next station.
Polling mode
Polling

The polling with time slots mode is used in a wireless network in which the use of the radio
frequency assigned by the registration authorities must be shared with other users. Each
user typically has 6 seconds per minute to exchange data with its stations. The frequency
must then be released for other operators. During the allocated time slot, this pooling variant
functions like a normal polling system.
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS is the open, internationally standardized (EN50170) bus system for process and
field communication with field devices and for data communication within an automation cell.
The uses of PROFIBUS range from production and process automation to building
automation.
Protocol
A protocol is a set of rules for controlled transfer of data. Protocols, for example, specify the
data structure, the structure of data packets and the coding. Protocols can also specify a
control mechanisms and hardware and software requirements.
306
Glossary
Requested message
Polled messages are data messages of a station or node TIM with a special identifier
indicating that they were sent in response to a general request from the master station.
RJ-12
This describes a 6-pin connecting cable with a standardized modular (Western) connector.
RJ-45
This describes a 8-pin connecting cable with a standardized modular (Western) connector.
RS-232
RS-232 is a standard for serial (i.e. bit-by bit) data transmission with +12 V and -12 V
signals. RS-232 is a Recommended Standard of the Electronic Industries Association. For
the RS-232 interface, 9-pin and 25-pin connections with D-sub connectors are normal.
These are sub-miniature connectors with a D-shaped face.
RS-485
RS-485 is a standard for data transmission with 5 V differential signals. The RS-485
interface uses only one pair of wires and is operated in half duplex. The connection is
multipoint-compliant; in other words, up to 32 subscribers can be connected.
Send buffer
Image memory / send buffer
Send buffer principle

If a send message is transmitted using the send buffer principle, each time the message is
transferred to the TIM, it is entered completely in the send buffer. If such a message cannot
(or should not) be transmitted immediately, it may exist more than once in the send buffer.
When it is sent, the message is taken completely from the send buffer and transmitted.
See also Image memory / send buffer
Setpoint
A setpoint is a selected digital or analog value that is transmitted once after the value has
been set. The entered value is recalculated when necessary. A setpoint is always
transmitted as 1 word. At the receiving end, the setpoint can either the output directly to the
process as an analog signal (for example to an external controller) or the value is made
available to the local program for further processing (setpoint for internal controller, limit
value, threshold value etc.).

307
Glossary
Setpoint and command input are interlocked for safety reasons; in other words, a setpoint
input cannot be made at the same time as a command input. In this case, the acquisition
program recognizes an error. Neither the setpoint nor the command are transmitted.
SIM card
(Subscriber Identity Module)
The SIM card is an identification card for a subscriber of a GSM mobile wireless network.
SIMATIC S7
Siemens automation system
Simple Internet communication

In SINAUT ST7, simple Internet communication means data exchange between TCP/IPcompliant devices in Ethernet, landline or mobile wireless networks using the MSC
protocol.
SINAUT
(SIemens Network AUTomation)
Station control system or telecontrol system based on SIMATIC S7
SINAUT message
An ST7 message contains the data of an ST7 object for transmission. Depending on the
object type, a message can contain either all data of an ST7 object or only a contiguous
subarea of the object data.
SINAUT object
A SINAUT object contains the data of one or more process variables such as analog values,
commands, calculated values, status information on motors, sliders etc. An ST7 object has
type-specific processing functions and change checks assigned to it to minimize the
communication traffic in the WAN. Type-specific processing functions include, for example,
threshold checks or mean value calculation with the object type for analog values. The
change check is designed so that a message is generated only when the object data has
changed compared with the last time its value was transferred or when the type-specific
processing enables generation of a message because the object data is "worth" transferring.
SINAUT ST7 protocol

This protocol is used in the SINAUT ST7 system for data transmission via classic WAN
networks and IP-based networks. It is a further development of the SINAUT ST1 protocol.
308
Glossary
SINAUT TD7 Library

The SINAUT TD7 library is a software package with blocks for the CPU. The package can be
run both on an S7-300 or an S7-400 CPU (except the S7-400H CPUs). There are only a few
blocks intended specifically for the S7-300 or S7-400 CPUs.
The SINAUT TD7 software in the stations allows change-driven transmission of process data
between the individual CPUs and the control center, for example ST7cc. Failure of
connections, CPUs, or the control center are displayed. Once a problem has been corrected
or the CPUs or control center have started up, data is updated automatically. When
necessary, data messages can be given a time stamp.
There are two variants of the SINAUT TD7 software package:
TD7onCPU
Library with SINAUT blocks that are linked into the program of the CPU and are executed
there. The library can be used with all TIM types and is suitable for all S7-300 and S7-400
CPUs (except the S7-400H CPUs).
TD7onTIM
SINAUT TD7onTIM is the TD7 variant that runs on the TIM. It is available for the
Ethernet TIMs and can only be used in an S7-300 station. TD7onTIM and TD7onCPU
can only be used as alternatives in a station. Simultaneous use is not possible.
SINAUT TD7onCPU
SINAUT TD7 Library
SINAUT TD7onTIM
SINAUT TD7 Library
SMS
(Short Message Service)
The short message service in the GSM standard is used to transfer short text messages to
mobile wireless users.
When the short messages are transferred, they are first transferred to the SMS center
(SMSC) using a store-and-forward technique. They are buffered there and then forwarded to
the recipient. The sender can query the status of the message in the SMS center or can
request acknowledgment of delivery.
SMSC
Short Message Service Center

309
Glossary
Spontaneous message
In SINAUT networks, messages are always transmitted spontaneously; in other words,
messages are created and transmitted only when changes to process values occur or eventdriven. These messages are known as spontaneous messages.
See also "Conditional spontaneous message" and "Unconditional spontaneous
message"
Spontaneous mode
The spontaneous mode is a method of SINAUT data transmission in which subscribers can
exchange data among themselves directly. Here, no central entity is necessary in the form of
a master TIM as in polling mode (see "Polling mode"). The spontaneous mode is intended
for data transmission in dial-up networks and for communication via IP-based networks.
For transmission in a dial-up network and in pay-by-volume/time IP-based networks (for
example GPRS), the data to be sent is assigned different priorities during parameter
assignment ("high" or "normal", with TD7onTIM also "alarm"). When data with high or alarm
priority are ready for transmission, the dial-up connection is established immediately. If the
data has "normal" priority, it is first stored on the TIM. This data is then sent the next time a
connection is established to the partner for whatever reason. This can, for example, be the
situation when information with higher priority needs to be sent or when the partner
establishes a connection to exchange data.
Squelch
Squelch
Squelch reduces the interfering noise in communications during breaks in transmission. This
increases the signal-to-noise ratio.
ST7 message
ST7 messages consist of a frame, an area for addresses and control fields (message
header) and an area for net data (object data) with the time stamp. The ST7 messages are
divided into organizational messages and data messages. The structure of an ST7 message
is based on the guidelines of the ST7 protocol.
ST7 protocol
This protocol is used in the SINAUT ST7 system for transmitting process data over WANs.
310
Glossary
ST7cc
SINAUT ST7cc is the ideal control center system based on SIMATIC WinCC for SINAUT
ST7.
It is specially designed for event-driven and time-stamped data transmission in the SINAUT
system. It avoids the possible loss of data that can occur with cyclic polling in WinCC. It also
ensures the use of the correct event time supplied by the SINAUT stations for all WinCC
messages and archive entries. The integrated process image contains all process data as
well as the status of all SINAUT subscribers in the network and makes this data available
directly to WinCC for fast transfer to the process image.
ST7sc
The SINAUT system allows the networking of SIMATIC stations with a control center over a
WAN (Wide Area Network). This control center can also be a SIMATIC station or a PCbased control center, for example, WinCC with the SINAUT ST7cc add-on.
SINAUT ST7sc allows the manufacturers of control systems to connect to SINAUT without
needing to integrate a SINAUT interface. Communication is over OPC: As an OPC server,
SINAUT ST7sc forms the interface between the SINAUT system and a control system
connected as an OPC client.
The OPC interface is also suitable for data exchange with other applications, for example,
the Microsoft Office application Excel.
Station
In the SINAUT world, the term station includes the entire hardware components required for
acquisition, processing and communication with other stations or a master station. A station
can, for example, consist of a modem, a TIM and a programmable controller (in turn
consisting of a CPU and I/O modules). A SINAUT station can also include several
programmable controllers, or, in the case of a node station, several TIMs.
Station TIM
WAN interface of a TIM set to the "station" function. Use in stations.
Status message
A status message is a process status (for example pump on, valve open) or alarm (for
example limit value exceeded). This is binary information with the possible values 0 or 1.
Eight status messages are put together to form one byte.
TCP/IP
(Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol)

311
Glossary
Network protocols for connecting two computers in the Internet. IP is the basic protocol. UDP
is based on IP and sends individual packets. These can arrive at the recipient in a different
order from the order in which they were sent - they can even be lost. TCP is used to make
the connection reliable and makes sure, for example, that data packets are passed on to the
application in the correct order. In addition to the IP addresses, UDP and TCP also involve
port numbers between 1 and 65535 with which the various services can be distinguished.
On a Windows PC, the WINSOCK.DLL (or WSOCK32.DLL) is responsible for handling the
two protocols.
TD7, TD7onCPU, TD7onTIM

SINAUT TD7 Library
TIM
(Telecontrol Interface Module)
The TIM transmission processor is a communications module that handles all data
transmission functions provided by the SINAUT system independently. Depending on the
type, the TIM has one or two WAN interfaces, an MPI interface or an Ethernet interface.
Depending on the requirements, a variety of transmission equipment can be connected. The
module is supplied in an S7-300 housing.
The TIM is available in two basic variants:
TIM 4
TIM 4R / TIM 4RD with MPI port both for installation as a CP in an S7-300 and as a
stand-alone device for connection over MPI to one or more S7-400 and S7-300 PLCs.
The TIM 4R / TIM 4RD has two WAN ports via serial interfaces for external modems. The
two WANs can be identical or different, for example dedicated line plus telephone
network.
The TIM 4 series also includes the older modules TIM 42/42D, TIM 43/43D, TIM 44/44D
and TIM 4V/4VD, see release 05/2007 of the manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22548697).
Ethernet TIM
TIM 3V-IE variants with two WAN attachments: An RS-232 port and an RJ-45
Ethernet port, only for installation as a CP in S7-300. With the TIM 3V-IE, SINAUT
communication is either over the RS-232 or over the Ethernet port. The
TIM 3V-IE Advanced can use the RS-232 port at the same time as the Ethernet port.
TIM 4R-IE with four WAN connections: Two RS-232 interfaces and two RJ-45
Ethernet interfaces. Installation as a CP in an S7-300 or as standalone device in a
separate TIM rack. With the TIM 4R-IE, SINAUT communication is handled over the
RS-232 and over the Ethernet interfaces simultaneously.
The TIM 3 series includes the older modules TIM 3V, TIM 32, TIM 33 and TIM 34, see
release 05/2007 of the manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22548697).
312
Glossary
Topology
The topology describes the network structure. It specifies how a network (transmission
medium and connectable devices or computers) is interconnected. Possible structures are
linear (bus), star, ring, redundant ring and tree structure.
Unconditional spontaneous message

In the dial-up network, you can specify whether or not a change causes an "conditional
spontaneous" or "unconditional spontaneous" transmission for each individual message.
Unconditional spontaneous messages cause the connection to be established immediately.
Even with pay-by-volume/time transmission in a GPRS network, you can use the message
prioritization "unconditional spontaneous"; in other words, in contrast to a "conditional
spontaneous" message, a message is transmitted immediately.
See also "conditional spontaneous message" and "spontaneous message"
VPN
(Virtual Private Network)
Technology for secure transportation of confidential data in public IP networks, for example
Internet.
WAN
(Wide Area Network)
Data network with a large geographical span, such as the Internet. telephone or enterprise
networks.
The following WANs can be used with SINAUT:

313
Glossary
Classic WAN networks

SINAUT communication is possible via the following networks:
Private or leased dedicated lines
Private wireless networks (directional or omnidirectional wireless and private mobile
wireless with time slots)
Mobile wireless network
A classic WAN is connected via suitable transmission device (modem) to a serial
interface of the TIM.
IP-based WAN networks
SINAUT communication is possible via the following IP-based networks:
Over wireless by using special wireless systems optimized for Ethernet, for example,
the components of a SCALANCE W IWLAN system
Via fiber-optic cable, for example in conjunction with SCALANCE X switches with
optical ports. This allows distances of up to 70 km to be covered.
Over public networks and Internet with DSL or GPRS
Private wideband systems such as OTN, PCM30 etc.
An IP-based WAN is normally connected to an RJ-45 interface of an Ethernet TIM via an
Ethernet-compliant module (see section "Installation guidelines").
To allow use of GPRS, the serial interface of a station TIM 3V-IE can be connected to a
GSM network via the GSM modem MD720-3. This requires the MSC protocol to be
enabled in the STEP 7 > Properties dialog of the TIM > "Interfaces" tab. The WAN
interface then behaves like an Ethernet interface.
314
Index
A
Ambient temperature
MD modem, 283
TIM, 97, 169
ANT794-4MR GSM/GPRS antenna, 48
ATEX, 165, 187, 292
G
GPRS, 46
GPS receiver, 57
H
Hazardous area, 165, 186
HW Config, 172
C
CE mark, 285
Certification, 285
Configuration PC
Operating systems, 4
STEP 7 version, 4
Configuration software, 172
Configurations
with TIM 3V-IE variants, 101
with TIM 4, 124
with TIM 4R-IE, 110, 117
Configuring a TIM, 172
Connecting cables, 63, 136, 145, 153
Current consumption, 99
Current information, 6
D
DCF77 radio clock, 55
Dedicated line mode
MD3 modem, 248
Default startup, 181
Default startup, automatic, 182
Dimensions for installation, 98, 169, 283
Downloading SDBs, 176
E
EDGE, 46
EGPRS, 46
Ex Zone 2, 292
F
FAQs, 6
I
Installation guide
General, 97, 168
MD modem, 282
TIM 3 / TIM 4, 119
TIM 3V-IE variants, 101
TIM 4, 123
TIM 4R-IE, 108, 116
L
LED display
MD3 modem (hardware 4), 236
MD4 modem, 269
Modem MD2, 199
Modem MD720-3, 188
TIM 3V-IE, 133
TIM 3V-IE Adv, 133
TIM 4, 151
TIM 4R-IE, 142
LTOP, 53, 227
M
Manuals, 6
MD 3 attenuation values, 263
MD modem, 37
MD2 attenuation values, 224
MD2 freqencies, 224
MD2 range, 224
MD2 terminating resistors, 212
MD2 transmission speeds, 224
MD2 voltage and level values, 226
MD720-3, 44

315
Index
MD740-1, 46
MD741-1, 46
MP3 range, 263
N
NetPro, 174
O
Operating systems, 4
Options for attachment and settings
MD3 modem (hardware 4), 238, 252
MD4 modem, 270, 277
MD741-1, 193
Modem MD2, 200, 211
Modem MD720-3, 188
TIM 4R / 4RD, 160
Ordering data
ANT794-4MR antenna, 48
Connecting cables, 63
LTOP, 54
Modems, 38
SINAUT ST7 software, 73
SINAUT ST7cc, 79
SINAUT ST7sc, 85
TIM, 16
P
Parameter assignment
Network nodes, 174
Networks, 174
SINAUT connections, 175
TIM, 173
Power loss, 99
Power supply, 170, 283
Standards, 285
STEP 7 version, 4
Structure
LTOP, 227
MD3 modem (hardware 4), 235
MD4 modem, 268
Modem MD2, 198
TIM 3V-IE, 132
TIM 3V-IE Adv, 132
TIM 4, 149
TIM 4R-IE, 140
T
Technical specifications
ANT794-4MR GSM/GPRS antenna, 52
DCF77 antennas, 60
GPS receiver, 61
GSM router MD720-3, 49
LTOP, 54
MD3 modem, 40
MD4 modem, 42
MD741-1 GPRS modem, 50
Modem MD2, 39
SINAUT ST7cc, 80
SINAUT ST7sc, 86
TIM 3V-IE, 20
TIM 3V-IE Advanced, 22
TIM 4R / 4RD, 34
TIM 4R-IE, 28
Test specifications, 285
TIM 3V-IE, 17
TIM 4, 31
TIM 4R-IE, 25
Training, 6
V
Version history (manual), 7
R
DCF77 / GPS, 59
S
Safety notices, 164, 185
Service & Support, 6
SINAUT ST7 software package, 65
SINAUT ST7cc, 75
SINAUT ST7sc, 80
316

Syh Sinaut-St7-B1 76

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Syh Sinaut-St7-B1 76

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Syh Sinaut-St7-B1 76

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Station control system

Network structures and

Volume 1: System and Hardware

Proper use of Siemens products

Order number: C79000-G8976-C178

Station control system

SINAUT ST7 configuration and diagnostics software V5.2

Station control system

System Manual, 08/2011, C79000-G8976-C178-08

New SINAUT TD7 library V2.2 SP2 for the CPU

Purpose of this documentation

Station control system

Validity of the documentation

Further information on the Internet

Training, Service & Support

Station control system

System Manual, 08/2011, C79000-G8976-C178-08

Release 05/2007 of the manual (C79000-G89xx-C222-06)

Station control system

SINAUT TIM firmware V1.2 for the TIM 3V-IE variants

Release 10/2006 of the manual (C79000-G89xx-C222-05)

Station control system

System Manual, 08/2011, C79000-G8976-C178-08

Properties and technical specifications of the SINAUT components........................................................ 13

Area of application .......................................................................................................................13

Components in a SINAUT ST7 system .......................................................................................14

SINAUT TIM communication modules.........................................................................................15

The classic SINAUT ST7 modems ..............................................................................................36

Mobile wireless components........................................................................................................44

LTOP overvoltage protection modules ........................................................................................53

Radio clock components..............................................................................................................55

Connecting cables .......................................................................................................................63

The SINAUT ST7 standard software package.............................................................................65

Station control system

Installation of the SINAUT ST7 standard software package....................................................... 73

SINAUT ST7cc, the add-on for WinCC....................................................................................... 75

SINAUT ST7sc SCADA Connect software ................................................................................. 80

Network structures and topologies........................................................................................................... 87

Overview of the possible network types...................................................................................... 87

Horizontal and vertical installation .............................................................................................. 97

Dimensions for installation of the SINAUT ST7 components ..................................................... 98

Current consumption and power loss of the SINAUT ST7 components..................................... 98

Installing the TIM 3V-IE variants in an S7-300.......................................................................... 101

Installing the TIM 4R-IE in an S7-300 ....................................................................................... 108

Standalone TIM 4R-IE with an S7-400 or PC ........................................................................... 116

Installation of the TIM 4 as CP in an S7-300 ............................................................................ 119

Standalone TIM 4 with an S7-400 or PC .................................................................................. 123

Installing and putting a TIM into operation ............................................................................................. 131

Design of the TIM 3V-IE variants .............................................................................................. 132

Design of the TIM 4R-IE............................................................................................................ 140

Design of the TIM 3 and TIM 4 modules................................................................................... 149

Station control system

System Manual, 08/2011, C79000-G8976-C178-08

LEDs of the TIM 3 / TIM 4..........................................................................................................151

Configuring a TIM and setting parameters ................................................................................172

Startup activities of the TIM module ..........................................................................................177

Installation and commissioning of the modems and routers................................................................... 185

Important notes on using the device..........................................................................................185

GSM/GPRS modem MD720-3...................................................................................................187

Station control system